Home

E5CN/E5AN/E5EN/E5GN Digital Temperature Controllers

1. JE a 1 1 OMRON A T n o oo eet 2 2 a Let zl l y f j aF 230 a SE in Oa Sea h faceun gangy SUBS J C2005 om i 4 aat Pi HA P cian al 41 AAMT AAM be ps NIN S 8 gee aer U J pL EA IL EE NV lx V O I N A DU AY a B P fi J E lt am EB oO OUTA CMW MAN HABA e C J 7 37 3
2. Auxiliary output 2 connection screws o r 7 3 H Galt T P i z GoD 2 c 6 ita YY Se J 7 a E TR LE 24 we 5 5 i m Auxiliary Gilt output 2 Sa ve GE mn a UT J a PL j IUH i Since the voltage output control output is not electrically insula
3. When calibration has been performed after purchase the user calibration information shown in the following illustration will be displayed when moving to the calibration level A dot is displayed 259 User Calibration Section 6 2 6 2 User Calibration The E5CN CN U AN EN GN is correctly calibrated before it is shipped from the factory and normally need not be calibrated by the user If however it must be calibrated by the user use the parameters for calibrat ing temperature input and analog input OMRON however cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user Also calibration data is overwritten with the latest calibration results The default calibration settings cannot be restored after user calibration Perform user calibration with care 6 2 1 Calibrating Inputs The input type selected in the parameter is used for calibration The input types are as follows Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs e Thermocouple 16 types e Infrared temperature sensor 4 types e Analog input 1 type e Platinum resistance thermometer 5 types Controllers with Analog Inputs e Current input 2 types e Voltage input 3 types 6 2 2 Registering Calibration Data The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered It can be offi cially registered as calibration data only when a
4. a 8 E5GN LIDHI Communications RS 485 e When communications are to be used with the ES5SLIN ULIL_103 connect communications cable across terminals 11 and 12 terminals 21 and 22 or terminals 7 and 8 1 lt B lt gt B 4 RS 485 12 lt gt A RS 485 lt gt A 43 Do not use ES5CN LILLI03 OOO LILILI03 E5AN EN LILILIO3 a gt B RS 485 S E5GN LILLI03 LILILI03 Specify both ends of the transmission path including the host computer as end nodes that is connect terminators to both ends The minimum terminal resistance is 54 Q 42 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Communications Unit Connection Diagram E5CN Host computer Shield E5CN No 31 Terminator 120 Q 1 2 W E5AN EN Host computer RS 485 Shield E5AN EN No 31 RS 485 Terminator 120 Q 1 2 W E5GN No 31 No No ref ag ref AG 7 80 Terminator 120 Q 1 2 W A lt B 1 Mark A gt B 0 Space e The RS 485 connection can be either one to one or one to N A maxi mum of 32 Units including the host computer can be connected in one to N systems The maximum total cable length is 500 m Use a shielded AWG 24 to AWG14 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for the E5CN E5EN or E5AN U
5. 216 xtraction of Square 209 Root Enable N O Move to Advanced 209 Function Setting Level N h N Alarm 2 Hysteresis PID ON OFF Alarm 3 Type NO O gt 210 Standard or Lo Alarm 3 Hysteresis Heating Cooling 209 ST Transfer Output Type 210 Program Pattern ransfer Output Upper 212 imit N N O O O1 O1 LN E Input Type e This parameter sets the type of sensor e When this parameter is changed the set point limiter is changed to the defaults If the limiter must be specified set the SP Upper Limit and SP EN Lower Limit parameters initial setting level again e Set one of the set values from the following table A The defaults are as follows Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Setting Inputs 5 K thermocouple Controllers with Analog Inputs current input 4 to 20 mA e If a platinum resistance thermometer is mistakenly connected while a set ting for other than a platinum resistance thermometer is in effect S ERR will be displayed To clear the S ERR display check the wiring and then cycle the power 200 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 oe Input type Specificat
6. i i G Qe E53 E53 CNUIBLIN2 in the _ N2 in the E53 AKBinthe AKB in the E5GN DO0B LILILIB E5CN I MC 500 E5AN EN LIMLJ 500 N for ESCN for ESAN EN e Use event inputs under the following conditions e The outflow current is approximately 7 mA Contact input ON 1 kQ max OFF 100 kQ min No contact input ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current Polarities during no contact input are as follows Z EV1 p EV1 8 A EV2 9 EV2 E53 CNUIBLIN2 in E53 AKB in the E5GN LIULIB the E5CN LIML 1 500 E5AN EN LIML 500 N for ESCN for ESAN EN 41 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 CT Inputs e When the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is to be used with the E5CN LJMLJ 500 with an E53 CNLIH HHLIN2 Option Unit con nect a current transformer CT across terminals 14 and 15 or terminals 13 and 15 no polarity e When the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is to be used with the E5AN EN LILJHLJ 500 N or ES5AN EN LILJIHHLI 500 N connect a current transformer CT across terminals 14 and 15 or terminals 15 and 16 no polarity e When using the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm with the E5GN ee connect the current transformer CT across terminals 7 and 8 no polarity be be be f E53 T E53 CNULHUN2 LIHI E53 E53 CNCIHHLIN2 ESAN EN LICIHCI 500 N UHL 500 N ESAN EN CICIHH 1 500 N HHL_J 500 N for E5CN
7. oe D Zz ai BH ery LO YT LO Dp ESr COD CAED cL N N DTS an Cougs AAT Dg J i GS oll 48 E 2 i 100 44 8 i amp Hi iO Uo 5B EUL B df 1 mI ead f MANY pe i suet io m D C EA E C8 J lo x Ue hi LO B Cy Go L ll N N Oa HA 4 ap en J 7 J N N D F GD Cogs a i D Cm ol CE CS LE J J J 4 u 5 aby ot H fi TEN i i 3 D E i S V I I i l J 23 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 2 Panel Cutout Unit mm E5CN CN U Individual Mounting Group Mounting 48 x number of Units 2 5 1 0 gt E O CO E5AN Group Mounting 96 x number of Units 3 5 1 a O N E5EN Individual Mounting Group Mounting 48 x number of Units 2 5 1 0 4570 Ke
8. 000 5 1 2 About Related Parameter Displays 2005 5 1 3 The Order of Parameters in This Section 5 1 4 Alarms Protect Level iatecgia Sacto 2 tice Operation Level Adjustment Level Monitor Setting Item Level Manual Control Level Initial Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level 0 0 cee eee Communications Setting Level SECTION 5 158 158 158 158 158 159 163 177 196 197 199 218 255 Parameters 157 Conventions Used in this Section Section 5 1 5 1 Conventions Used in this Section 5 1 1 Meanings of Icons Used in this Section Function T Setting m Monitor Operation See Describes the functions of the parameter Describes the setting range and default of the parameter Used to indicate parameters used only for monitoring Describes the parameter settings such as those for Operation Commands and procedures Used to indicate information on descriptions in which the parameter is used or the names of related parameters 5 1 2 About Related Parameter Displays Parameters are displayed only when the conditions for use given on the right of the parameter heading are satisfied Protected parameters are not dis played regardless of the conditions for use but the settings of these parame ters are still valid il The E5CN must be in operation and He AT E
9. Za x P l l LI Lit Auxiliary output 1 must be assigned e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to auxiliary output 1 Setting range No function is assigned to auxiliary output 1 Heating control output is output I L N Ni j Cooling control output is output See note 1 Mi Alarm 1 is output Mc Alarm 2 is output Alarm 3 is output End Program end is output See note 2 Md vi hit HLM Control output ON OFF count alarm Wm i Work bit 1 See note 4 Ti VE J Work bit 2 See note 4 Work bit 3 See note 4 Work bit 4 See note 4 ri hit Ti i _ Ij on Ly Work bit 5 See note 4 J j rr Work bit 6 See note 4 Ti 1 m Work bit 7 See note 4 Work bit 8 See note 4 ri ni T 1 If L a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output 2 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 3 If a setting is changed when the Program Pattern parameter is not set to OFF control automatically switches to F E Na 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used 5 If the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating co
10. 120 min 923 a 24 Installation Section 2 1 E5GN Individual Mounting Group Mounting 48 x number of units a e Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers e The recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm for the E5CN E5CN U and E5GN and 1 to 8 mm for E5AN and E5EN e Units must not be closely mounted vertically Observe the recommended mounting space limits e When group mounting several Controllers ensure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the ambient operating temperature listed in the specifications 2 1 3 Mounting E5CN CN U E53 COV17 Terminal Cover Adapter Waterproof packing ae Panel E5CN E5CN U For the Wiring Socket for the E5CN U order the P2CF 11 or P3GA 11 sepa rately Mounting to the Panel 1 2 3 1 For waterproof mounting waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function There is no waterproof packing included with the E5CN U 2 Insert the E5CN E5CN U into the mounting hole in the panel 3 Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel and tempora
11. Key less than 1 s Starting in Press the O automatic mode PF Key See note 2 Key for at least 3 s ce Key at the last parameter in each level PF Key See note 2 Other than the Auto Manual Switch display Initial Setting Level eae PID Key or the PF 4 Control Key for at least Press the Press the O Key less than 1 s BES only 1s Q Key for D oS PV MV See note 1 at least 1 s A Boy N H Input Type D00 5 Operation Level 4 cS ae EL N H Scaling Upper Limit OOt mn ooo LOL ar 4 Process Value J E RUN STOP Eg L Added when Additional a a Tm Scaling Lower Limit 355 PV display is ON Bec ALIN g LW L J ae Gf wn ar 25 P
12. 200 V 200 V Product To CT input Product To CT input The heater power supply provides 15 A when the current is normal and 10 A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows 76 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Three phase Heaters Burnout Burnout 200 V 200 V 15 A gt 200V Product y To CT input 15 A gt Product To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 A x V3 x Section 3 10 Normal current Heater burnout current 2 Heater burnout detection current _15 10 _ 12 5 A Delta Connecting Lines Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal 17 3 A gt 200 V Product 17 3 A gt To CT input Product To CT input The current when each phase is normal is 17 3 A V3 x 10 A ES a OS Burnout ia 200 V A 200 V Product y To CT input Burnout 10 A gt Product To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 A x V3 x 3 2 15A 1 3 10A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load line is as fol lows Heater burnout detection current 17 3 15 2 16 1 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current 17 3 10 2 13 65 A To enable detection in either case use 16 1 A as the heater burnout detection current 77 78 Using Heater Burnout Heater
13. ALH i ALHO ALHI 3 Alarm 1 must be assigned Alarm 1 Hysteresis The alarm 1 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 2 must be assigned Alarm 2 Hysteresis The alarm 2 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 3 must be assigned Alarm 3 Hysteresis The alarm 3 type must not be 0 12 or 13 e These parameters set the hysteresis for alarms 1 2 and 3 Function a Models Setting range Unit __ Default _ Model with thermocouple resis 0 1 to 999 9 C or F 0 2 Setting tance thermometer universal See note input Model with analog Input 0 01 to 99 99 Note Set None as the unit for analog inputs E Related Parameters See Alarm value 1 to 3 Page 173 Alarm value upper limit 1 to 3 Alarm value a lower limit 1 to 3 Page 174 operation level Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Pages 207 to 210 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output 1 to 3 open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 1 to 3 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level Al hP Alarm 2 Type Alarm 2 must be assigned Function _ Setting See e Select one of the following four alarm 2 types Deviation deviation range absolute value or PV change rate alarm Refer to the alarm 1 type list The 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm setting in that list cannot be used E Related Parameters Alarm value 2 Page 173 Alarm value upper limit 2 Alarm value lower limit 2 Page 174 operation level Standby sequence reset Page 22
14. SE WiiWii MNN N IW AA AA AA SV PAY 0 YA 2 m ooo T2 Ha tot ct E5AN User s Manual Basic Type E5CN E5AN E5EN E5GN Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual Basic Type Revised November 2010 Preface The E5CN E5CN U E5AN E5EN and E5GN are Digital Temperature Controllers The E5CN and E5CN U are both compact temperature controllers with the E5CN featuring screw terminal connec tions and the E5CN U featuring socket pin connections The E5GN can be connected using screw ter minals or screwless clamp terminals The main functions and characteristics of these Digital Temperature Controllers are as follows e Any of the following types of input can be used thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer infrared sensor analog voltage or analog cur rent e Either standard or heating cooling control can be performed e Both auto tuning and self tuning are supported e Event inputs can be used to switch set points multi SP function switch between RUN and STOP status switch between automatic and manual operation start reset the simple program function and perform other operations Event inputs are not applicable to the ESCN U e Heater burnout detection heater short HS alarms and heater overcur rent OC functions are supported Applicable to E5CN E5AN E5EN and E5GN models with heater burnout detection function e Communications are supported Applicable to ESCN E5AN E5EN a
15. Note 1 A heater short indicates that the heater remains ON even when the control output from the Tempera ture Controller is OFF because the SSR has failed or for any other reason 2 EU stands for Engineering Unit EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units such as C m and g The size of EU varies according to the input type For example when the input temperature setting range is 200 to 1300 C 1 EU is 1 C and when the input temperature setting range is 20 0 to 500 0 C 1 EU is 0 1 C For analog inputs the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of the scaling setting and 1 EU becomes the minimum scaling unit XXX How to Read Display Symbols The following tables show the correspondence between the symbols displayed on the displays and alphabet characters The default is for 11 segment displays Pi P Aaa CAE ies vy IMIA The Character Select parameter in the advanced function setting level can be turned OFF to display the following 7 segment characters Refer to page 243 XXX XXX TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 MDE OGG ONO oases sce o oo se ke as a a we l 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 Names of Parts I O Configuration and Main Functions 0 00 0 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations 0 0 00 cee eee eee eens Communications Function Insulation Block Diagrams SECTION 2 Preparations a e44 cates dns oie ead wa ED ae nn
16. ST Stable Range Operating Procedure The ST stable range determines the condition under which ST self tuning functions 65 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 This procedure sets the ST stable range to 20 0 C Advanced Function Setting Level 1 Select the ST Stable Range parameter by pressing the el Key in the ad ST Stable vanced function setting level 2 Use the A Key to set the parameter to 20 0 C 3 8 3 RT Robust Tuning e When AT or ST is executed with RT selected PID constants are automat ically set that make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when the characteristics of the controlled object are changed e RT can be set in the advanced function setting level when PID control has been set e The RT mode cannot be selected while an analog input is set e Selecting the RT mode in the following cases will help to prevent hunting from occurring e When the set temperature is not constant and is changed in a wide range e When there are large variations in ambient temperatures due to factors such as seasonal changes or differences between day and night tem peratures e When there are large variations in ambient wind conditions and air flow e When heater characteristics change depending on the temperature e When an actuator with disproportional I O such as a phase control type power regulator is used e When a rapidly heating heate
17. The Initial Setting Communications AMaor Move to Advanced Function Setting Level potect parameter must be set to 0 e Set the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter set value to 169 e Move to the advanced function setting level either by pressing ce Key or gt PAARO O Key or by waiting or two seconds to elapse E Related Parameter See Initial setting communication protect protect level Page 160 217 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 5 8 Advanced Function Setting Level The advanced function setting level is used for optimizing Controller perfor mance To move to this level input the password 169 from the initial set ting level To be able to enter the password the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter in the protect level must be set to 0 e The parameters in this level can be used when the Initial Setting Commu nications Protect parameter is set to 0 e To switch between setting levels press the O Key e To change set values press the A and Keys Operation Level Press the Adjustment Level Press the Key less than 1 s O Press the O Key for at least 1 s Press the O Key for at least 3 s Control stops Initial Setting o Press the Ol Key for less than 1 s Press the O Key for at least 1 s P
18. 1A When the difference is less than 1 A detection is unstable Heater with a current of 10 0 A or more Current value at normal operation Current value at heater burnout 2 5A When the difference is less than 2 5 A detection is unstable The setting range is 0 1 to 49 9 A Heater burnout HS and heater over current are not detected when the set value is 0 0 or 50 0 When the set value is 0 0 the heater burnout alarm is always OFF the HS alarm is always ON and the heater overcurrent alarm is always ON When the set value is 50 0 the heater burnout alarm is always ON the HS alarm is always OFF and the heater overcurrent alarm is always OFF Set the total current value for normal heater operation to 50 A or less When a current value of 55 0 A is exceeded FFFF is displayed in the Heater Current 1 or 2 Value Monitor and Leakage Current 1 or 2 Moni tor parameters 3 10 4 Application Examples Single phase Heaters Example Using a 200 VAC 1 kW Heater Normal Burnout 5 A gt AC line AC line 200 V 200V Biron Load such as a heater Product Product To CT input To CT input The heater power supply provides 5 A when the current is normal and 0 A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows Normal current Heater burnout current Heater burnout detection current TT oUt pain Example Using Three 200 VAC 1 kW Heaters Normal Burnout 15 A gt 10 A
19. 268 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input Section 6 6 Input type 2 or 3 6 When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 1 V Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the I Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 7 When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the Al Key The No 2 display changes to 4E5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the el Key This stores the temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE PROM press the cel Key while Va is displayed in the No 2 display with out pressing the Al Key 8 The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF 269 Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6 7 6 7 Checking Indication Accuracy e After calibrating the input be sure to check the indication accuracy to make sure that the calibration has been executed correctly e Operate the E5CN CN U AN EN in the process value set point monitor mode e Check the indication accuracy at the following three values upper limit l
20. C or F Setting tance Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Function Controllers with Analog Inputs 19 99 to 99 99 FS Jooo Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs 189 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 The control must be standard control Ee e and 2 PID control ar R Manual Reset Value The Integral Time parameter must be set to O e This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove offset during stabilization of P or PD control Function A Setting range O Unit 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 Setting E Related Parameters See Integral time adjustment level Page 188 PID ON OFF initial setting level Page 204 HYG Hysteresis Heating The control must be ON OFF control For the Hysteresis Cooling parame HYG Hysteresis Cooling A aar must be heating cool This parameter sets the hysteresis for ensuring stable operation at the ON OFF switching point e For standard control use the Hysteresis Heating parameter The Hyster esis Cooling parameter cannot be used e For heating cooling control the hysteresis can be set independently for heating cooling The Hysteresis Heating parameter is used for the heat ing side and the Hysteresis Cooling parameter is used for the cooling side a Parameter Setting range name Setting Hysteresis Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Heating Thermometer Universal Inputs See no
21. Control output oe cooling Heating cooling Auxiliary output 1 go E E ence a a tae output Communications function ei E5GN CT1 input Event inputs 2 channels Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment the Auxiliary Output 1 Assign ment and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level 11 I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 Model Number Structure Model Number Legends Note Controllers ESGN UOCULC LL 12345 6 7 8 1 Control Output 1 R Relay output Q Voltage output for driving SSR C Current output 2 Auxiliary Outputs Blank None 1 One outputs 2 Two outputs 3 Option Blank None 01 RS 232C communications 03 RS 485 communications B Two event inputs H Heater burnout Heater short Heater overcurrent detection CT1 4 Input Type T Universal thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer input L Analog current voltage input 5 Power Supply Voltage Blank 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC VDC 6 Terminal Type Blank Models with Screw Terminal Blocks C Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks 7 Case Color Blank Black W Silver 8 Communications Protocol Blank None FLK CompoWay F communications Silver is available by special order only 1 2 2 Main Functions Input Sensor Types 12
22. l d 1 z Za l gt m z _ R D w x L N N N N N N N Note 1 If L a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output 2 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 3 If the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control when there is no control output 2 E5AN EN control automatical ly switches to L a 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used E Related Parameters See Standard or heating cooling Page 204 Program pattern Page 205 initial ae setting level 242 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 ESEL Character Select e This parameter switches the characters to be displayed The following two types of characters can be displayed 11 segment display Function 7 segment display Setting range A oN 11 segment display aF F 7 segment display ZM Setting When set to a w an 11 segment display is used LII The Program Pattern parameter Soak Time Unit must not be set to OFF e Set the soak time unit for the simple program function Function Setting range Default a M Minutes 4 Hours M Setting E Related Parameters See Program start Soak time remain operation level Page 171 Soak time Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial sett
23. 16 Control in progress Control stopped a a CT Calibration leve ian be set Communications settinglevel_ Canbest Of these levels the initial setting level communications setting level advanced function setting level and calibration level can be used only when control is stopped Control outputs are stopped when any of these four levels is selected 4 When the PF Setting is set to A M in models with a PF Key ESAN EN 5 When the PF Setting is set to PFDP in models with a PF Key E5AN EN To switch to the protect level from the operation level the adjustment level or the monitor setting item level simultaneously hold down the O and kel Keys for at least 3 seconds See note This level is for preventing unwanted or accidental modification of parameters Protected levels will not be displayed and so the parameters in that level cannot be modified Note The key pressing time can be changed in Move to Protect Level pa rameter advanced function setting level The operation level is displayed when the power is turned ON You can move to the protect level initial setting level or adjustment level from this level Normally select this level during operation While operation is in progress items such as the PV and manipulated variable MV can be monitored and the set points alarm values and alarm upper and lower limits can be monitored and changed To move to the adjustment level press the O
24. Alarm 3 ON Delay SV Status Display Function Character Select 243 104 L T N N O1 O1 h m aU a7 m ot r Ale a lt lt A Alarm 1 OFF Delay a AT Calculated Soak Time Unit 2 Gain Display Refresh Period 251 oo oo00 oo 0000 oo N gt io 09 ie co 00 a oF og ma PEJ ma oo 0o00 lt a o Mu Be Control Output 1 ON OFF Count 252 Monitor a Control Output 2 Manual MV Limit 244 8 ON OFF Count 252 Enable Monitor Alarm 2 OFF Delay 23 e m oo oP Ln ir am Alarm SP Selection m m a z gt AT Hysteresis 1 m Z I X A Lim o Oo oo00 0 oo 0000 NO D D Oo 0o00 HY oo00 co Co m 0s o doo os cS 7 Alarm 3 OFF Delay 232 m ER ru co Ca Limit Cycle MV Amplitude oo 0000 T RI NO O1 P i Ly fa A co I r JME SATU INST PV Rate of Control Output 4 Change Calculation 24 ON OFF Count 253 Period Alarm Set Value Automatic Cooling Control Output 2 253 Adjustment Alarm Set Value Saree Hester eee Counter 254 aen eh z v Overcurrent Use Autom
25. Computer end USB type A plug Temperature Controller end Serial Compatible Operating Environment A personal computer that includes the following specifications is required e USB port e CD ROM drive e Windows 2000 XP Vista Appearance and Nomenclature Appearance 2 100 mm 250 mm LED SD 1 765 mm USB connector type A plug Serial connector LED Indicator Display Yellow Lit Sending data from USB Serial Conversion Cable Not sending data from USB Serial Conversion Cable Yellow Receiving data from the USB Serial Conversion Cable Not lit Not receiving data from the USB Serial Conversion Cable 280 Appendix Error Displays When an error occurs the error contents are shown on the No 1 or the No 2 display This section describes how to check error codes on the display and the actions to be taken to remedy the problems Input Error Meaning The input value has exceeded the control range See note The input type setting is not correct The sensor is disconnected or shorted The sensor wiring is not correct The sensor is not wired Note Control Range Resistance thermometer thermocouple input Temperature setting lower limit 20 C to temperature setting upper limit 20 C Temperature setting lower limit 40 F to temperature setting upper limit 40 F ES1B input Same as input indication range Analog input 5 to 105 of scaling range Action Check the wiring of inpu
26. HEAD OFFICE Sao Paulo SP Brasil e 55 11 2101 6300 www omron com br OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel 31 0 23 568 13 OO Fax 31 0 23 568 13 88 www industrial omron eu Cat No H156 E1 04 11 10 Note Specifications are subject to change 2012 Omron Electronics LLC Printed in U S A
27. This section introduces the main E5CN CN U AN EN GN functions For details on particular functions and how to use them refer to SECTION 3 Basic Operation and following sections e The following input sensors can be connected for temperature input e E5 N LILILILIT Thermocouple K J T E L U N R S B W PLII Infrared temperature sensor ES1B 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140 to 260 C Platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 JPt100 Analog input 0 to 50 mV I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 Control Outputs Note Alarms Control Adjustment Event Inputs Heater Burnout HS Alarm and Heater Overcurrent Inputs with the following specifications can be connected for analog input i e E5 N LILILILIL Current input 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage input 1 to 5 VDC 0 to 5 V DC 0 to 10 V DC A control output can be a relay voltage for driving SSR or current out put depending on the model Long life relay outputs See note use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability However if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals short circuit faults may occasion ally occur If the output becomes permanently shorted there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater Design safety into the system including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise a
28. e Severability If any provi sion hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid such provision shall not invalidate any other provision f Setoff Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice g Definitions As used herein including means including without limitation and Omron Compa nies or similar words mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use 1 Suitability of Use Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyers application or use of the Product At Buyer s request Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Prod uct in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyers application product or system Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given i Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical
29. ing the el Key 3 Use the Key to enter 169 the password Move to Ad vanced Function Advanced Function Setting Level It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by pressing Paramncier the kel Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds Initialization Advanced Function Setting Level 4 Press the kel Key to select FE RT 5 Press the A Key to select a aF F is the default Initial Setting Level 6 To return to the initial setting level press the O Key for at least one sec ond 67 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 Operation Level 7 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second 3 8 4 Manual Setup Individual PID constants can be manually set in the Proportional Band Inte gral Time and Derivative Time parameters in the adjustment level Operating Procedure In this example the Proportional Band parameter is set to 10 0 the Integral Time parameter to 250 and the Derivative Time parameter to 45 Adjustment Level 1 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Adjustment Level Display Proportional 2 Press the cel Key to select the proportional band parameter Band 3 Use the IA and Keys to set 10 0 Integral Time 4 Press
30. 3 200 ES1B Infrared 10 to 70 C 0 to 90 a to 190 2 to 130 C 40 to 270 Temperature Sensor 60 to 120 O to 120 C 0 to 240 2 to 160 C 40 to 320 2 0 to 165 C 0 to 320 2 to 205 C 40 to 400 140 to 260 C a 0 to 260 C 0 to 500 2 to 300 C 40 to 580 Analog input 0 to 50 mV Any of the following ranges Fe to 105 of setting by scaling range The display shows 1 999 to 9 999 1999 to 9999 numeric range 199 9 to 999 9 with decimal point omitted Thermocouple Wo 0 to 2300 C 0 to 3200 to 2320 C 40 to 3240 PL II 0 to 1300 C 0 to 2300 2 to 1320 C 40 to 2340 303 115 to 165 C pini Appendix el Input type Specifications Input setting range Input indication range Control Current input 4 to 20 mA oy Any of the following ranges 5 to 105 of setting lers with by scaling range The display shows Analog 1 999 to 9 999 1999 to 9999 numeric Inputs Voltage input 199 9 to 999 9 range with decimal point 19 99 to 99 99 omitted e The default is 5 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0 for Controllers with Analog Inputs e The applicable standards for each of the above input ranges are as follows K J T N R S B JIS C1602 1995 IEC 584 1 L Fe CuNi DIN 43710 1985 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 1985 W W5Re W26Re ASTM E988 1990 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 Pt100 JIS
31. Executing Heating Cooling Control 0 00 0c een eens Using Event Inputs Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 4 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level 0 0 0 0 cece Usmo theKey Protect Levellico pices sere inih aia cart ane katte ake sew Ge ee Se PV Change Color Alarm Delays Loop Burnout Alarm Periormine Manual Control eresien Feed waned deen eee bee eh eek Pha Bless Using the Transfer Output o n 18 20 21 22 31 45 49 50 52 54 54 54 59 60 62 69 73 84 87 89 93 94 95 99 104 106 108 110 113 116 118 122 126 XXX l 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 TABLE OF CONTENTS Using the Simple Program Functions 6423 64 58 ba nae Se ound hoe dates Seteetaeeee Output Adjustment Functions Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter 0 0 cece eee Setting the Width of MV Variation 25 0084as ye eed yada ceed edad eer dy ee ee Setting the PF Key Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations 0 0 0 0 00000 Displaying PV SV Status Logic Operations SECTION 5 ParameterS sssssssssssossosssosooosssooooooooo 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 Conventions Used in this Section 0 ccc eee eee e ene ee nenas Prote
32. If you press the Parameter 4 cE key While the Eel key is being held A down the parameter will move each second in reverse order Parameter 2 After ce key has been held down for 2 s Parameter 3 After l key has been held down for 1s Hold down the ce key during this interval Is ce Key at the final parameter the display returns to the top parameter for the current level To change parameter settings specify the setting using the A or Key and either leave the setting for at least two seconds or press the kel Key This saves the setting When another level is selected after a setting has been changed the con tents of the parameter prior to the change is saved When you turn the power OFF you must first save the settings by press ing the kel Key The settings are sometimes not changed by merely pressing the A or x Keys The ES5CN AN EN GN are provided with a communications function that enables parameters to be checked and set from a host computer If the com munications function is required use the E53 CNLJO3N2 with the E5CN or the E53 EN03 or E53 ENO1 with the ESAN EN GN For details on the com munications function see the separate Communications Manual Basic Type Use the following procedure to move to the communications setting level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the o
33. Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level 10 Press the PF Key for at least one second to move from the operation level to the manual control level 11 Press the lAl or Key to set the manual MV In this example the MV is set to 50 0 Note The manual MV setting must be saved see page 18 but values changed with key operations are reflected in the control output immediately Operation Level 12 Press the PF Key to move from the manual control level to the operation level 4 14 Using the Transfer Output 4 14 1 Transfer Output Function e To use a transfer output change the setting for the Transfer Type parame ter to anything other than OFF This will enable the Transfer Output Upper Limit and Transfer Output Lower Limit parameters 126 Using the Transfer Output Section 4 14 e The operation is shown in the following table Control output 1 Control output 2 Transfer output destination Current output None relay output voltage Control output 1 output for driving SSR Relay output voltage out None relay output voltage None put for driving SSR output for driving SSR m Precision and User Calibration Precision o User calibration Simple transfer out Not specified Not supported put oSer r ooo Setpont JSP SP lowerlitto SP upori Pr Input setting range lower limit to input set ting range upper li
34. PV SP MV PV SP Multi SP 3 PV SP Multi SP 4 PV SP MV 5 PV SP Multi SP PV SP None Soak Time Remain 6 PV SP MV PV SP Soak Time Remain 7 PV SP Soak Time Remain O MV Heating C O MV Cooling None MV Display Selec tion PV Decimal Point PY dP OFF ON Display Hy SE 4 ON None T Ia Ia Da Tum z D a 4 4 4d Jt es 4 Im m m m m N co m n _ OFF OFF MANU Manual STOP Stop ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALMs Alarm 3 ALM Alarm 1 to 3 OR status HA Heater alarm SV Status Display oY Sk OFF OFF Function MANU Manual STOP Stop ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALMs Alarm 3 ALM Alarm 1 to 3 OR status HA Heater alarm Display Refresh OFF 0 25 0 5 1 0 Period Control Output 1 ON FA iM O to 9999 OFF Count Monitor Control Output 2 ON FAEM 0 to 9999 OFF Count Monitor PV Status Display Pr OFF None Function m 1 i WL T OFF None Lm T LI i T m m m mem Bs l 1 d a a Cl J j J big See gt gt gt J Qa al ml 0 25 Second 100 times 100 times Appendix Setting monitor value Display Derat Unit Setvalue Control Output 1 ON O to 9999 100 times OFF Count Alarm Set Value Control Output 2 ON O to 9999 100 times OFF Count Alarm Set Value ON OFF Counter 0 Disable the counte
35. So 4 Calculation Period o D T Il Additional PV Displa MV at Stop and Error orr Automatic Coolin grv Ag K Addition E CSE A oom ZEF 2 p Coefficient Adjustment ooo orr er AFF j y o Q Auto Manual Select S Zr t Heater Overcurrent g 070r MV Display Addition B ULU Wee FBS GFF E AN je ya z rit Li Automatic Display z aLi peso ured 5 NCCE a Ow reaa Con zgr Return Time com OFF ey co I ce ri I Heater Overcurrent nh Hysteresis 0000 Ooo 0000 OO 0000 og 0000 PF Setting E5AN E5EN only Monitor Setting Item 1 E5AN E5EN only Monitor Setting Item 2 Monitor Setting Item 3 Monitor Setting Item 4 Monitor Setting Item 5 PV SP Display i Screen Selection MV Display Selection PV Decimal Point Display z PV Status Display Function SV Status Display Function Display Refresh Period Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Monitor Control Output 2 ON OFF Cou
36. Terminal arrangements terminal sizes and panel mounting depth have not been changed E5AN EN Although the upgraded Controllers are compatible with the previous Controllers terminal arrange ments have been changed Terminal sizes and panel mounting depth have not been changed E5GN Model numbers have changed accompanying the introduction of universal input capability The default setting of the input type parameter of the ES5GN LILILIP models with resistance thermom eters has been changed from a Pt100 resistance thermometer to a K thermocouple Make sure the setting of the input type parameter agrees with the temperature sensor that is being used The terminal block has also been changed which means the wiring methods and terminal arrangement are different Other changes outlined in the following tables Refer to relevant pages in the manual for details Uparaded mee m EA O O O Se LAY LAY IAN UAN JAUNI A LAY N AN e ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator E MM i i rem n BBBB e Number of displays 2 PV and SV e Number of displays 3 PV SV and MV e ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator xviii P Previous models _ Upgraded models e Number of displays 2 PV and SV e Number of displays 3 PV SV and MV e ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator omron ESGN CMW STOP OUT CAH BBS ERA OOA e Display Segments e Display Segments PV 7 segments PV 11 segments SV
37. _ Operation Level I Adjustment Level G Manual Control Level e Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo Options Menu CX Thermo Untitled File Edit View Communications TrendMonitor Options Help C Ba e Vica er Advancs Recover Temporary Settings Edit Form E H amp amp Ge Ge Be 2 el Name Channel 1 Edit Channel name Parameter Mask Editor Logic Operation Editor Channel name CH1 Channel 1 ameter Name Logic Operation Editor Setting Range ESAN RY3BT N Control in Progress Parameters H Protect Level Operation Level Adjustment Level H Manual Control Level Edit Form Making the Settings The following display will appear on the Logic Operation Editor Setting Win dow Set each of the parameters lolx Import of Library Close gt Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of work Bil4 gt Operation Type Operation 1 b F Alam1 x 19 RUN STOP x Work Bit 1 is used by Ausiliary Output 1 ON OFF Delay Work Bit 1 Input A Input B Input D Number of Multi SP Uses Control Output Assignment 1 25P v Control Qutput 1 Control output heating Md Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Control Output 2 No ass
38. by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the products Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONS
39. e The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during autotuning 4 ee E _ AT Calculated Gain 0 1 to 10 0 AT Hysteresis Universal input Se or F 2 O note Setting 0 1 to 999 9 Analog input FS 2 0 01 to 9 99 Limit Cycle MV 5 0 to 50 0 20 0 Amplitude Note When the temperature unit is F the default is 1 4 E Related Parameters See AT execute cancel adjustment level Page 179 225 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 4 Input Digital Filter e This parameter sets the time constant for the input digital filter The follow ing diagram shows the effect on data after passing through the digital fil ter Function PV before passing through filter A as ds See see s PV after passing through filter 0 63 A Time i constant Time a Input digital filter a Setting range Unit Default 00109999 Second 00 Setting PY Ad Additional PV Display gt Function T Setting 226 This parameter adds a display at the beginning of the operation level for the process value PV If there is no need to display the set point use this to dis play only the present temperature Set to ON to display and OFF to not display o somngrange Domn aN Displayed GFF Not displayed GFF Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 o dP MV Display This parameter is used to display the manipulated variable MV The manipulated v
40. external power supply for ESIB 44 inputs 36 power supply 35 precautions 33 terminal arrangement 31 terminals 31 Index 315 Index 316 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No H156 E1 04 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Date Revised content January 2008 Original production March 2008 Page 9 Added case color information to the model number legend 02 March 2009 _ Pages xii and xiv Added information on shipping standards and corrected mis takes Pages 26 96 236 246 255 263 and 277 Made minor corrections Pages 62 to 67 Made minor corrections to graphics Page 80 Replaced graphic and changed step 2 S 03 eptember 2009 Added the E5GN 04 N ovember 2010 Page 54 Added paragraph to section 3 5 Page 70 Changed description of a set value of 4 Page 127 Changed note 2 Page 270 Added a paragraph just before section 6 7 1 317 Terms and Conditions of Sale OMRON 12 Offer Acceptance These terms and conditions these Terms are deemed part of all quotes agreements purchase orders acknowledgments price lists catalogs manuals brochures and other documents whether electronic or in writing relating to the sale of products or services collectiv
41. ing the kel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving H vanced Function to the Advanced Function Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level 4 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level LINL jZ Initialization Advanced Function Setting Level 5 Select the Auto Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the ce Auto Manual Key Select Addition 124 Performing Manual Control Section 4 13 6 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to ON 7 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level 8 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level Operation Level 9 Select the Auto Manual Switch parameter by pressing the cel Key m _ m Auto Manual H J Switch 10 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the manual control level 11 Press the lAl or Key to set the manual MV In this example the MV is set to 50 0 Note The manual MV setting must be saved see page 18 but values changed with Key operations are reflected in the control output immediately 12 Press the LO Key for at least one second to move from the manual co
42. input shift value 0 4 1 2 How to Calculate Input Shift Values for a 2 point Shift Preparations 90 1 2 3 When an ES1B Infrared Temperature Sensor is connected to the E5CN an offset of several degrees to several tens of a degree can occur For this reason offset the readout value using a 1 point or 2 point shift as described in this section This offset occurs because a bias current for detect ing a Controller sensor error flows to the output impedance of the infrared temperature sensor 1 Set a temperature range matching the input specifications of the infrared temperature sensor The ES1B can be used with the E5LIN only for a ther mocouple resistance thermometer universal input 2 Prepare a thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the con trol target as shown in Figure 1 so that a 1 point shift or 2 point shift can be carried out 3 The E538 CNLILIPLIN2 for E5CN E5AN LILIPLI N or ES5EN LILIPLI N has a built in external power supply for ES1B Infrared Temperature Sen sors These E5CN models can be used as the power supply when using ES1B When ES1B are used with other ES5CN models provide a separate power supply for the Infrared Temperature Sensors Shifting Input Values Section 4 1 C Control target Infrared Temperature Sensor B Thermometer Figure 1 Offset Configuration for an Infrared Temperature Sensor Method for a 1 point Shift 1 2 3 1 In the configuration shown in
43. open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 2 hystere sis Page 209 Alarm 2 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level Operation Level Section 5 3 AL JH Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 Alarm 3 must be assigned J oa The alarm 3 type must not be 1 4 or AL JL Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 5 Function a Setting See These parameters independently set the alarm value upper and lower limits when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 3 Type parameter initial setting level e This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 3 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Setting range Unit Default i900 109000 EU o E Related Parameters Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point Page 202 Alarm 3 type Page 210 initial setting level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 3 hystere sis Page 209 Alarm 3 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level Function Monitor See MV Monitor Heating The MV Display parameter must be set to ON This parameter is used to check the manipulated variable for the heating con trol output during operation e This parameter cannot be set e During standard control the manipulated variable is monitored Durin
44. other levels is not possible Adjustment level e Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to O e The default is O Initial Setting Communications Protect Can be dis played and changed Cannot be displayed and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be displayed and moving to other levels is not possible Can be dis played Cannot be displayed and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be displayed and moving to other levels is not possible This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level communica tions setting level and advanced function setting level Set Initial setting level Communications Advanced function value setting level setting level Oo Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach e The default is 1 This protect level restricts key operations a Settings can be changed using key operations Setting Change Protect Settings cannot be changed using key operations The protect level settings however can be changed Using the Key Protect Level Section 4 9 e The default is OFF e The all protect indication will light when setting change protect is set PF Key Protect This protect level enables or disables PF Key operations PF Key enabled PF Key disabled Op
45. red The following table shows the display functions that can be set using the PV color change function Mode Setting Function PV change color Application example Constant Orange Constant Orange To match the display color with other Controller models Constant Red To match the display color with other Controller models Green Constant Green To match the display color with other Controller models Linked to l alarm 1 ALM1 ON SP ALM1 ON ALM1 Application example OFF Red to Green To display the PV reached Green signal Red Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Mode Setting Function PV change color Application example Linked to Within Within PV stable PV stable PV stable band band band Within High ___________ _ py A SP Low PV stable band Application example Red to Green To display stable status ee Tee to ee les Green to Green Orange To display stable status Orange to Red Orange to Orange Green To display stable status Green to Red E Related Parameters See PV stable band advanced function setting level Page 231 PY h PV Stable Band This parameter sets the PV stable band width within which the PV display color is changed e When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected with the PV Change Color parameter the PV display color will change according to whether the present value PV is lower than within or higher than the PV stable band a
46. ture the temperature deviation in a steady state may be less than the LBA level preventing detection of the loop burnout Loop Burnout Alarm Section 4 12 e If the set point is so high or low that it cannot be reached even with a sat urated manipulated variable a temperature deviation may remain even in a steady state and a loop burnout may be detected e Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes an increase in tem perature while control is being applied to increase the temperature e g an SSR short circuit fault e Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes a decrease in tem perature while control is being applied to decrease the temperature e g a heater burnout fault Parameters Related to Loop Burnout Alarms Symbol Setting range Remarks LBA A Time i i to 9999 s ee O disables the LBA ee a Level sa ido with Thermo 0 1 to 999 9 C F See Default 8 0 C F couple Resistance Ther note mometer Universal Inputs Controllers with Analog 0 01 to 99 99 FS ae 10 00 FS Inputs LBA Band Controllers with Thermo 0 0 to 999 9 C F See iene 3 0 C F couple Resistance Ther note mometer Universal Inputs Controllers with Analog 0 00 to 99 99 FS Default 0 20 FS Inputs Note Set None as the unit for analog inputs e A loop burnout alarm can be output by setting the alarm 1 type to 12 LBA e A setting of 12 LBA can be set for alarm 2 or alarm 3
47. 00 A Ta pper Limit Temperature Input Proportional Band Derivative Time Cooling Coefficient _ Li Shift Value O O O O _ N ap cD Tt LO LO N N 00 00 O O O 00 O 00 O 00 Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Heater Overcurrent Leakage Current 2 Monitor ri LI AT Execute Cancel Communications Value Monitor Detection 1 HS Alarm 1 HS Alarm 2 Display Leakage Current 1 Heater Burnout I Adjustment Level n p Detection 2 ce Writing Ve Ll F J a l l l l ri m LI l I Ci I r LLiy I Z1 I c IILI L INIL o I Adjustment Level TMIN L Lon Ooo on EE O mm O EJ ol O oO O O mm oO Ol 178 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 L A Adjustment Level Display This parameter is displayed after moving to the adjustment level When a logic operation is set a period will be displayed on the No 2 dis play e This parameter indicates that the adjustment level has been entered The Adjustment Level parameter will not be displayed again even if the ce Key is pressed in
48. 1 2 11 lA e m ae oe xz Cancel Switching Work Bit Operations Select the work bit logic operations from the Operation of Work Bit 1 to Op eration of Work Bit 8 Tab Pages Selecting the Operation Type From one to four operations are supported If work bits are not to be used set them to No operation Always OFF the default e No operation Always OFF Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bid gt Operation Type No operation Aly Always OFF e Operation 1 Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bild gt A and B or C and D Operation Type Eo _ yami When conditions A 1 and B or conditions C and D are satisfied Input A Input B Input C Input D 1 O Always OFF O Always OFF e Operation 2 Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bisle A or C and B or D When condition A or C and condition B or D are satisfied Work Bit 1 is used by O Always OFF v O Always OFF Time Unit Cmn Cs 149 Logic Operations Section 4 22 e Operation 3 Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 O
49. 1 I O Configuration E5CN Control Control output l l C section heating a m ontro output l Control output L Eo cooling l m Control output 2 See note Heating cooling l l External power l I See note i supply for ES1B l l ee p gt Auxiliary output 2 l l gt Auxiliary output 1 l l l l T l l Program end output Communications l l Temperature input or analog input CT1 input CT2 input Event inputs 2 channels l l I l l l Note l Press one of these keys depending on the model function Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment the Control Output 2 Assignment the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level N I O Configuration and Main Functions E5CN U ntrol Temperature input ra on pais output or analog input heating Control output cooling Lae Program end output Section 1 2 l l EEE EE Control output 1 l LLL Heating cooling l lt gt Auxiliary output 2 I I Standard l l l OOE gt gt Auxiliary output 1 l l l Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment the Auxiliar
50. 2 Case 3 Always ON a H lt 0 L lt 0 L H SP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 wis iai IHI lt IL IHI gt L H Ler P H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IH lt JLI 3 Set value 4 Lower limit range Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always OFF E ete L H SP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 _ TF H lt 0 L gt 0 H lt LI IH gt L H LSP IH gt L H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IH lt L 4 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence e For the lower limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above the alarm is normal ly OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps e In case 3 the alarm is always OFF 5 Set value 5 The alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit alarm hys teresis with standby sequence overlaps 6 Refer to 4 2 1 Standby Sequence for information on the operation of the standby sequence 7 Refer to 4 12 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 8 Refer to PV Change Rate Alarm on page 72 e Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the initial setting level The default is 2 Upper limit alarm E Related Parameters See Alarm value 1 Page 172 Alarm value upper limit 1 Alarm value lower limit 1 a Page 174 operation level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output 1 open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 1 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level Alarm 1 hys teresis Page 209 initial setting level 208 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7
51. 24 25 262 Connect the power supply Connect a standard DC current voltage source STV precision digital multimeter DMM and contact junction compensator e g a zero con troller as in the figure to the thermocouple input terminals as shown in the figure below Leave open Zero controller OUTPUT INPUT wK Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E R S B W and PLII thermocouples and for an infrared temperature sensor Turn the power ON Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows Input types 5 7 11 12 15 Set to 54 mV Input types 6 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 Set to 24 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the I Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered When the el Key
52. 3 output Bea AGEE ao m z T alae g L I Control Period Heating a 4 co Bes go C Mi i i Set the ON OFF E i h R Soak Time Remain ral MV Monitor Heating di ce output cycle Bac Bes A E P Control Period Cooling I ce Bede g MV Monitor Cooling AD 8 ARE Direct Reverse Operation 8 ANE Ce aoa ak Fl P he O and Eel Keys f ress the O and l Keys for F Press the O Ke a l at least 3 s Press the O and lal Keys for at least 1 s less than 1s Y E AL E I Aleni i ge 5 OO g Poeaiga Communications le The time taken t to the protect level po lunginevel SALH i e ume taken to Move to tne protect leve Displayed only for models with communications a can be adjusted by changing the Move to Changes are effective after cycling power or after fe SEIS protect level time setting a software reset Move to Protect Level level Operation Adjustment Protect APE Restricts displaying and modi a fying menus in operation ad a justment and manual control levels Initial Setting 3 L Fh Communications Protect This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting communications i x levels m Setting Change Protect Protects changes to setups by operating the front panel keys PF Key Protect Restricts PF key operation E5AN EN only Parameter Mask Enable Disp
53. 4 Work bit 2 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 3 See notes 2 and 4 4 Work bit 4 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 5 See notes 2 and 4 lt we i lt my hit s 5 s 5 lt 7 AN AO 70 4 Ly Aa l z Work bit 6 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 7 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 8 See notes 2 and 4 gt 1 l Daa I 1 If L a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 is output 2 Can be selected for relay and voltage outputs for driving SSR only 3 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used E Related Parameters Standard or heating cooling Page 204 Program pattern Page 205 Transfer output type Page 210 initial setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 olke Control Output 2 Assignment Control output 2 must be assigned e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to control output 2 Function Setting range No function is assigned to control output 2 None _ Heating control output is output note Mi Alarm 1 is output Lic Alarm 2 is output iLiad Alarm 3 is output ENa Program end is output See note 2 WALIM Control output ON OFF count al
54. 4 Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box SEE Sal pear Click the Close Button Operation of Work Bit1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bi 4 Onarion Type OpetonT Z This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX Thermo Transfer the settings to the Control FC nd Work Bit 1 is used by 1 input B S e ler to set the Controller Refer to CX Thermo help for the i i OAwaysOFF z O Always OFF e z procedure to transfer the settings Number of Multi SP Uses Control Output Assignment 1 25P he Control Output 1 Control output heating Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Control Output 2 No assignment v Event Input 1 Event input 1 external inp Y None Aulia Duiput Assignment RUN STOP Ausiliary Output 1 alarm 1 i Event Input 2 Event input 3 external ing Y None Ausiliary Dutput 2 alarm 2 7 Auzsiliary Output 3 alarm 3 x 4 4 Event Input 2 Event input 2 external inp 4 f 3 Event Input 4 Event input 4 external inp Y 155 Logic Operations Section 4 22 156 This section describes the individual parameters used to setup control and monitor operation 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 Conventions Used in this Section 0 eee a 5 1 1 Meanings of Icons Used in this Section
55. 68 PID control setting 61 PID ON OFF Page 193 platinum resistance thermometer 271 calibration 264 power supply wiring 35 precautions wiring 33 process value PV 165 program end 132 output 132 program patterns 130 proportional action 68 proportional band 68 protect level 16 110 159 moving to 112 160 228 communications operation command 112 password 111 162 parameter operation list 299 protection 110 initial setting communications 110 160 operation adjustment 110 160 setting change 110 111 PV display color change 113 stable band 114 PV MV 197 R ratings 275 313 314 removing from case ESAN ESEN 29 ESCN 28 removing the terminal block ESGN 30 reverse operation 55 206 RT robust tuning 66 234 run stop control 103 S scaling upper and lower limits for analog inputs 94 screwless clamp terminals 34 self tuning ST 64 205 sensor input control range 303 indication range 303 setting range 303 sensor types 200 set point SP 59 limiter 104 limiting change rate 106 lower limit 106 ramp 106 setting 59 61 setting upper and lower limits 104 switching between SPs 102 upper limit 105 setting change protect 110 setting level configuration 15 setting levels diagram 305 settings cooling coefficient 98 dead band 98 event input 99 HB alarm heater burnout alarm 80 moving to advanced function setting level 80 heati
56. A320 ADOS Inpe eaen a aton sce inh Ooi oe ee ae ROS 94 4 4 Executing Heating Cooling Control 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 95 4 4 Heating Cooling Control 0 0 00 cc eee 95 AAD SCN Serieen oe oot ers ew ores nara ee de tiene ehad 98 ASS ASI Event Wi puts 4 bon dec cack teach a A dee dance edhe E ce oe diac EAA 99 Asse Eyen Input Sene S oaeee na E ated eh eee dae kee ee eae 99 4 5 2 How to Use the Multi SP Function 0005 101 BN SNES nao a Perce a Ae Rant E es eae ee 102 4 5 4 Operation Commands Other than Multi SP 102 4 6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 0404 104 A 6 1 SetPoint Limiter sx ioi05 8 ta aed Sh eee eee 104 A622 DCO eens be eatin ee eh die oe Bhar SOG ee eh ee oe 105 4 7 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 106 Avie JSF Ramps nsivacratia once etebeadeke tele aa ele ek eek A 106 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level 108 4 9 Using the Key Protect Level 0 0 0c eens 110 TIel Proteco 626 fe 62 onk alr eS eS AG ae GA as edad aOR aR eA Sree 110 4 9 2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level 111 4 10 PV Change Color sccis sgn tts t beth ed See ee hae eee hel 113 4 10 1 PV Color Change Function 0 00 cc eee eee ee 113 AMOR SEUNG 0 4 civ peat E R a diet ao tee ees 114 ASN Alarm Delay Sree aaa naa ake are wee eyes aia ely eases 116 Her
57. AT will be executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF Event input 1 or 2 40 AT cancelled Event input 1 or 2 40 AT executed When WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter the setting change will be disabled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be enabled when the input turns OFF Event input 1 or 2 Enabled Event input 1 or 2 Disabled When LAT Alarm Latch Cancel is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter all alarm latches alarms 1 to 3 heater burnout HS alarm and heater overcurrent latch will be cancelled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON Event input 1 or 2 Event input 1 or 2 Cancelled Symbol Parameter level Gwe Ev i Event Input Assignment 1 Initial setting level Function of Event Input Assignment 2 Initial setting level ee input func Number of Multi SP Uses Initial setting level 4 6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 4 6 1 Set Point Limiter 104 The setting range of the set point is limited by the set point limiter This func tion can be used to prevent setting incorrect process values The set point lim iter is used to prevent the control target from reaching abnormal temperatures If the set point is not within the range set for the set point limiter as the result of changes to the Set Point Upper Limit or S
58. Alarm values are indicated by X in the table on the previous page When the upper and lower limits are set independently H is displayed for upper limit values and L is displayed for lower limit values e To set the alarm value upper and lower limits for deviation set the upper and lower limits in each of the Alarm 1 to 3 Upper Limit and Alarm 1 to 3 Lower Limit parameters in the operation level This procedure sets alarm 1 as an upper limit alarm The related parameters and settings are shown below The alarm is output when the set point exceeds 10 C In this example the temperature unit is C Alarm 1 type 2 Upper limit alarm Alarm value 1 10 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the Alarm 1 Type parameter by pressing the el Key Confirm that the set value is 2 The default value is 2 Upper limit alarm 71 Alarm Outputs Alarm Value 1 PV Change Rate Alarm 72 Section 3 9 3 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second 4 Select the Alarm Value 1 parameter by pressing the cel Key 5 Use the A Key to set the parameter to 10 The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period Differ ences with previous values in each set period are calculated and an alarm is output if the result exceeds the alarm
59. Assignment 2 parameter Not displayed Operation performed with four Multi SP points EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 The following tables show the relationships between ON OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and selected set points Number of Multi SP Uses 1 Even input 1 Selected set point Set point 0 Set point 1 Number of Multi SP Uses 2 Even input 1 Even input 2 Selected set point Set point 0 Set point 1 213 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 Models with Two Event Inputs 3 and 4 Event input assignment 3 Event input assignment 4 Description of EV3 and EV4 operation Number of multi Displayed Multi SP not used EV3 and EV4 will perform the SP uses operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 3 and 4 parameters Not displayed Operation per Displayed Event input 4 not EV3 will be used for the Multi formed with two Multi SP used as multi SP switch SP function to switch between points set points 0 and 1 EV4 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 4 parameter Not displayed Operation performed with four Multi SP points EV3 and EV4 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 The following tables show the relationships between ON OFF combinations of event inputs 3 and 4 and selected set points Number of Multi
60. Change Protect parameters must not be set to set ting change enable disable This parameter specifies the range of data to be protected The shaded cell indicates the default E Change Setting Protect Changes to settings using key operations are restricted Function When enabling and disabling of setting changes by event inputs assignment 1 and 2 is selected this parameter is not displayed range Default a aN Enabled aFF Disabled oN Setting Settings can be changed using key operations Settings cannot be changed using key operations The protect level settings however can be changed e The all protect indication will light when setting is ON oOcoOL The Controller must have a PF Key Pree PF Key Protect ES5AN EN E PF Key Protect This parameter enables and disables PF Key operation E5AN EN only Function _ PF Key enabled PF Key disabled Operation as a function key is prohibited Setting e The shaded cell indicates the default This parameter is displayed only PMSK Parameter Mask Enable when a parameter mask has been set from the Setup Tool e This parameter turns the parameter mask function ON and OFF 3 Function Setting range Dotat 2 aN Enabled af F Disabled aN Setting Note A parameter mask can be used to hide the displays of parameters that are not needed The parameter mask function is provided by the Setup Tool Setup Tool CX Ther
61. ER 25 2 1 4 Removing the Temperature Controller from the Case 28 22 Winne Terma Besiune ha a Cee ee eee A 31 2 2 1 Terminal Airaneement 4 lt c0csc04sodu0 5 tod bad ean EELEE 31 2 2 2 Precautions when Wiring 0 ccc cece eee 33 223 Wiie ds ose bee be cede be ede ee E oes b owas 35 2 3 Using the Support Software Port 0 0 0 0 cee 45 21 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 Installation 2 1 1 Dimensions Unit mm 1 5 78 lt Cf to ti to H HF 44 8 x 44 8 _ 48 8 Fa SSS 6 7 84 7 70 5 14 2 H E a f mT 58 79 2 78 ESAN a O
62. HS alarm set the HS Alarm Use parameter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the HS Alarm 1 and HS Alarm 2 parameters in the adjustment level Operating Procedure This procedure sets the HS Alarm 1 parameter to 2 5 m Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The HS Alarm Use parameter setting is already ON by default so set the HS Alarm 1 parameter Operation Level 1 Move to the advanced function setting level Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level by pressing the ce Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Ad vanced Function Setting Level 3 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level Advanced Function Setting Level The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level He Alarm 4 Select the HS Alarm Use parameter by pressing the tel Key Use Check that this parameter is set to ON the default Next set the HS Alarm 1 parameter 81 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 m HS Alarm Settings Operation Level 5 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setti
63. In this example the input type temperature unit direct reverse operation and control period heat parameters are checked Input type 5 K thermocouple Temperature unit L C Direct reverse operation aF F reverse operation Control period heat 20 seconds Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 The input type is displayed When the input type is being set for the first time 5 K thermocouple is set To select a different sensor press the A or gt X Key Input Type Temperature 3 Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the Ce Key The de Unit fault is C To select F F press the A Key 55 Setting Output Specifications Section 3 5 Control Period 4 Select the Control Period Heating parameter by pressing the cel Key Heating The default is 20 Direct Reverse 5 Select the Direct Reverse Operation parameter by pressing the Ce Key Operation The default is af F reverse operation To select of d direct opera tion press the A Key 6 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second 7 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the el Key 3 5 3 Assigned Output Functions e Function assignments can be chang
64. Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 PID ON OFF e This parameter selects 2 PID control or ON OFF control e The auto tuning and self tuning functions can be used in 2 PID control Function o Seningrange Derat T Ped 2 PID aNaF ON OFF aor Setting E Related Parameters See AT execute cancel Page 179 Manual reset value Hysteresis heating and T Hysteresis cooling Page 190 adjustment level ST stable range advanced function setting level Page 224 HL Standard or Heating Cooling Function Setting See 204 Note e This parameter selects standard control or heating cooling control e When heating cooling control is selected for the E5CN or E5CN U the auxiliary output 2 terminal SUB2 is assigned as the control output cool ing e When heating cooling control is selected for the E5AN or E5EN the auxil lary output 3 terminal SUB3 is assigned as the control output cooling e When heating cooling control is selected for the E5GN the auxiliary out put 1 terminal SUB1 is assigned as the control output cooling If standard control is selected set the Control Output 1 Assignment to con trol output heating for either direct cooling or reverse heating operation Setting range Domn Std Standard 4 1 Heating cooling E Related Parameters MV monitor heating Page 175 MV monitor cooling Page 176 operation level Cooling coefficient Dead band Page 189
65. MMI G 5 coe he tae oa aoe eed a Sa ew east 64 3 8 3 RT Robust Tuning 43 coke cea eaia tee Ghee een 66 2024 Mmmal Set sarerea Cae ee Pe i ee eee ed ee 68 I Alam Ouiputsee ts cao heh oaced eteds acted Ns sete AA 69 IAr Alarm TY pesc 2 cau oe ee nae eee hee Gee ee ae Se 69 See Alime Vales te erat rer EE srk turk tat ASEE eee ere carey 71 3 10 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms 73 3 10 1 Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarm Operations 4 73 3 10 2 Installing Current Transformers CT 0 0 00 00008 74 3 10 3 Calculating Detection Current Values 004 75 3 10 4 Application Examples 0 0 0 cee eee ene 76 310 5 Sciuneson BA larity 2 nn0es evans ara 4 EAEN vas NANNA 80 3 10 6 Settings Heater Short Alarm 20 0 00 0 81 3 10 7 Settings Heater Overcurrent Alarm 0 00000 c eee 82 Salis Serine the No3 Display 8 tie hee eae E ee ee pee 84 JTL PWSP Display Scleciion 2 4 12243240002 eNe gagNe thee eae 84 49 Initial Setting Examples Section 3 1 3 1 Initial Setting Examples Explanation of Examples Example 1 Input type Control method Alarm type Alarm value 1 Set point 50 5 K thermocouple 200 C to 1 300 C ON OFF control 2 upper limit 20 C deviation Initial hardware setup including the sensor input type alarm types control periods an
66. Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV to 20 mA Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the S Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered When the el Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 1 mA Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the S Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 267 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input Section 6 6 7 When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the lAl Key The No 2 display changes to 4E5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the el Key This stores the temporarily regis tered c
67. Open in Alarm aca 5m Method z 3g Transfer Output Lower Limit i cg YBG P ke W 2o mi m omman os Auxiliary Output 3 5 RLEY Logic Switching 5 alki T 1 Open in Alarm BES Fr ao Linear Current Output AE Linear output a M 23 0 PV Change Color o Zai Control Output 2 HB ON OFF he aes 5 OUE C Assignment Number of Multi SP Uses EE E Bae NONE Two SPs 1 Four SPs 2 Heater Burnout Latch PV Stable Band Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment I j Event Input Assignment 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Heater Burnout Assignment Alarm 1 ON Dela Hysteresis y Event Input Assignment 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment E5AN E5EN only ST Stable Range Alarm 2 ON Delay Extraction of Square Root Enable Alarm 3 ON Delay Character Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level Displayed when initial set ting communications pro tect is set to 0 Soak Time Unit AT Calculated Gain Alarm 1 OFF Delay AT Hysteresis Alarm 2 OFF Delay g AI op Alarm SP Selection ge SP M cE Limit Cycle MV Alarm 3 OFF Delay g MENI Manual MV Amplitude a _ _ T Limit Enable Bea AFF ce Input Digital Filter Input Shift Type 5 Py F710 PV Rate of Change
68. Page 205 initial setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be Alarm 1 must be assigned e Set this parameter to use HS alarms 4 Function Setting range oN Enabled aF F Disabled Setting Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported HSL HS Alarm Latch Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON e When this parameter is set to ON the HS alarm is held until any of the fol lowing conditions is satisfied a The HS alarm current is set to 50 0 A Function b The power is cycled c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel d The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level Setingrane Derat 2 aN Enabled aF F Disabled Setting E Related Parameters See HS alarm use advanced function setting level Page 235 Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 HB ON OFF Page 222 PF setting Page 247 advanced function setting level 235 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Heater burnout and HS alarms must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned HSH HS Alarm Hysteresis
69. Program Pattern parameter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF the Alarm 1 Output Assignment param eter will automatically be initialized to ALM1 When using heating cooling con trol and the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT the END output will not be assigned to an output Use the output assignment parameters to assign the program END output to the desired out put Clearing the Program End Status The program END output and display will be cleared when the Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET The setting is changed from STRT to RSET while the Program Start parameter is displayed The program END status can also be cleared using an event If the program start function is assigned to an event however the program end status cannot be cleared from the Program Start parameter display which will function only as a monitor display Perform the following procedure to use the simple program function In this example the program pattern will be set to STOP the soak time to 10 min and the wait band to 3 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 Set point Wait band 3 A RSET STRT Soak time 10 min _ END display STOP END output Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the Program Pattern parameter by pressing the c
70. QYT 1 N6 J OT No QYT 1 OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA Terminal Cover sold e E53 COV17 for E5CN only separately for ESCN Note The Terminal Cover for the previous models cannot be used for improved models XXxVIl P Previousmodels Upgraded models Terminal Cover sold e E53 COV11 e E53 COV16 POPA OTE DAN E Note The Terminal Cover for the previous models cannot be used for improved models Front Panel Labels E5GN omron E5GN CMW STOP OUT omron E5GN CMW STOP OUT MANU SUB SUB2 HA me Mir e The design has been changed e Display area dimensions 36 1 x 9 8mm e Added characters MANU SUB1 SUB2 and W x H HA e Display area dimensions 36 8 x 10 1 mm W x H XXVIII P Previous models Upgraded models Body Labels E5GN 1 Body labels 3 Body labels All labels combined into one la Model number Refer to the model num bel ber legend Model number Refer to the model number 3 Lot No Year of manufacture last digit of legend year Lot No Year of manufacture last two digits HWW of year VOOOOO Qoooooo 1 2 Manufacture day 01 to 31 DOOOOOD 3 Manufacture month 1 to 9 X Y and Z 1 2 Manufacture day 01 to 31 January to December 3 Manufacture month 1 to 9 X Y and Z Janu 4 Last digit of year ary to December 5 6 Manufacturing factory code 4 5 Year of manufacture last two digits of year 6 7 Manufacturing factory
71. Reverse None Operation aoe operator Alarm 1Type Alarm function OFF None 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit range alarm Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence gt Upper limit alarm with standby sequence Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit alarm Absolute value lower limit alarm Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm 13 PV change rate alarm Alarm 1 Hysteresis Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note Alarm 2 Type Same settings as the alarm 1 type Note The 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm setting cannot be used Alarm 2 Hysteresis Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 input Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 01 to 99 99 Alarm 3 Type Same settings as the alarm 2 type Alarm 3 Hysteresis Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 OFF OFF SP Set point SP M Ramp set point PV Process value Transfer Output Type es MM 4r Ti Civ ry Mia MV Manipulated variable heating C MV Manipulated variable cooling Transfer Output See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 Upper Limit Transfer Output See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 Lower Limit tty 292 Appendix SA oA heer eae Wk eae Linear Current Out
72. Setting Function PV change color Application example ee Orange Constant Orange To match the display color with other Controller models Constant Red To match the display color with other Controller models Green Constant Green To match the display color with other Controller models Linked to l alarm 1 l ALM1 lit ALM1 not ALM1 notlit ALM1 lit Application example nal Er _ GreentoRed Green Red To display error signal Linked to PV PV PV stable stable stable band band i band i gt Within High Ya py A SP Within PV stable Application example band Red to Green to Green To display stable status Red Green to Green Orange To display stable status Orange to Red Orange to Orange Green To display stable status Green to Red 113 PV Change Color PV Stable Band liv _ a PV Stable oy LI Band 4 10 2 Setting Setting the PV Change Color to Indicate Stable Status Operating Procedure Operation Level PV SP Move to Ad Setting Level Parameter Initialization PV Change Color 114 Section 4 10 When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected the PV display color will change according to whether the present value PV is lower than within or higher than the PV stable band shown in the following figure The PV stable band is set with the SP as the center as shown below PV stable 3 PV stable ba
73. Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 Star Connecting Lines Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal 5 8 A gt Load 200 V Load such as a heater 200 V a Q S F CT 200 V Product To CT input ae 5 8 A gt 2 CT Product To CT input The current when each phase is normal is 5 8 A 10 A x 1 V3 Burnout Burnout ars 5 A gt Load such as a heater O 200 V 200 V L D aaa L Q 5 A gt AS 5 A gt NM w w CT CT 200 V Product 200 V Product To CT input To CT input Burnout ay eae cr oad Load such as a heater 200 V a IGT Product Product To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 1 V3 Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 1 V3 x V3 2 5 A x V3 2 5 A The heater burnout detection current for this connecting line is 5 4 A 5 8 5 2 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 V Connecting Lines Example Using Two 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters 10 A gt 200V Product To CT input 17 3 A gt Normal 200 V 200 V D 10A ax ay CT Product To CT input Burnout 5 A gt 10 A gt ted ied CT CT 200 V Product fy 200 V Product fy To CT input To CT input 200 V 10 A gt O 200 V O Burnout 5 A gt AN AN w w CT CT 200 V 200 V Product Product To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 1 2 Current when there is a burn
74. Simple Program Function Parameter name Symbol Set monitor values Unt Display levei Program Patom Peen OFER STOP CONT o lmiasetinglwoi Progam Sian Prs sers gt fprationtevel Soak Time Soak Time Unit minutes h hours Advanced function set ting level Wait Band OFF or 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 C or F See notes 1 Adjustment level and 2 Soak Time Remain O to 9999 min or h Operation level Monitor Note 1 Set for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Univer sal Inputs Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs 2 The setting unit of the Wait Band parameter is FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs and the setting range is OFF or 0 01 to 99 99 Program Pattern Either of two program patterns can be selected The simple program opera tion will not be performed if the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF E Pattern 1 STOP Control will stop and the STOP mode will be entered when the program has ended A A RSET STRT 4 Soak time gt lt END display gt 7 END output Automatically switches from RUN to STOP mode E Pattern 2 CONT Control will continue in RUN mode when the program has ended A i A RSET STRT 4 Soak time _ END display gt END output RUN mode continues 130 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 Starting Method Note Any of the following th
75. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON The HS Alarm Latch parameter must be set to OFF M e This parameter sets the hysteresis for HS alarms Function Setting range Unt Defaut A 0110500 Setting E Related Parameters See HS alarm use advanced function setting level Page 235 i i Alarm 1 must be assigned LbA LBA Detection Time The alarm type must be set to 12 LBA This parameter enables or disables the LBA function and sets the detection time interval e Set the time interval for detecting loop burnouts e To disable the LBA function set O Function Setting range Unit Default a 109909 Second 0 Setting E Related Parameters See Alarm 1 type initial setting level Page 207 LBA level Page 237 LBA band Page 237 advanced function setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 LAL Function Setting See LBA Level Note Alarm 1 must be assigned The alarm type must be set to 12 LBA The LBA detection time must not be 0 e This parameter sets the LBA level e f the deviation between the SP and PV exceeds the LBA level a loop burnout is detected C Woas Settingrange Unit Default Controllers with Thermocouple Resis 0 1 to 999 9 C or F tance Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 to 99 99 10 00 Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters Process val
76. This is possible for only the E5CN E5AN and E5EN and not for the ESCN U or E5GN Check the specifications of the case and Temperature Controller before removing the Temperature Controller from the case E5CN Flat blade screwdriver Unit mm 1 2 3 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes one on the top and one on the bottom to release the hooks 2 Insert the flat blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and rear case and pull out the front panel slightly Hold the top and bottom of the front panel and carefully pull it out toward you without applying unnec essary force 3 When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other make sure that the sealing rubber is in place and press the E5CN toward the rear case into position While pushing the E5CN into place push down on the hooks on the top and bot tom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks are securely locked in place Be sure that electronic components do not come into contact with the case Make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case into position Bottom View of the E5CN 28 Installation Section 2 1 E5AN EN 1 2 3 Tool insertion hole Flat blade screwdriver Un
77. When the program pattern is not OFF the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to program end output The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is not initialized for the E5GN however if it is set for heating cooling control 8 If the Program Start parameter is assigned when the program pattern is changed to OFF the Pro gram Start parameter will be initialized to not assigned 9 Initialized when temperature inputs are used and RT is changed The defaults are as follows Proportional band 8 0 Integral time 233 Derivative time 40 when RT is OFF and 40 0 when RT is ON 10 The proportional band integral time and derivative time are initialized as follows by RT and input type changes e When RT is turned from ON to OFF by a change from temperature input to analog input e When ON is turned to OFF or OFF is turned to ON by an RT change 11 Write to both so that the SP and the currently selected Multi SP SPO to SP3 match 12 Initializes event input assignments used for Multi SP to NONE 13 Initialized to 0 8 when the temperature unit is C and to 1 4 when the temperature unit is F Appendix Sensor Input Setting Range Indication Range Control Range __ _Inputtype Specifications Set value Input setting range _ Input indication range Control Resistance ther Pt100 200 to 850 C 300 to 220 to 870 C 340 to lers with mometer 1 500 F 1 540 F Thermo 199 9
78. addition advanced function setting level Page 234 Operation Level Section 5 3 M_CO Multi SP Set Point Setting The Multi SP Uses parameter must ai i be set to ON 7 Set Points 0 to 3 To use the multi SP function preset the four set points SP O to 3 in the adjustment level and then switch the set point either by operating the keys or by using external input signals event inputs gt UNEAN This parameter is used to select set points O to 3 The SP Ramp Set Value parameter om must not be set to OFF ari Set Point During SP Ramp The ST parameter must be set to OFF This parameter monitors the set point during SP ramp operation A ramp is used to restrict the change width of the set point as a rate of change This parameter is displayed when a set value is input for the SP Ramp Set Value parameter adjustment level When not in ramp operation the set point will be the same as the one dis played for the Process Value Set Point parameter D Monitorare m SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit E Function Monitor E Related Parameters See Process value set point operation level Page 165 a SP ramp set value adjustment level Page 193 Set point upper limit Set point lower limit initial setting level Page 203 167 Operation Level Section 5 3 Heater burnout HS alarm and heater overcurrent detection must be i supported LEI Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned T
79. by Omron a Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron Omron will not drop ship except in break down situations b Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer c All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point unless oth erwise stated in writing by Omron at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer provided that Omron shall retain a security inter est in the Products until the full purchase price is paid d Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only and e Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against nor mal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions Claims Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original trans portation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed Warranties a Exclusive Warranty Omron s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron or such other period expressed in writing by Omron Omron disclaims all other warranties express or implied b Limitations OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EX
80. e Places subject to intense temperature change e Places subject to icing and condensation e Places subject to vibration and large shocks 2 Use and store the Digital Temperature Controller within the rated ambient temperature and humidity Gang mounting two or more temperature controllers or mounting temperature controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the temperature controllers which will shorten their service life In such a case use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Digital Temperature Controllers 3 To allow heat to escape do not block the area around the product Do not block the ventilation holes on the product 4 Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals 5 Use the specified size of crimp terminals for the ESCN E5AN or E5EN M3 5 width of 7 2 mm or less For open wired connections to the E5CN E5AN or E5EN use stranded or solid copper wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG14 equal to a cross sectional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm2 The stripping length is 5 to 6 mm Up to two wires of the same size and type or two crimp terminals can be connected to one terminal Do not connect more than two wires or more than two crimp terminals to the same terminal Use the specified size of crimp terminals for the ESGN M3 0 width of 5 8 mm or less For open wired connections to the E5GN use stranded or solid copper wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 equal
81. e When heating cooling control is selected the Dead Band and Cooling Coefficient parameters can be used 96 Executing Heating Cooling Control Section 4 4 Dead Band e For heating cooling control the dead band is set with the set point as its center The dead band width is the set value of the Dead Band parameter adjustment level Setting a negative value produces an overlapping band e If an overlapping band is set the bumpless function may not operate when switching between manual operation and automatic operation e The default is 0 0 EU for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Ther mometer Universal Inputs and 0 00 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs Dead band Dead band Overlapping dead band Dead Output width A positive value Output band width A negative value Heating side Cooling side Heating side Cooling side 0 A 0 A Set point Set point Cooling Coefficient lf the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the propor tional band P for the control output assigned to the cooling side Use this to achieve balanced control between the heating side and cooling side The pro portional bands P for the control outputs assigned to the heating cooling sides can be calculated using the following equat
82. function setting level Page 235 Error Displays Life Page 283 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be HG2 HS Alarm 2 supported two CTs Function T Setting See Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output e An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the set ting of this parameter e When the set value is 50 0 the HS alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the HS alarm output will turn ON Setting range Unit Default 0010500 E Related Parameters Leakage current 2 monitor adjustment level Page 185 HS alarm use HS alarm latch HS alarm hysteresis advanced function set ting level Page 235 185 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 op SP O The Number of Hen pp parameter must be set to 1 or 2 GF i SP 1 The Multi SP Uses parameter must SP p SP 2 be set to ON 5P 4d SP 3 These parameters set the set points when the multi SP function is used The values set in these parameters can be selected by operating the keys on the front panel or by using event inputs e When the set point has been changed the set value of the set point 0 to 3 selected by the multi SP inputs is also changed to the same value e The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor During ana log input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting a O o
83. greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation does not change by at least the value set in the LBA Band parameter e The default is 3 0 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0 20 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs Operating Procedure Perform the following procedure to use the loop burnout alarm In this example the LBA detection time is set to 10 the LBA level is set to 8 0 and the LBA band is set to 3 0 Operation Level 120 _ 2 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Select the Alarm 1 Type parameter by pressing the el Key Loop Burnout Alarm Section 4 12 Initial Setting Level 3 Press the Al Key to set the parameter to 12 Move to Ai 4 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press vanced Function ing the kel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving Setting Level to the Advanced Function Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level 5 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial Parameter setting level to the advanced function setting level Initialization 6 Select the LBA Detection Time parameter by pressing the ce Key 7 Press the A Key to set the parameter to 10 8 S
84. heating and cooling control Either heating MV or cooling MV can be selected Semingrangs Doan a MV heating L a MV cooling 249 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 PY dP PV Decimal Point Display ea must be set to tem The display below the decimal point in the PV can be hidden for temperature inputs e The PV decimals below the decimal point can be hidden by setting the PV Function Decimal Point Display parameter to OFF When this parameter is set to ON the display below the decimal point will appear according to the input type setting Settingrange Dea a ON SFF OFF Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 Py Sl PV Status Display Function Function a Monitor See 250 e The PV in the No 1 display for the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Screen is alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles with the control and alarm status specified for the PV status display function O Montorra O J Deam arr No PV status display MTINI INL abi is alternately Ae aug manual control ET E e E nn HA is alternately displayed when a heater T alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is ON E Related Parameters Process value set point PV operation level Page 165 PV MV manual MV manual control level Page 197 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Lm lt Lm or SV Status Display Function e The SP Blank
85. heating cool SP Ramp Set Value OFF or 1 to 9 999 Brie oa Da a MV Upper Limit MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 MV Lower Limit 5 0 to MV upper limit O 1 standard 105 0 to 0 0 heating cool 0 0 to 105 0 heating cooling MV Change Rate 0 0 to 100 0 Limit 0 0 MV Change Rate Limit Disabled Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 0 0 to 100 0 290 Appendix Initial Setting Level eres Deer A Seam Input Type Multi Pt100 None input Pti100 gt Pt100 JPt100 JPt100 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 160 to 260 C 0 to 50 mV 24 W gt PLII Analog 4 to 20 mA None input 0 to 20 mA 1to5V Oto5V Oto10V E Upper Limit ee io lower limit 1 to 100 None i oe 1 SP Upper Limit SP lower limit 1 input ae range lower limit tempera ture SP lower limit 1 scaling upper limit analog SP Lower Limit EEE tay deta range lower limit to SP a upper limit 1 EEE tay deta Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit 1 analog PID PID ON OFF ENEL ON OFF 2 PID 2 PID ar None PD ONO y or Heating EM O ONOFERPD or heating cooling eter Pid ONO noe o Cooling soo e oo C at ON O O S Control Period 0 5 or 1 to 99 44 20 Second Heating Control Period Cool 0 5 or 1 to 99 39 ing OONDoa RWNM O WMODZCCEMAACCAA 291 Appendix Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Setvalue Direct Reverse ORE Reverse operation direct
86. hour Reset HBonorF Wu omon FaN ON None O Auxiliary HBONO 1 N EN Close in alarm N O None Open in Alarm N C Open in alarm Auxiliary Output 2 N O Close in alarm N O None Open in Alarm N C Open in alarm Auxiliary Output 3 N O Close in alarm N O None Open in Alarm N C Open in alarm Heater Burnout OFF ON OFF None Latch Heater Burnout Hys 0 1 to 50 0 0 1 A teresis gt Te oa i Z E N ST Stable Range 0 1 10 999 9 so Core AT Calculated Gain 0 1 to 10 0 P08 Noe AT Hysteresis Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Limit Cycle MV LEMA 5 0 to 50 0 20 0 anpra Additional PV Dis PY Ad OFF ON None play MV Display a OFEON aem ORF poe oo Automatic Display OFF or 1 to 99 AFF Second Return Time q5 Move to Protect 1 to 30 Second Level Time input Error Output_ 5ERa OFF ON aeran OFF None 294 Appendix Setting monitor value Display Defaut Unit Setvalue Cold junction Com OFF ON ON None pensation Method MB Command Logic AL RY OFF ON None Switching PV Change Color Orange Red Green u Fed None Red to Green When ALM1 is lit Green to Red When ALM1 is lit Red to Green to Red Within PV stable band Green Outside stable band Red Green to Orange to Red Within PV stable band Green Outside stable band Green Red Orange to Green to Red Within PV stable band Green Outside stable band Green Red PV Stable Band P Universal input 0 1 to
87. ine gt None z Aunitary Output3 Alam 3 z it to 7 Normally closed meee a e a Input A 4 Event input 2 external input Y Input B Awas 0 Input C OAwayeOFF z Input D OAwaysOFF 5 Assign RUN STOP to event input 2 Set 5 Work bit 1 for the event input data for event input 2 and set RUN STOP for the assignment function 6 Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box Click the Close Button This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX Thermo Transfer the settings to the Control ler to set the Controller Refer to CX Thermo help for the procedure to transfer the settings Operating Procedure This procedure outputs alarm 1 status to auxiliary output 1 during operation RUN A library object is used to make the setting Alarm 1 RUN STOP Work bit 1 B Always OFF Always OFF 1 Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo DER EE m E tree and click the Start Button ix Channel Name Channel 1 CH1 Channel 1 Parameter Name Logic Operation Editor Setting Range ESAN RY3BT N J Control in Progress Parameters H I Protect Level J Operation Level H I Adjustment Level Edit Form sax 2 Click the Import of Library Button Import of Library Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil l gt Operation Type No operatio
88. is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 6 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the S Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered Press the kel Key The display changes as shown on the left Set the STV to 700 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the S Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 3 10 11 13 12 Press the ce Key The display changes as shown on the left Set the STV to 400 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the S Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Change the wiring as follows Open in non connected state Short circuit Zero controller OUTPUT UNPA Compensating conductor
89. is set to one of the input values X in the alarm type list e This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 1 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Setting range Unit Default A joo 109999 EU o Setting Function E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point a initial setting level Page 202 initial setting level Alarm 1 type initial setting level Page 207 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 1 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 1 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level Operation Level Section 5 3 Oo m Mu Alarm 2 must be assigned Alarm Value 2 The alarm 2 type must not be 0 1 4 5 or 12 This parameter is set to one of the input values X in the alarm type list e This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 2 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal PO Point parameter setting Setting range Unit Defaut m 999109999 EU o Setting E Related Parameters see Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point 3 initial setting level Page 202 initial setting level Alarm 2 type initial setti
90. limit values of alarm 1 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal EACAN Point parameter setting Setting range Unit Defaut m e9910 9999 EU oo Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point 4 Page 202 Alarm 1 type Page 207 initial setting level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 1 hystere sis Page 209 Alarm 1 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level Ai cH Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 Aam Ha be Pa ta o e alarm 2 type must not be 1 4 or ALEL Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 5 Function a Setting See These parameters independently set the alarm value upper and lower limits when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 2 Type parameter initial setting level e This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 2 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Setting range Unit Default i900 109000 EU o E Related Parameters Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point Page 202 Alarm 2 type Page 209 initial setting level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output
91. low cut point set in the Extraction of Square Root Low Cut Point parameter the results of extracting the square root will be 0 0 If the PV input is lower than 0 0 or higher than 100 0 extraction of the square root will not be executed so the result will be equal to the PV input The low cut point is set as normal ized data for each input with 0 0 as the lower limit and 100 0 as the upper limit for the input setting range Point 137 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Section 4 17 Extraction of square root 100 FS ee Extraction of square root low cut point 100 FS Argument 1 Input Data Setting rage Extraction of Square OFF Disabled ON Enabled Root Enable Extraction of Square 0 0 to 100 0 Root Low cut Point Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point parameter to 10 0 Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Input Type level to the initial setting level Exiraction 2 Press the kel Key to select the Extraction of Square Root Enable param of Square eter Root Enable Exiracton 3 Use the A Key to select ON of Square Root Enable 4 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting PV SP level to the operation level 5 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment le
92. m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Weight E5CN Approx 150 g Adapter approx 10 g Terminal cover approx 10 g Degree of protection Control Period 0 5 1 to 99 s in units of 1 s Manual reset value 0 0 to 100 0 in units of 0 1 Sampling period Malfunction vibration 10 to 55 Hz 20 m s for 10 min each in X Y and Z directions Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz 20 m s for 2 hr each in X Y and Z directions Malfunction shock 100 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Adapter approx 100 g Terminal cover approx 1 6 g ESGN Approx 90g Adapter approx 109 O O O Front panel IP66 Rear case IP20 Terminals IPOO E5CN U Front panel IP50 rear case IP20 terminals IPOO Memory protection EEPROM non volatile memory number of writes 1 000 000 277 Appendix Note 1 The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the 200 to 1 300 C range T and N thermocouples at a temperature of 100 C or less and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 C to 800 38 C or less is not specified The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200 C or less is 8 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is the larger of 0 3 or 3 C 1 digit maximum and the indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is the larger of 0 3 or 2 C 1 digit maximum 2 Ambient
93. note 2 Auto Manual Specifies reversing the Auto Manual status See note 3 Monitor Setting Item Specifies the monitor setting item dis play Select the monitor setting item according to the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters advanced function setting level Al 1 40 AT Specifies reversing the 40 AT Exe Execute Cancel cute Cancel status See note 1 Note 1 When AT cancel is specified it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currently being executed is 100 AT or 40 AT 2 Alarms 1 to 3 heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent latches are cancelled 3 For details on auto manual operations using the PF Key refer to 4 73 Per forming Manual Control 4 Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes operation accord ing to the set value When the Monitor Setting Item parameter is selected however the display is changed in order from Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 each time the key is pressed 5 This function is enabled when PF Key Protect is OFF Monitor Setting Item Monitor Setting Item 1 Setting the PF Setting parameter to the Monitor Setting Item makes it possi ble to display monitor setting items using the function key The following table shows the details of the settings For setting monitor ranges refer to the applicable parameter 141 Setting the PF Key Section 4 19 Set Remarks value Monitor Setting Symbol o Daas o s a
94. oF Input Type Temperature 3 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second Unit 3 4 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control Two control methods are supported 2 PID control and ON OFF control Switching between 2 PID control and ON OFF control is executed by means of the PID ON OFF parameter in the initial setting level When this parameter is set to FL a 2 PID control is selected and when set to aNar ON OFF con trol is selected The default is ajar 2 PID Control PID control is set by AT auto tuning ST self tuning or manual setting For PID control set the PID constants in the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and Derivative Time D parameters ON OFF Control In ON OFF control the control output is turned ON when the process value is lower than the current set point and the control output is turned OFF when the process value is higher than the current set point reverse operation 3 5 Setting Output Specifications 3 5 1 Control Periods e Set the output periods control periods Though a shorter period provides Hosting better control performance it is recommended that the control period be set to 20 seconds or longer for a relay output to preserve the service life oon of the relay After the settings have been made in the initial setup readjust the control period as required by means such as trial operation e Set the control periods in the Control Per
95. of Multi SP Uses 1 Even input 1 Selected set point Number of Multi SP Uses 2 e The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input Assignment 1 or 2 is displayed seng JO Fonon O C SSS s ps Pre Program start See note 1 ARS Invert D ere Besa oo 100 AT Execute Cancel b 40 AT Execute Cancel See note 2 tl WERE Setting Change Enable Disable LAE SSS Alarm Latch Cancel 1 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern param eter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 2 This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled e When any of the following functions is set for an Event Input Assignment parameter the same function cannot be set for another Event Input Assignment parameter STOP RUN STOP MANU Auto Manual Switch PRST Program Start DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation AT 2 100 AT Execute Cancel AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable or LAT Alarm Latch Cancel Event inputs can be used on the E5CN LIML with an E53 CNLIBLIN2 or E5AN EN LIMLI N with an E53 AKB Controllers Turn event inputs ON OFF while the power is being supplied Event input ON OFF changes detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer E Related Parameter SPO to SP3 adjustment level Page 186 and are Event input assignment 1 and 2 Page 216 initial setting level Multi SP use Page 22
96. oper ation is stopped Alarm 1 Mt ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status Alarm 2 ALM2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status 145 Displaying PV SV Status Note SV Status Display Function Note 146 Section 4 21 Symbol Fonton Alarm 3 ALMI ALMS is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status Alarm 1 to 3 OR status ALM ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 or 3 is set to ON Heater Alarm See note HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm HS alarm or heater over current alarm is ON e The default is OFF HA can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection but the function will be disabled Example When STOP Is Selected for the PV Status Display Function When RUN STOP Normal is STOP Alternating PV SP display The SP Blank or Manual MV in the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Display and the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function are alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles Symbol Funston o dF oas Manual MANU is alternately displayed during manual control STOP is alternately displayed while oper ation is stopped Lr ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status ALM ALM2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status ALMsS is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status Alarm 1 to 3 OR status ALM ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 or 3 is set to ON Heater A
97. or Manual MV in the No 2 display for the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Screen is alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles with the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function Function E o Monitorare O O Deam arr No SV status display TET ANL MANU is alternately displayed during manual control Aa ia F o is pales obra while operation is stopped Ti ALM sternstely displayed when Aarm 1 2 or Gis set 19 ON HA is alternately displayed when a heater Sinon alarm HS larm or heater overcurrent alarm is ON E Related Parameters See Process value set point PV operation level Page 165 PV MV manual MV manual control level Page 197 d REF Display Refresh Period Function a Monitor e This parameter delays the display refresh period for monitor values Only display refreshing is delayed and the refresh period for process values used in control is not changed e This function is disabled by setting the parameter to OFF Setting range Um Doan OFF 0 25 05 4 0 Second a 251 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Control output 1 must be supported Relay or voltage outputs for driving RAM Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Monitor must be used The Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter must not be set to 0 e This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 1 is M turned ON and OFF e This function is not displayed when the set valu
98. or substances or environ ments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty See http www omron247 com or contact your Omron representative for pub lished information Limitation on Liability Etc OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted Indemnities Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities losses claims costs and expenses including attorney s fees and expenses related to any claim inves tigation litigation or proceeding whether or not Omron is a party which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer s acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products Without limiting the foregoing Buyer at its own expense shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or set tle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party Property Confidentiality Any intellectual pro
99. passes this control error disappears and the control temperature process value comes to agree with the set point D action Refers to a control action that is proportional to the time derivative of the control error The proportional control and integral control cor rect for errors in the control result and thus the control system is late in responding to sudden changes in temperature The derivative action increases the MV in proportion to the slope of the change in the temperature as a corrective action Parameter Setting range name Proportional Controllers with Thermocouple 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Band Resistance Thermometer Multi Ti note inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs with Controllers with Analog Inputs Inputs action Derivative Time RT is OFF 0 to 3999 RT is ON 0 0 to 999 9 Note 1 Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs 2 If the settings for RT robust tuning are changed the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D will be initiated E Related Parameters AT execute cancel adjustment level Page 179 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 r Er Tmi The control must be heating cooling aL Cooling Coefficient control and 2 PID control If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants the cooling coefficient can be used t
100. power lines in sep arate conduits or wiring using a more direct path Connect the thermocouple s lead wires directly or connect a compensating conduc tor suitable for the thermocouple eter is suitable Set a suitable input shift If input shift is not required set the input shift value to 0 0 Keys will not operate a change pro Turn OFF setting change protect tect is ON Set the operation adjustment protect initial setting communications protect and set ting change protect values as required Terminal screws may Retighten terminal screws to a torque of be loose 0 74 to 0 90 N m see note The internal compo nents have reached the end of their ser vice life The Temperature Controllers internal elec trolytic capacitor depends on the ambient temperature and load rate The structural life depends on the ambient environment shock vibration The life expectancy of the output relays varies greatly with the switch ing capacity and other switching conditions Always use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy If an output relay is used beyond its life expectancy its contacts may become welded or burned Replace the Temperature Controller and all other Temperature Con trollers purchased in the same time period Check whether the location of the thermom me Note The tightening torque is 0 5 N m for the ESCN U and 0 43 to 0 58 N m for the E5GN The terminal tor
101. q gt I a D I q gt 3 4 5 6 7 LBA ON LBA OFF LBA ON If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 1 and 2 i e the set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will remain OFF The process value is within the LBA level between 3 and 4 and thus loop burnout alarms will not be detected The loop burnout alarm will remain OFF If the process value is outside the LBA level between 4 and 5 and the control deviation is not reduced by at least the LBA band within the LBA detection time the loop burnout alarm will turn ON If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 5 and 6 i e the set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will turn OFF If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 6 and 7 i e the set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is less than the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will turn ON e If the LBA detection time LBA level LBA detection band and PID set tings are not appropriate alarms may be detected inappropriately or alarms may not be output when necessary e Loop burnout alarms may be detected if unexpectedly large disturbances occur continuously and a large deviation does not decrease e f a loop burnout occurs when the set point is near the ambient tempera
102. resistance The combined terminating resistance with the host device must be at least 54 Q The specified power supply voltage is not Supply the specified power supply voltage being supplied to the Controller The specified power supply voltage is not Supply the specified power supply voltage being supplied to an Interface Converter such as the K3SC The same baud rate and communications Set the same values for the baud rate protocol data length stop bits and method are not being used by all of the Con parity on all nodes trollers host devices and other devices on the same communications line The unit number specified in the command Use the same unit number frame is different from the unit number set by the Controller The same unit number as the Controller is Set each unit number for only one node being used for another node on the same communications line for RS 485 communica tions There is a mistake in programming the host Use a line monitor to check the commands Check operation using a sam device ple program The host device is detecting the absence of a Shorten the send data wait time in the Controller or increase the response response as an error before it receives the wait time in the host device response from the Controller The host device is detecting the absence of a The Controller does not return responses for broadcast commands response as an error after broadcasting a command except
103. semings O Om Deem SP lower limit to SP upper limit 0 Setting Function E Related Parameters See Process value set point operation level Page 165 Input type initial setting level Page 200 Number of multi SP uses Page 213 Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 Multi SP uses Page 220 advanced function setting level The Input Type parameter must be _ set for a thermocouple or resistance LNG Temperature Input Shift thermometer and the Input Shift Type parameter must be set to a one point shift Sometimes an error occurs between the set point and the actual temperature To offset this a compensated value can be obtained by adding an input shift value to the input The compensated value is displayed as the measurement value and used for control The entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate 1 point shift If the input shift value is set to 1 C control will be performed for a value 1 C lower than the measured temperatu re Function a Setting range Unit Default 1099109099 Corr 00 Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 Input shift type advanced function setting level Page 233 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 LNSH Upper limit Temperature Input Shift Value The Input Type parameter must be set for a thermocouple or resistance thermometer and the Input Shift Type CNS Lower limit Temperature Input Shift Value Parameter must
104. set to enable communications writing e This parameter enables disables writing of parameters to the E5CN from the host personal computer using communications e This parameter is not displayed if communications write enable disable is ranean set for execution using an event input assignment 1 and 2 ON Writing enabled OFF Writing disabled l e Default OFF Setting E Related Parameters See MB command logic switching advanced function setting level Page 229 Communications Unit No Communications baud rate Communications data length Communications parity Communications stop bits communications setting level Page 255 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported LEI Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned gt Function a Monitor See The HB ON OFF parameter or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e Heater burnouts or heater overcurrent are not detected if the control out put heating ON time is 100 ms or less Monitor range Unt 0 0 to 55 0 e f a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the heater cur rent 1 value monitor will flash E Related Parameters Heater burnout detectio
105. standby sequence and it is the level for moving to the user calibration and other functions e To move to the communications setting level from the initial setting level press the O Key once for less than 1 s When using the communica tions function set the communications conditions in this level Communi cating with a personal computer host computer allows set points to be read and written and manipulated variables MV to be monitored e To move to the calibration level input the password 1201 from the advanced function setting level The calibration level is for offsetting error in the input circuit e You cannot move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel To cancel this level turn the power OFF then back ON again 1 3 1 Selecting Parameters e Within each level the parameter is changed in order or in reverse order each time the ce Key is pressed In the calibration level however param eters cannot be changed in reverse order For details refer to SECTION 5 Parameters 17 Communications Function 1 3 2 Saving Settings 1 4 Communications Function 18 1 2 3 Moves in order after s pressed if key is 1 released within 1 s Section 1 4 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 After ce key is pressed irala lt j 4 ep ee ee eee ee ee eee eee ee eer eee
106. temperature 10 C to 23 C to 55 C Voltage range 15 to 10 of rated voltage 3 Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs Rating and Characteristics of Options Event inputs Contact Input ON 1 kQ max OFF 100 kQ min Non contact Input ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current 0 1 mA max Communications Transmission path RS 485 232C Communications method RS 485 2 wire half duplex or RS 232C Synchronization Start stop Baud rate 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 kbps 4 to 20 mA DC Load 600 Q max Resolution 10 000 Accuracy 0 3 Waterproof Packing If the Waterproof Packing is lost or damage order one of the following models Y92S 29 for DIN 48 x 48 Y92S P4 for DIN 96 x 96 x 96 E Y92S 32 for DIN 48 x 24 Y92S P4 for DIN 48 x 96 B Uo 278 Appendix Current Transformer CT Specifications tem Specifications OOO 1 000 VAC for 1 min Note The maximum continuous current of the E5LIN is 50 A External Dimensions E54 CT1 21 25 10 E54 CT3 2 36 dia 40 x 40 279 Appendix E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable Specifications o o olem Specifications O Applicable OS Windows 2000 XP Vista Applicable software CX Thermo Applicable models OMRON E5AN EN CN CN U GN Digital Temperature Control lers USB interface rating Conforms to USB Specification 1 1 DTE speed 38 400 bps
107. the returns to the top parameter in that level 306 Adjustment Level Adjustment Level Display Displayed only once when entering adjustment level 00 0000 Air 4 L AT Execute Cancel Communications Writing sh 7 o 4 Heater Current 1 Value Monitor ig 3 rr ES a X g Heater Burnout Detection 1 0 an DTD i D Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 o OO oF un ca ca ie 4 Heater Current 2 Value Monitor 00000 e o JE 00 0000 E Mu Heater Burnout Detection 2 0g OF Di rq co My 4 co Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 HH 0000 ae LA co fee T J sa ie 4 Leakage Current 1 Monitor o0 0000 mm oF p Ca lt 4 Z Li HS Alarm 1 oo 0000 oo os un Ca EJ w Leakage Current 2 Monitor rae 4 o0 0000 m co O fo My lt A HS Alarm 2 oo00 ae Lr Es Muy EJ ose J m SPO SP 1 SP used by li ce multi SP Pp SP 2 Power ON Starting in manual mode Manual Control Level Press the PF Key for at least 1 s See note 1 Press the O Key les
108. the ES1B external power supply for the ES1B 44 Using the Support Software Port Section 2 3 e Connect terminals 14 and 15 when using the E53 CN_ILIPBN2 as the external power supply for the ES1B e Connect terminals 14 and 15 when using the E5AN EN LILIPLI N as the external power supply for the ES1B PHLIN2 E53 CNLILIPBN2 E5AN EN LILIPLI N 11 4 lt gt 14 lt gt 2 lt gt 5 lt gt 45 lt gt E53 CN e The following table provides the specifications of the external power sup ply for ES1B Output voltage 12 VDC 10 Output current Note Contact your OMRON representative for information on using the external power supply for ES1B for other applications 2 3 Using the Support Software Port Use the communications port for Support Software to connect the personal computer to the Temperature Controller when using EST2 2C MV4 CX Thermo or a version of CX Thermo higher than 4 00 or other Support Soft ware The E5GN is supported from CX Thermo version 4 2 The E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection For information concerning the models that can be used with CX Thermo contact your OMRON sales representative Procedure Use the following procedure to connect the Temperature Controller to the per sonal computer using the USB Serial Conversion Cable The USB Serial Conversion Cable is used to communic
109. the cel Key to select the Integral Time parameter 5 Use the lA and Keys to set 250 Derivative Time Select the Derivative Time operation by pressing the kel Key 7 Use the lA and Keys to set 45 8 To return to the operation level press the O Key Note Proportional Action When PID constants integral time and D derivative time are set to 0 con trol is executed according to proportional action As the default the center value of the proportional band becomes the set point Related parameter Manual reset value adjustment level 68 Alarm Outputs Section 3 9 When P Proportional Band Is Adjusted Increased The curve rises gradually and a long Se o stabilization time is created but over shooting is prevented Decreased Overshooting and hunting occur but CUY the set value is quickly reached and the temperature stabilizes It takes a long time to reach the set point It takes time to achieve a stable state but overshooting undershooting and hunting are reduced Overshooting and undershooting occur Hunting occurs The Controller starts up faster Increased ee a undershooting and sta Vv 7 _ bilization times are reduced but fine hunting occurs on changes in the curve itself Decreased Overshooting and undershooting increase and it takes time to return to the set point 3 9 Alarm Outputs e Alarms can be used
110. the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter in the protect level to O before moving to the advanced function setting level e The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF e The parameter calibrations in the calibration mode are structured as shown below Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Advanced Function Setting Level Moves automatically according to input type eee ee ee ee ee gy pe ee eg ee I Thermocouple or infrared temperature sensor Platinum resistance thermometer Analog input wee ee ee ee ee ee ee 23 0to 50 mV 19 K140F 60C 20 K240F 120C 21 K280F 140C 22 K440F 220C 24 W 25 PL Il 1 Pt100 2 Pt100 3 JPt100 4 JPt100 0 Pt100 Daam o7o0n o COU i AL 258 Parameter Structure Section 6 1 Controllers with an Analog Input Advanced Function Setting Level eo tte a ae eae eK eee eR RB eR RK RR ee eR ee ee ee ee eee eee eee Se i 0 4 to 20 mA 1 0to 20 mA
111. the adjustment level to scroll through the parame ters Function The ramp must be in operation and 2 PID control must be used Event HE AT Execute Cancel Input Assignments 1 and 2 parame ters must be other than 100 or 40 AT Execute Cancel This parameter executes auto tuning AT e The MV is forcibly increased and decreased around the set point to find the characteristics of the control object From the results the PID con stants are automatically set in the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and Derivative Time D parameters e Both 100 AT and 40 AT are supported for AT e Only 100 AT can be executed for heating and cooling control e This parameter will not be displayed when either 100 or 40 AT exe cute cancel is set to be executed using an event input Function OFF AT Cancel OFF Operation AT 2 100 AT Execute AT 1 40 AT Execute e This parameter is normally aF F Press the lAl Key and select Akt 2 or Ak to execute AT AT cannot be executed when control is stopped or during ON OFF control e When AT execution ends the parameter setting automatically returns to AFF E Related Parameters See Proportional band Integral time Derivative time adjustment level Page 188 PID ON OFF initial setting level Page 204 179 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Communications Writing Communications must be supported The Event Input Assignments 1 and 2 parameters must not be
112. the initial setting level 2 Press the kel Key to select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level 3 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level 82 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 Advanced Function Setting Level The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level 4 Press the cel Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter Heater Overcurrent Check that this parameter is set to ON the default and then set the Use Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter m Setting Heater Overcurrent Detection 5 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced PV SP function setting level to the initial setting level Press the O key again for at least one second to move to the operation level 6 Press the O Key for less than one second to move from the operation Adjustment Level level to the adjustment level Display Heater Current 7 Press the cel Key to select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter 1 Value Monitor Check the current value and then set the Heater Overcurrent D
113. to 500 0 C 199 9 199 9 to 520 0 C 199 9 ee to 900 0 F to 940 0 F ee 2 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 20 0 to 120 0 C 40 0 to Ther F 250 0 F mome JPt100 3 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 199 9 to 520 0 C 199 9 ter Multi to 900 0 F to 940 0 F inputs 4 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 20 0 to 120 0 C 40 0 to F 250 0 F Thermocouple K 5 200 to 1 300 C 300 to 220 to 1 320 C 340 to 2 300 F 2 340 F 20 0 to 500 0 C 0 0 to 40 0 to 520 0 C 40 0 to 900 0 F 940 0 F J 7 100 to 850 C 100 to 120 to 870 C 140 to 1 500 F 1 540 F 20 0 to 400 0 C 0 0 to 40 0 to 420 0 C 40 0 to 750 0 F 790 0 F A to 400 C 300 to 700 220 to 420 C 340 to 740 F F 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 199 9 to 420 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F to 740 0 F E 200 to 600 C 300 to 220 to 620 C 340 to 1 100 F 1 140 F L 12 100 to 850 C 100 to 120 to 870 C 140 to 1 500 F 1 540 F U 13 200 to 400 C 300 to 700 220 to 420 C 340 to 740 F F 14 199 9 to C 199 9 199 9 to 420 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 to 740 0 F 200 to l sot C 300 to 220 to 1 320 C 340 to 2 300 2 340 F l 1 T C 0 to 3 000 20 to 1 on C 40 to 3 040 1 700 C 0 to 3 000 20 to 1 7a C 40 to 3 040 Pk to 1 C 300 to l i 1 ae C 0 to 3 240
114. value The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 250 ms If a positive value is set for the alarm value the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the rising direction If a negative value is set the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the falling direction Precaution If a shorter PV rate of change calculation period is set outputs set for the PV change rate alarm function may repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time It is therefore recommended that the PV change rate alarm be used with the alarm latch turned ON PV Time Alarm value S PV change width for PV rate of change calculation period ON ON OFF OFF Alarm function Seting range Unit Doat PV Rate of Change Calcu 1 to 999 Sampling cycle 1s lation Period Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 3 10 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms 3 10 1 Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarm Operations e Heater burnout detection and heater overcurrent detection are executed by measuring heater current while the control output heating is ON and heater short detection is executed by measuring heater current while it is OFF For details refer to the following table Heater burnout detection heater short detection and heater overcurrent detection cannot be used with the control output for cooling Power to heat
115. wires that have low resis tance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same 36 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Control Output 1 e Outputs are sent from terminals 1 and 2 with the E5CN from pins 4 to 6 with the E5CN U and from pins 3 and 4 with the ESAN EN GN The fol lowing diagrams show the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits y Z J V om O O GND a Relay Voltage for driving SSR Current E5CN FV EY E gt To GND O Relay Voltage for driving SSR E5CN U Current Relay Voltage for driving SSR Current E5AN EN Relay Voltage for driving SSR Current E5GN e The following table shows the specifications for each output type E5CN CN U Te Relay 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Long life relay 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 1 000 000 using a triac operations Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 21 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion Current DC 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA resistive load 600 Q max Resolution Approx 10 000 37 Wiring Terminals 38 Section 2 2 E5AN EN T Relay 250 VAC 5 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 40 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion Current DC 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA resistive load 600 Q max Resolution Approx 10 0
116. write the wrong pass word to the Move to Protect Level parameter after the correct parameter has been written the Move to Protect Level parameter will be displayed and any Write Variable operation commands to write parameters in the protect level will result in operation errors 2 If a password is not set or if it is set to 0 the display will change to the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the protect level will be enabled immediately 112 PV Change Color Section 4 10 4 10 PV Change Color 4 10 1 PV Color Change Function Use the PV color change function to change the color of the PV display No 1 display There are three display colors orange red and green and you can select from the following three modes and eight functions PV Change e Constant This mode displays orange red or green all the time Color e Linked to Alarm 1 This mode switches the PV display color from red to green when alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when alarm 1 turns ON e Linked to PV stable band This mode switches the PV display color between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable band or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV stable band Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter advanced func tion setting level e The default is WEd red The following tables shows the display functions that can be set using the PV color change function
117. 0 advanced function setting level 215 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 An event input must be assigned Clk k ku cb Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 vais menoui e The following functions can be assigned to event inputs 1 and 2 RUN STOP Function Auto Manual Switch Program Start Invert Direct Reverse Operation 100 AT Execute Cancel 40 AT Execute Cancel Setting Change Enable Disable Alarm Latch Cancel e Default Event Input Assignment 1 n Event Input Assignment 2 9 Star a NONE None StaP RUN STOP Setting MANU Auto Manual PRSE Program start See note 1 a5 invert Direct Reverse Operation Be o l 100 AT Execute Cancel AES SSS 40 AT Execute Cancel See note 2 ime _ AlarmLatch Cancel Note 1 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern param eter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 2 This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled E Related Parameter See SPO to SP3 adjustment level Page 186 Number of multi SP uses initial setting level Page 213 GUR Extraction of Square Root Enable An analog input must be supported This parameter enables and disables square root extraction 3 Function Settingrange Doat T aN Enabled af F Disabled Seiting 216 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 E Related Parameter See Extraction of square root low cut point adjustment level Page 194 MZ
118. 00 E5GN TE Relay 250 VAC 2 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 21 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion DC 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA resistive load 500 Q max Resolution Approx 10 000 e Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected e The voltage output for driving SSR is not electrically isolated from the internal circuits When using a grounding thermocouple do not connect any of the control output terminals to the ground If a control output termi nal is connected to the ground errors will occur in the measured tempera ture as a result of leakage current e Control output 1 voltage output for driving SSR and control output 2 voltage output for driving SSR are not isolated For the ESAN EN how ever the internal circuits are functionally isolated e Long life relay outputs use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability However if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals short circuit faults may occasionally occur If the output becomes permanently shorted there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater Design safety into the system including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire e Take countermeasure
119. 1 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 2 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 2 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level 209 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 ALLJ Alarm 3 Type Alarm 3 must be assigned e Select one of the following four alarm 3 types Deviation deviation range absolute value or PV change rate alarm Function Refer to the alarm 1 type list The 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm setting in a that list cannot be used Setting E Related Parameters See Alarm value 3 Page 173 Alarm value upper limit 3 Alarm value lower limit 3 Page 175 operation level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 3 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 3 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level me L There must be a transfer output or a R E Transfer Output Type a e This parameter sets the transfer output type e The operation is shown in the following table m Transfer Output Destination Control output 1 Control output 2 Transfer output destination Current output e No Control output 1 e Relay output e Voltage output for driving SSR e Relay output e No e Voltage output for driving Relay output SSR e Voltage output for driving SSR E Precision and User Calibration po Precision _ User calibration 20 3 FS Supported See note Simple transfer output 0 3 FS Not supported Note Referto SECTION 6 CALIBRATION for details on the
120. 160 Communications Setting Level Section 5 9 5 9 Communications Setting Level Lm zz Mm w E W Lm D rr m Pad See Protocol Setting Communications Unit No Communications Baud Rate Communications Data Length CompoWay F must be selected as the protocol Communications Stop Bits Communications Parity Send Data Wait Time Communications must be supported CompoWay F must be selected as the protocol e Each parameter is enabled when the power is reset e Match the communications specifications of the E5_IN and the host com puter If multiple devices are connected ensure that the communications specifications for all devices in the system except the Communications unit number are the same tem Symbol Protocol setting LW Mod CompoWay F CWE SYSWAY Modbus Communications 0 to 99 0 to 99 Unit No Communications 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 baud rate 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 kbps kbps Communications 7 or 8 bits 7 or 8 bits data length Stop bits Sbe 1 or 2 bits 1 or 2 bits Communications NoNE EVEN odd None Even Odd parity Send data wait time ditt 0 to 99 0 to 99 ms eu E Related Parameter Communications writing adjustment level Page 180 255 Communications Setting Level Section 5 9 256 SECTION 6 CALIBRATION This section describes how the user can calibrate the ESCN and ESCN U Digital Temperature Controllers Gel Parameter SMOC ys o
121. 199 9 to 999 9 Thermocouple Wo A O to 2 300 C 0 to 3 200 PLII 0 to 1 300 C 0 to 2 300 e The default is 5 e If a platinum resistance thermometer is mistakenly connected while a set ting for other than a platinum resistance thermometer is in effect S ERR will be displayed To clear the S ERR display check the wiring and then turn the power OFF and back ON Make sure that the setting of the input type parameter agrees with the sensor that is connected Input type Specifications Input temperature setting range Models with Current input 4 to 20 mA O Either of the following ranges by scaling analog 0 to 20 mA oo 1 999 to 9 999 input 199 9 to 999 9 Voltage input 1to5V 19 99 to 99 99 Oto5V 1 999 to 9 999 010 10V e The default is O 53 Selecting the Temperature Unit Section 3 3 3 3 Selecting the Temperature Unit 3 3 1 Temperature Unit e Either C or F can be selected as the temperature unit e Set the temperature unit in the Temperature Unit parameter of the initial setting level The default is L C Operating Procedure The following example shows how to select C as the temperature unit Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the cel Key Press the IA or X Key to select either C or F L C rt
122. 2 201 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 LN H Scaling Upper Limit The input type must be set for an e analog input LN L Scaling Lower limit dP Decimal Point e These parameters can be used when the input type is set for an analog input e When an analog input is used scaling is performed Set the upper limit in the Scaling Upper Limit parameter and the lower limit in the Scaling Lower Limit parameter e The Decimal Point parameter specifies the decimal point position of parameters set point etc whose unit is EU 4 Function e Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit a Setting range Unit Default Seii Scaling Upper Limit Scaling lower limit 1 to 9999 3 Scaling Lower Limit 1999 to scaling upper limit 1 None Jo o e Decimal Point Parameter Setting name range Decimal Point Controllers with Thermocouple Resis O to 1 tance Thermometer Universal Inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs ot3 Jo o Setvalue Settings Example o oag past decimal pant 1234 E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 II The input type must be set for a tem d u Temperature Unit a nol ia e Set the temperature input unit to either C or F Function Setting range Default TGE O Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 202 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 gt Function T Setting See SP Upper Limit S
123. 3A resistive load Relay outputs Control output 1 i ar a Relay output Control output 1 Auxiliary output 1 three terminals used oO Auxiliary output 2 SPDT 250 VAC 3A 4 A Control output cooling side resistive load ponot oo fe Voltage output mA ae l 5 An input error is sent to the for driving SSR r i sent to which the alarm 1 12 VDC 21 mA V e lt 2 function is assigned Current output DONOT gt gt 4 to 20 mADC USE B Input power supply 0 to 20 mA DC i C Load 600 Q max J Analog input TC Pt e 100 to 240 VAC universal input e 24 VAC VDC no polarity Note For the Wiring Socket purchase the P2CF 11 or PG3A 11 separately Since the voltage output control output is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer Con nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents To comply with EMC standards the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable is longer than 30 m the EMC standards will not be satisfied Controllers Option Units The E5LIN TO is set for a K thermocouple a oT ee ER iib P gt input type of 5 by default If a difference sensor
124. 4 20 4 to 20 mA None put 0 20 0 to 20 mA viseve EH fee ene Event Input Assign None None NONE NONE None ment 1 STOP RUN STOP DEAF MANU Auto Manual MANE PRST Program Start See PRSE note 3 DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation AT 2 100 AT Execute Can cel AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable LAT Alarm Latch Cancel 1 d I mu M rr oe m oo we J m M vat lt 3 gt em F Lim mr S D a ma mi gt F Za T J J Lim or Lim T l J m 4 n j rr T m Event Input Assign None None a STOP None ment 2 STOP RUN STOP MANU Auto Manual PRST Program Start See note 3 DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation Al 2 100 AT Execute Can cel Al 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable LAT Alarm Latch Cancel Extraction of Square OFF ON ee Root Enable Move to Advanced A 1999 to 9 999 od sal function Setting Level Note 1 Set None as the unit for analog inputs 23 0 to 50 mV 2 Transfer output Setting monitor range Default transfer output type upper lower limits See note 2 1 Set Point SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP upper limit lower limit Set Point During SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP upper limit l
125. 7 segments SV 11 segments e Character Heights e Character Heights PV 7 mm SV 3 5 mm PV 7 5 mm SV 3 6 mm e Changes to Display Contents AL LED indicator eliminated LED indicators added and key indicator added A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized X X E Terminal Arrangements po Previousmodels Upgraded models E5AN EN Terminals 16 through 20 were changed Terminals 1 through PANN extemal powet 15 were not changed TwocTs Control Output2 Supply Voltage output Long life relay Externalpower One CT i soe ssl output supply for ES1B Two CTs Control Output2 Supply ___ 12 VDC 20 mA Control Output 2 g 7 Control Output 2 960 VAC 3 A 12 VDC 20 mA CT1 DONOT DONOT 12 VDC 21mA B i 45 USE USE 15 Resistive load ae A e TC Pt universal input Analog input J USE TC Pt universal input Analog input P Previous models _ _ Upgraded models Number of terminals 9 1 to 9 Number of terminals 14 1 to 14 Input terminals 7 to 9 Input terminals 10 to 12 RS 485 communications terminals 5 and 6 RS 485 communications terminals 7 and 8 RS 48 B A 4 er ee oe fe DO NOT USE A A 4 A A A A A RS 232C SD RD SG B AR E communications id ponor a j Inpu ontror A DO NOT Se a S a a A S
126. 999 9 Alarm 1 ON Delay ie Alarm 2 ON Delay e Alarm 3 ON Delay i Alarm 1 OFF Delay O to 999 0 OFF delay dis abled Alarm 2 OFF Delay O to 999 0 OFF delay dis abled 1 1 al an ra _ C1 l Jd ri Wy LUIS C or F i note Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 input Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 01 to 99 99 INS 1 None O to 999 0 ON delay dis abled O to 999 0 ON delay dis abled O to 999 0 ON delay dis abled Alarm 3 OFF Delay O to 999 0 OFF delay dis abled Input Shift Type INS1 Temperature input 1 point shift INS2 Temperature input 2 point shift MV at Stop and Error OFF ON Addition Auto Manual Select AMAd OFF ON None Addition RT e oen saa o pa e a IHS Alarm atch u Joron feran Jo None HS Alarm Hysteresis u lotes o hao ooo o LBA Detection Time O to 9999 0 LBA function dis Second abled LBA Level Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 10 00 ere OFF None O ih _ al 29 Un Appendix Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Setvalue Universal input 0 0 to 999 9 B i Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment 296 When control output 1 is a voltage output for driving SSR See note 2 NONE No assignment O Control output heat ing C O Control output cool ing ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 A
127. A R R AET output 1 B AC CT input USE icati A supply Communications A a Universal TC Pt input 100 to 240 VAC or 12 VDC 21 MA B Event input 24 VAC DC no polarity Relay output Alarm output 1 OUT1 control output 2 or input error alarm 1 output 1 ALM1 OUT1 43 Auxiliary Input power Control Auxiliary output 2 supply output1 7 output 1 e 100 to 240 VAC e 24 VAC DC no polarity Analog input XX E Body Drawout pT Previous models Upgraded models E5AN EN e Using Screws e Using Hooks ae z oono E Dimensions pT Previousmodes Z _ Upgraded models 3 e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Bezel thickness 2 mm Depth 99 mm Shape of slits changed Bezel thickness 3 mm Depth 100 mm e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Bezel thickness 2 mm Shape of slits changed XX E Terminal Block Configuration po Previousmodels Z _ _ Upgraded models e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Terminals 1 to 6 M2 6 screw terminals Terminals 1 to 12 M3 screw terminals Terminals 7 to 9 M2 screw terminals T ETN PES j AWA NRA SW 7s AWA B QS A DE E j T vi x NY H e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Terminals 1 to 12 None i si Sh si Sil a T Ci __T XXil E Wire Connections P P
128. AC VDC power supply A D was added to the model numbers for specifications models with 24 VAC VDC power supply Example ESCN R2MT 500 24 VAC VDC _ Specifications Example ESCN R2MTD 500 24 VAC VDC Example ESAN R3MT 500 100 to 240 N was added to all model numbers VAC A D was added to the model numbers for Example ESAN R38MT 500 24 VAC VDC models with 24 VAC VDC power supply specifications Example e E5AN R3MT 500 N 100 to 240 VAC e E5AN R38MTD 500 N 24 VAC VDC Examples E5GN RTC 100 to 240 VAC Model numbers have changed accompa E5GN RP 100 to 240 VAC nying the introduction of universal input 24 VAC DC Specification capability Example ESGN RTC 24 VAC DC e A D was added to the model numbers for models with 24 VAC VDC power supply specifications Example E5GN RT 100 to 240 VAC E5GN RTD 24 VAC VDC a PV status display and SV status display PF Key added E5AN EN only ay omrRon E5AN PV SP display selection for three level dis play E5AN EN only XXV po Previous models Upgraded models Inputs Square root extraction for models with ana log inputs Control output ON OFF count alarm MV change rate limiter 40 AT PV rate of change alarm OC alarm only for models with heater burn out detection Logic operations Inverti
129. Absolute value lower limit Absolute value upper limit with standby sequence Absolute value lower limit with standby sequence 5 1 7 1 1 1 0 1 3 2 LBA alarm 1 type only PV change rate alarm Note 1 2 3 4 70 Section 3 9 Alarm output operation When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative ON ON Xi gt X e Description of function Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X Set the deviation above the set point as the alarm upper limit H and the deviation below the set point as the alarm lower limit L The alarm output will be ON within the set deviations A standby sequence is added to the upper and lower limit alarm 1 See note 6 See note 3 See note 4 A standby sequence is added to the upper limit alarm 2 See note 6 A standby sequence is added to the lower limit alarm 3 See note 6 The alarm will turn ON if the pro cess value is larger than the alarm value X regardless of the set point The alarm will turn ON if the pro cess value is smaller than the alarm value X regardless of the set point A standby sequence is added to the absolute value upper limit alarm 8 See note 6 A standby sequence is added to the absolute value lower limit alarm 9 See note 6 Refer to page 118 See note 7 Refer to page 72 See note 8 With set values 1 4 and 5 the uppe
130. Alani Dely Serenassa Gane achat oceans eee ae kee es 116 4 12 Loop Burnout Alar x00 350s sary othe oooh CxS eS ete ae ee eee 118 4 12 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 0c cee eee ee 118 4 13 Performing Manual Control 2 00 4 c6 casa yrant ean euv iE AE 122 4 13 1 Manual Operation 0 0 cee 122 4 14 Using the Transfer Output 2 d 40654644 4544016 44e ine eka toe ein 126 4 14 1 Transfer Output Function 0 0 eee 126 87 88 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 Using the Simple Program Function 0 0 00 c cece eee 4 15 1 Simple Program Function 0 0 cece eee eee 4 15 2 Operation at the Program End 0 ce eee eee eee 4 15 3 Application Example Using a Simple Program Output Adjustment Functions 4 16 1 Output Limits 4 16 2 MVatStop 4 16 3 MV at PV Error Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter 0005 Setting the Width of MV Variation 0 ccc cece ee eee eens Setting the PF Key 4 19 1 PF Setting Function Key 00000 c cece cee ete ees Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations 0000000 4 20 1 Control Output ON OFF Count Function Displaying PV SV Status 4 21 1 PV and SV Status Display Functions 25 Logic Operations 4 22 1 The Logic Operation Functi
131. Auxil lary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment and Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 Model Number Structure Model Number Legends 10 Controllers Option Units E5AN EN L 3L JML _J LJ 500 N E53 123456 7 8 9 1 1 Control Output 1 1 Function R Relay output EN01 RS 232C Q Voltage output for driving SSR communications C Current output EN03 RS 485 8 communications AKB Event input Auxiliary Outputs 3 Three outputs Heater Burnout Heater Short Control Output 2 or External Power Supply for ES1B Blank None Q Control output 2 voltage output for driving SSR Y Long life relay output hybrid H Heater burnout Heater short Heater overcurrent detection CT1 HH Heater burnout Heater short Heater overcurrent detection CT2 P Power supply for sensor Option M Option Unit can be mounted Input Type T Universal thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer input L Analog current voltage input Power Supply Voltage Blank 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC VDC Case Color Blank Black W Silver Terminal Cover 500 With terminal cover Version N Available only to models released after January 2008 I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 oe 1 Temperature input Control Control output J ee Control output 1 or analog input section heating
132. C heater overcurrent alarm Auto Manual RUN STOP Disabled Program start AT Execute Cancel SP ramp operating Multi SP bit 0 Multi SP bit 1 Disabled Program end output Work bit 1 Work bit 2 Work bit 3 Work bit 4 Work bit 5 Work bit 6 Work bit 7 35 Work bit 8 Work Bit 1 Input Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Assignment B Work Bit 1 Input Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Assignment C Work Bit 1 Input Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Assignment D io Work Bit 8 Input Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Assignment D O O N OOA WN 1 The event inputs that can be used depend on the Controller model 151 Logic Operations Section 4 22 2 Turns ON when either the control output 1 or 2 ON OFF count alarm is ON 5 Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Inputs A to D Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed inputs A to D Normally open Normally closed 6 Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Work Bits Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed work bits Normally open Normally closed 7 Setting ON Delay Times When an input with ON delay turns ON the output will turn ON after the set delay time has elapsed The setting range is 0 to 9 999 The default is O disabled 8 Setting OFF Delay Times When an in
133. C 1604 1997 IEC 751 PLII According to Platinel II Electromotive Force Table by Engelhard Corp Control Range e Resistance thermometer and thermocouple input Temperature lower limit 20 C to temperature upper limit 20 C or temperature lower limit 40 F to temperature upper limit 40 F e ES1B input Same as input indication range e Analog input 5 to 105 of scaling range 304 Appendix Setting Levels Diagram This diagram shows all of the setting levels To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level you must enter passwords Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level Power ON Start in manual mode Start in automatic mode Press the O Key or the PF Key for at least 1 s See note 4 l Operation Adjustment Level Level Press the O e Press the O ce Keys for at least 1s Z Press the Keys for at L M K least 3 s a A ii ey less than 1 s gE m C Display Z So will flash aia after 1st y S Press the O Key E M IS See note 5 Sone ee for at least 3 s while ey onitor Settin Manual note fy is displayed See note 5 ltem Level g mode A M will flash after em Leve 3 1st sec
134. ESCN ESAN ES5EN ESGN Digital Temperature Controller Communications Manual Cat No H158 for details 284 Appendix a e During opera tion continued After long ser vice life Output will not turn ON Temperature Con troller will not oper ate Temperature error is large Input error S err dis play Cannot shift levels Control is unstable Set to STOP default RUN Specified operation is unsuitable for required control default Reverse operation A high hysteresis is set for ON OFF oper ation default 1 0 C Set to STOP default RUN Thermometer has burnt out or short cir cuited Thermometer lead wires and power lines are in the same conduit causing noise from the power lines generally dis play values will be unstable Connection between the Temperature Controller and ther mocouple is using copper wires Installation location of thermometer is unsuitable Input shift is not set a default Operations limited due to protection Set the RUN STOP mode to RUN If STOP is lit on the display control is stopped Select either forward or reverse operation depending on the required control Reverse operation is used for heating operations Set a suitable value for the hysteresis Set the RUN STOP mode to RUN If STOP is lit on the display control is stopped Check whether the thermometer has burnt out or short circuited Wire the lead wires and
135. Figure 1 bring the set point to near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled Assume that the control target temperature C and the thermometer temperature B are the same r2 U limit 2 Check the thermometer temperature B and the Controller readout A L MITA pper iim Ii L I 0 Temperature Subtract the Controller readout temperature A from the thermometer ea temperature B and set NSL and N5H to the result as the input shift val ue The shift is illustrated in Figure 2 a 3 After setting the input shift values check the Controller readout A and the ZM ara thermometer temperature B If they are almost the same this completes Input Shift ia i Value shifting the temperature input Controller readout A After shifting Controller readout after shifting e g 120 C Controller readout before F shifting e g 110 C Input shift value e g 10 C Before shifting l l l l l l l Control target temperature B Near set point e g 120 C Figure 2 Illustration of 1 Point Shift 91 Shifting Input Values Section 4 1 Method for a 2 point Use a 2 point input shift if you want to increase the accuracy of the readout Shift values across the range of the Sensor 1 2 3 1 Shift the Controller readout at two points near room temperature and near the value at which the temperatu
136. HS Alarm 1 supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON aaa This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output e An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the set ting of this parameter e When the set value is 50 0 the HS alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the HS alarm output is turned ON a Setting range Unit Defaut 0 010 50 0 Setting Function E Related Parameters See Leakage current 1 monitor adjustment level Page 184 HS alarm HS alarm latch HS alarm hysteresis advanced function setting level Page 235 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 m rq Mu gt Leakage Current 2 Monitor Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Function Monitor range Unit Monitor ee errr is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e If an HS alarm 2 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the leakage current 2 monitor will flash E Related Parameters See HS alarm 1 HS alarm 2 adjustment level Page 184 a HS alarm use advanced
137. Hysteresis heating Hysteresis cooling Page 190 adjustment level Control period heat Control period cool initial setting level Page 206 Control output 1 assignment Page 238 Control output 2 assignment Auxil lary output 1 assignment Page 240 Auxiliary output 2 assignment Page 241 Auxiliary output 3 assignment Page 242 advanced function setting level Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 LA rr The control must be set to a temper ST self tuning ature input standard control and 2 PID control e The ST self tuning function executes tuning from the start of program execution to calculate PID constants matched to the control target When the ST function is in operation be sure to turn ON the power supply of the Function load connected to the control output simultaneously with or before starting Controller operation e Auto tuning can be started during self tuning Paremeter name Soning renge 7 Unt Teta a oF ST function OFF oN ST hill cee function ON Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 PID ON OFF Page 204 initial setting level ST stable a range advanced function setting level Page 224 PERN Program Pattern Function Setting See This parameter sets the type of control when using the simple program func tion e If the program pattern is set to aF F the simple program will not operate e If the program pattern is set to 5ta the RUN STOP status
138. IBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of the products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may
139. Item Display 4 ooo LI ooo ooo 000 Note The monitor setting items to be displayed is set in the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters advanced function setting level Press the O Key for at least 1 s Alarm 2 Type 94 N H Parameter Initialization g Al H Alarm 1 Latch HS Alarm Use i aioe o Goo ore ma OFF I ce Alarm 2 CaS ES m j C Li Alarm 2 Latch HS Alarm Latch Hysteresis z MOP Multi SP Uses 5 MCLE a FF Bao OFF ce ii Ee Alarm 3 Type Il yp a c mg SP Ramp Time Unit HJ H Alarm 3 Latch HS Alarm Hysteresis na f a a e T B gFF Alarm 3 I ce e Hysteresis 3 occ Standby Sequence 3 PRT HMove to Protect Level LBA Detection Time o ME 2C Reset E Time Er OOo ooo A oo J Transfer Output Type i Co 2 co Z Input Error Output LBA Level Linear output Auxiliary Output 1 3 GER g Open in Alarm Sao FA Transfer Output Il Upper Limit Cold J LBA Band a roar unction got Ce an Auxiliary Output 2 z bat Compensation a Lone
140. Key once for less than 1 s This level is for entering set values and offset values for control In addi tion to AT auto tuning communications write enable disable switching hysteresis settings multi SP settings and input offset parameters it includes HB alarm HS alarm OC alarm and PID constants From the adjustment level it is possible to move to the top parameter of the initial setting level protect level or operation level To switch to the monitor setting item level press the PF Key from the operation level or adjustment level The contents set for monitor setting items 1 to 5 can be displayed You can move from the monitor setting item level to the operation level or initial setting level This level is supported by the E5AN and E5EN only When the O Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds from the operation level s auto manual switching display the manual control level will be dis played The MANU indicator will light When the PF Setting is set to A M auto manual and the PF Key is pressed for more than one second from the operation level or adjustment level the manual control level will be displayed E5AN and E5EN only This is the level for changing the MV in manual mode To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second It is also possible to return to the operation level by pressing the PF Key for more than one second when the PF Setting is set to A M Setting Level Confi
141. LM3 Alarm 3 PEND Program end output See note 3 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 4 Work bit 1 See note 5 Work bit 2 See note 5 Work bit 3 See note 5 Work bit 4 See note 5 Work bit 5 See note 5 Work bit 6 See note 5 Work bit 7 See note 5 Work bit 8 See note 5 When control output 1 is a current output See note 2 NONE No assignment Control output heat ing C O Control output cool ing No assignment Control output heat ing Control output cool ing Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Program end output See note 3 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 4 Work bit 1 See note 5 Work bit 2 See note 5 Work bit 3 See note 5 Work bit 4 See note 5 Work bit 5 See note 5 Work bit 6 See note 5 Work bit 7 See note 5 Work bit 8 See note 5 3 0 C or F See note 1 1 I J m hig 4 T a _ ot ma J j I hig I Z ma a E 1 T 1 d T 1 d gt 2a 1 J I ys ST lt T 70 70 70 a ae ay el a O A A l E gt a o i I 1 9 gt an 1 J ae F il Appendix Setting monitor value D
142. N during the ON delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns ON Also if an alarm turns ON and then back OFF during the OFF delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns OFF Alarm will not turn ON Parameters Related to Alarm Delays Mami ON Deay faen owo Alarm2ONDelay rean owo Alarm 3ONDelay aaan Jowo SSS Alarm 1 OFF Delay A iaF Oto 999 s Alarm 2 OFF Delay FicoF Oto 999 s Alarm 3 OFF Delay uaF Oto 999 s 116 Alarm Delays Note Operating Procedure Operation Level Move to Ad vanced Function Parameter Initialization h y Alarm 1 ON IN Delay Alarm 1 OFF Delay Section 4 11 1 The defaults are 0 i e the ON and OFF delays are disabled 2 The parameters are displayed when alarm functions are assigned and when the alarm type is set to any type but O none 12 LBA or 13 PV change rate alarm Use the following procedure to set ON and OFF delays for the alarm 1 An ON delay of 5 seconds and an OFF delay of 10 s will be set 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the cel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Ad
143. O NOT USE lAuxiliary output 2 anaes A DONOT i USE mA EE oe a uxiliary output 1 V DO NOT B L USE l TC Pt universal input Analog input Communications l l RS 232C RS 485 sp O B l RD ac i Connected to event I 3 sa 3 DONOT USE inputs 3and4 aes DO NOT USE 6 B 4 DO NOT USE 2 A i OPETE E TAD EE A E E EE DO NOT USE Connected to Transfer output Y 4 t0 20 mA DC transfer output 3 turns Ea iced 68 Load 600 Q max DO NOT USE DO NOT USE XVI Preparations for Use Be sure to thoroughly read and understand the manual provided with the product and check the fol lowing points Checkpoint J oam Purchasing the prod Product appearance After purchase check that the product and packaging are not dented or otherwise damaged Damaged internal parts may prevent optimum control Product model and speci Make sure that the purchased product meets the required specifica fications tions Setting the Unit Product installation loca Provide sufficient space around the product for heat dissipation Do not tion block the vents on the product Terminal wiring Do not subject the terminal screws to excessive stress force when tightening them Make sure that there are no loose screws after tightening terminal screws to the specified torque of 0 74 to 0 90 N m see note Be sure to confirm the polarity for each terminal before wiri
144. OP to RUN mode the process value reaches the set point using the SP ramp function in the same way as when the set point is changed In this case operation is carried out with the process value treated as the set point before the change was made The direction of the SP ramp changes according to the relationship between the process value and the set point PV lt SP PV gt SP SP SP ramp Set point PV Same rate of change Set point _ PV Time L Time A Power ON Power ON e Execution of auto tuning starts after the end of the SP ramp e When control is stopped or an error occurs the SP ramp function is dis abled 107 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Section 4 8 Alarms during SP The operation of alarms during SP ramp operation depends on whether Ramp Operation alarms are set to be based on the ramp set point or the target set point refer to the following diagrams The set point to be used is set in the Alarm SP Selection parameter Refer to page 244 Alarm SP Selection Ramp SP Alarm Type 1 Upper Lower Limits Temperature falarm output ON ss ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ss ew ee ee ee eee eee a Time Alarm SP Selection Target SP Alarm Type 1 Upper Lower Limits Temperature aarm output ON i output ON Time 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level To move to the advanced function setting level you must first can
145. P Lower Limit e These parameters set the upper and lower limits of the set points A set point can be set within the range defined by the upper and lower limit set values in the SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit parameters If these parameters are reset any set point that is outside of the new range will be forcibly changed to either the upper limit or the lower limit e When the temperature input type and temperature unit have been changed the set point upper limit and set point lower limit are forcibly changed to the upper and lower limits of the sensor e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Parameter Setting range name Set Point Temperature SP lower limit 1 to Input set EU 1300 Upper Limit ting range upper limit Analog SP lower limit 1 to scaling EU 100 upper limit Set Point Temperature Input setting range lower limit EU 200 Lower Limit to SP upper limit 1 Analog Scaling lower limit to SP EU upper limit 1 Controllers with Analog Inputs Setting range Set Point Upper Limit SP lower limit 1 to scaling upper oo limit Set Point Lower Limit Scaling lower limit to SP upper i ge limit 1 E Related Parameters Input type Page 200 Temperature unit Page 202 initial setting level 203
146. PRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABIL 14 15 16 17 18 ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or oth erwise of any intellectual property right c Buyer Remedy Omron s sole obli gation hereunder shall be at Omron s election to i replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Product ii repair the non complying Product or iii repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non complying Product provided that in no event shall Omron be responsi ble for warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron s analysis confirms that the Products were prop erly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contamina tion abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment Omron Compa nies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits system assemblies or any other materials
147. PaP Function Setting See The No 3 display must be supported PV SP Display Screen Selection ESAN EN Note e This parameter sets the PV SP Screen No 3 display and order of display e The default is 4 A 2 level display is set at the time of shipping from the factory set val ue 0 A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized set value 4 Display contents 0 Only PV SP is displayed with no No 3 display 1 PV SP Multi SP and PV SP MV are displayed in order See note PV SP MV and PV SP Multi SP are displayed in order See note Only PV SP Multi SP is displayed PV SP MV is displayed See note 5 PV SP Multi SP and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order See note PV SP MV and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order See note Only PV SP Soak time remain is displayed The MV for heating and cooling control is set in the MV Display Selection parameter E Related Parameters Process value set point operation level Page 165 MV display selection advanced function setting level Page 249 od5L Function Setting MV Display Selection The No 3 display must be supported E5AN EN Heating and cooling control must be used The PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter must be set to 1 2 4 or 6 or the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameter must be set to 2 e This parameter selects the MV display for PV SP MV during
148. Program start Soak time remain operation level Page 171 Soak time adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 191 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 The control must be set to 2 PID MIs control MY S MV at Stop The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON e This parameter sets the MV to use when the RUN STOP status changes from RUN to STOP Function Setting range Um Deam w 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control Setting E Related Parameters See RUN STOP operation level Page 172 MV at stop and error addition advanced function setting level Page 233 The control must be set to 2 PID M control MY E MV at PV Error The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON l A e This parameter sets the MV to use when an input error occurs Function Setting range Umt Deam T 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control Setting E Related Parameters See MV at stop and error addition advanced function setting level Page 233 192 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 SPRL SP Ramp Set Value parameter must be set to e This parameter sets the rate of change during SP ramp operation Set the maximum permissible change width per unit of time as the SP ramp set value The SP ramp function is disabled if thi
149. Pvispmuti sP cantes e oo 2 PVISPIMV See note __ Canbeset SP SSS 3 PVISP Soaktime remain _ Canbeset SP 4 Proportional band P Canbest Poo 5 integrltime fcanses iS 6__ Detivavetime 0 Canses poo 7 Alarmvauet feanbes poro 8 Alarm valve upper Can best am o _ Alarm valuelowerlimit Canbest n 0 Alarmvaue2 fcanbest j 11 alarm value upperimt2 Canbest am 12 Alarm valve lowerlimit2 Canbest a ia AlarmvaueS fcansest a o o 14 Alarm valve upperimt3 Can best Pw 15 Alarm value lower imt3 Canbest o Note For details on MV settings for heating and cooling control refer to MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control on page 84 Setting Monitor Setting Items Pressing the PF Key in either the operation or adjustment level displays the applicable monitor setting items Press the PF Key to display in order Monitor Setting Items 1 to 5 After Monitor Setting Item 5 has been displayed the dis play will switch to the top parameter in the operation level Note 1 Items set as disabled in the Monitor Setting Items 1 to 5 parameters will not be displayed and the display will skip to the next enabled setting 2 While a monitor setting item is being displayed the display will be switched to the top parameter in the operation level if the kel Key or the O Key is pressed Operating Procedure This procedure sets the PF Setting parameter to PFDP and the Monitor Set ting Item 1 parame
150. SP Uses 1 Even input 3 Selected set point Set point 0 Set point 1 Number of Multi SP Uses 2 Models with Four Event Inputs 1 to 4 Event input Eventinput Eventinput Event input Description of EV1 EV2 assignment 1 assignment 2 assignment 3 assignment 4 EV3 and EV4 operation Number of Multi Displayed Multi SP not used EV1 EV2 EV3 and EV4 will SP Uses perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 1 2 3 and 4 parameters Not displayed Displayed Event inputs 2 3 and 4 cannot be EV1 will be used for the Multi Operation used for multi SP switching SP function to switch between performed set points 0 and 1 EV2 EV3 with two Multi and EV4 will perform the SP points operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 2 3 and 4 parameters Not displayed Operation per Displayed Event inputs 3 and EV1 and EV2 will be used for formed with four Multi SP 4 cannot be used for multi SP_ the Multi SP function to switch points switching between set points 0 1 2 and 3 EV3 and EV4 will per form the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assignment 3 and 4 parameters Only event inputs 1 and 2 are used for the multi SP function 214 Initial Setting Level See Note Note Section 5 7 The following tables show the relationships between ON OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and selected set points Number
151. Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be forcibly initialized to the respective upper and lower setting limits for changes in the upper and lower limits of the SP limiter and the temperature unit If the MV for heating or MV for cooling is selected the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be initialized to 100 0 and 0 0 respectively when a switch is made between standard control and heating cooling control using the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter e The output current when the linear current type is set to 4 to 20 mA the transfer output upper limit is set to 90 0 and the transfer output lower limit is set to 10 0 is shown in the following graph e For scaling from 0 0 to 100 0 the output for 5 0 to 0 0 will be the same value as for 0 0 and the output for 100 0 to 105 0 will be the same value as for 100 0 Output current mA 20 e eee eee eee MV 90 100 Transfer output Transfer output lower limit upper limit The above graph is for when the linear current output type is set to 4 to 20 mA Operating Procedure The following procedure sets the transfer output for an SP range of 50 to 200 Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Select the Transfer Output Type parameter by
152. a Sees 2k MUSCAT ON spot acter each ao tne ef Bact Oa be wee eee es noe R A EA AA eee ei Dae Wine Terimilialsicire se ee aes Gates oa tah a ane tia a cine eae eee ote et 2 3 Usine the Support Software Ot nea onda tow ace cea ba Mee Sua wou eae ees SECTION 3 Basic Operauions essan e E L niia Setine Examples 2 02 05 044 ARE E R A a rA Ea a EE AA J2 Setting tie Input Type arree Kae ee nea a Oe aaa aaa a a 32 Selecting the Temperature Winit 5 lt 0 s sen cara si ree ets ow eee Cara aee areas 3 4 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control 2 0 0 0 000000 ene 355 Setn Output Speciications 45 2 ve egi ha Ge tied ea he Gy ek eee se kw Ge oka Pade he eee IO Setting te Set FOSE 244 5 620i 0 tue taba thea Sabah Sh ewad hak Pehee Sane ase 37 sine ON OUF Controlls i4054 400 a46 oot bbG4 hue ae deed Shue eed a es 3 8 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 0 00 00 0 0c ee O Alam Ou puts lt 2 u lt sewn Beak bo whe aw wae eee heaasie wey eacete nk oot ocnares 3 10 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms re Serine the INO Displayc sus cat eee tee r Sees Chae ee oe aie ee ba has SECTION 4 Applications Operations cccccccccc ce ceeees 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 Shifting Input Values Alarm Hysteresis Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 20055
153. adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Error Displays L 7 Page 283 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be Hbe Heater Burnout Detection 2 Suppor ee ot Alarm 1 must be assigned The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output e The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls below the setting of this parameter e When the set value is 0 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF punch When the set value is 50 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON a Setting range Unit Defaut Setting 0 0 to 50 0 A 00 E Related Parameters See Heater current 2 value monitor adjustment level Page 182 HB ON OFF Heater burnout latch Heater burnout hysteresis advanced func tion setting level Page 222 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs oc Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 Function Setting See Alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Overcurrent Use param eter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current value for heater overcurrent alarm outputs e A heater overcurr
154. ae I Value Upper limit Temperature Input Shift Value Upper limit uru 260 4 Temperature LNOH o x 1 10 105 25 40 25 40 52 7 C Input Shift I Value 4 2 Alarm Hysteresis e The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON OFF can be set as follows Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Alarm hysteresis hysteresis l o i Uo OFF OFF A Alarm value Alarm value e Alarm hysteresis is set independently for each alarm in the Alarm Hyster esis 1 to Alarm Hysteresis 3 parameters initial setting level e The default is 0 2 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0 02 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs 4 2 1 Standby Sequence e The standby sequence can be used so that an alarm will not be output until the process value leaves the alarm range once and then enters it again e For example with a lower limit alarm the process value will normally be below the set point i e within the alarm range when the power supply is turned ON causing an alarm to be output If the lower limit alarm with a standby sequence is selected an alarm will not be output until the process value increases above the alarm set value i e until it leaves the alarm range and then falls back below the alarm set value Restart e The standby sequence is canceled when an alarm is output It is how ever restarted later by the Stand
155. aget a oF Initial Setting Level 9 To return to the initial setting level press the O Key for at least one sec Input Type ond 10 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second PV SP 109 Using the Key Protect Level Section 4 9 4 9 Using the Key Protect Level 4 9 1 Protection e To move to the protect level press the O and ce Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in operation level or adjustment level See note Note The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter advanced function setting level e The protect level protects parameters that are not changed during Con troller operation until operation is started to prevent them from being mod ified unintentionally There are four types of protection operation adjustment protect initial setting communications protect setting change protect and PF Key pro tect e The protect level settings restrict the range of parameters that can be used The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range of protection Operation Adjustment Protect Pv len be dis Can be dis Can be dis Can be dis ew le played played played PV SP Can be dis Can be dis played and played and changed changed Others Can be dis Can be dis played and played and changed changed Can be dis played and changed Cannot be displayed and moving to
156. ak currents To comply with EMC standards the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable is longer than 30 m the EMC standards will not be satisfied 32 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 E5GN The ESUN TL is set for a K thermocouple input type of 5 by default If a difference sensor is used an input error 5 FF will occur Check the setting of the input type parameter B A Control output 1 oo DO NOT eek 5 O NOT Relay output RS 485 communications tee p a 250 VAC 2A SD RD SG Analog input resistive load i ai V Voltage output RS 232C communications 4 DO NOT for driving SSR ee tat ae 4 B s Universal TC Pt input 4 to 20 mA DC Event input Auxiliary C Load 500 Q max j Auxiliary outputs 1and 2 Relay outputs 250 VAC 2A resistive load Input power Control Auxiliary output 2 supply output1 T output 1 e 100 to 240 VAC 24 VACIVDC no polarity A heater burnout alarm heater short alarm heater overcurrent alarm or input error is sent to the output to which the alarm 1 function is assigned
157. al cautions warnings and dangers Caution Electrical Shock Caution AN Indicates possibility of electric shock under specific conditions ais General Prohibition Prohibition ae ii Indicates non specific general prohibitions General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Mandatory Caution 1X E Safety Precautions A CAUTION Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Do not allow pieces of metal wire clippings or fine metallic shav ings or filings from installation to enter the product Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock fire or malfunction Do not use the product where subject to flammable or explosive gas Otherwise minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur Never disassemble modify or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts Minor electric shock fire or malfunction may occasionally occur CAUTION Risk of Fire and Electric Shock a This product is UL listed as Open Type Process Control Equip ment It must be mounted in an enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally b More than one disconnect switch may be required to de energize the equipment before servicing the product c Signal inputs are SELV limited energy 1 d Caution To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not inter connect the outputs of different Cla
158. alibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE PROM press the cel Key while Va is displayed in the No 2 display with out pressing the Al Key 8 The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF 6 6 2 Calibrating a Voltage Input In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with an Analog Input with a voltage input set as the input type 1 2 3 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connectan STV and DMM to the voltage input terminals as shown in the following diagram E5AN EN Input power supply 3 Turn the power ON 4 Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed Input type 2 or 3 5 When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows e Input type 2 or 3 5 V e Input type 4 10 V Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the I Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered
159. ame time as or before Supplying power to the Temperature Controller If power is turned ON for the Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved When starting operation after the Temperature Controller has warmed up turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at the same time as turning ON power for the load Instead of turning the Temperature Controller OFF and ON again switching from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used Avoid using the Controller in places near a radio television set or wireless installing The Controller may cause radio disturbance for these devices Shipping Standards The E5CN E5CN H E5AN E5AN H E5EN and E5EN H comply with Lloyd s standards When applying the standards the following installation and wiring requirements must be met in the application E Application Conditions 1 Installation Location The E5CN E5CN H E5AN E5AN H E5EN and E5EN H comply with installation category ENV1 and ENV2 of Lloyd s standards Therefore they must be installed in a location equipped with air condition ing They must therefore be installed in a location equipped with air conditioning They cannot be used on the bridge or decks or in a location subject to strong vibration 2 Wiring Conditions Install the recommended ferrite core and wrap the line around it three turns for the applicable lines e g power Supply cable
160. and heater overcurrent detection must be alt Heater Overcurrent Latch supported two CTs Alarm 1 must be assigned e When this parameter is set to ON the heater overcurrent alarm is held until any of the following conditions is satisfied a Heater overcurrent detection is set to 50 0 A b The power is cycled c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel Function d The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level Seting rangs Doat N oN Enabled aF F Disabled Setting E Related Parameters See Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment a level Pages 181 and 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Heater overcurrent hysteresis advanced function setting level Page 247 Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 HB ON OFF Page 222 PF setting Page 247 advanced function setting level 246 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported and alarm 1 must be aLH Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis assigned The Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON and the Heater Overcurrent Latch parameter m
161. and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Max heater current 50 A AC Input current readout accuracy 5 FS 1 digit max Heater burnout alarm setting 0 1 to 49 9 A 0 1 A units range 0 0 A Heater burnout alarm output turns OFF 50 0 A Heater burnout alarm output turns ON Min detection ON time 100 ms See note 1 HS alarm setting range 0 1 to 49 9 A 0 1 A units 0 0 A HS alarm output turns ON 50 0 A HS alarm output turns OFF Min detection OFF time 100 ms See note 2 Heater overcurrent alarm setting 0 1 to 49 9 A 0 1 A units range 0 0 A Heater overcurrent alarm output turns ON 50 0 A Heater overcurrent alarm output turns OFF Min detection OFF time 100 ms Note 1 When the control output 1 ON time is less than 100 ms heater burnout detection heater overcurrent detection and heater current measurement are not performed 2 When the control output 1 OFF time is less than 100 ms HS alarm and leakage current measure ment are not performed External Power Supply for ES1B Output voltage 12 VDC 10 Output current Note Contact your OMRON representative for information on using the external power supply for ES1B for other applications 276 Appendix Characteristics Indication accuracy Thermocouple See note 1 ambient temperature E5CN AN EN GN 0 3 of PV or 1 C whichever is greater 1 digit max of 23 C E5CN U 1 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Platinum resistance t
162. and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting The default setting is for a K thermocouple 5 An 4 EFF error will be displayed if the input type setting is incorrect To clear the 5 4 F error correct the input type or wiring and then cycle the power E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Set point upper limit Set point lower limit Page 203 ini tial setting level Process Value Set Point Display 1 Process Value Set Point Display 2 ESAN EN only The process value is displayed on the No 1 display and the set point is dis played on the No 2 display Function a ee ee Process value Temperature According to indication range for Monitor each sensor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Refer to page 303 TS Setting range Unit SP lower limit to SP upper limit During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting 165 Operation Level See Section 5 3 No 3 Display E5AN EN The following table shows the contents of the No 3 display according to the setting of the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter Display contents Only the PV and SP are displayed The No 3 display is not shown 7 PVISPIMulicSP and PVISPIMV are displayed in orde 2 PVISPIMV and PVISPIMUIi SP are displayed inorder 4 PVISPIMVaredspl
163. andard 5 0 to MV upper limit 0 1 Heating cooling 105 0 to 0 0 105 0 E Related Parameters See PID ON OFF Page 204 ST Page 205 initial setting level 193 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 ck 2 PID control must be used ay ont MV Change Rate Limit Toa e OE e The MV Change Rate Limit parameter sets the maximum allowable varia tion in the MV per second If the change in the MV exceeds this setting the MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated value is reached If the limit is set to 0 0 this function will be disabled e The MV Change Rate Limit parameter will not operate in the following sit uations gt Function e In manual mode e During ST execution Cannot be set when ST is ON e During AT execution e During ON OFF control e While stopped MV output during STOP e During MV output when error occurs a __Settingrange Unt Defaut oowoo s o Setting E Related Parameters See Proportional band adjustment level Page 188 The input type must be an analog noo 7 input and the Extraction of Square ERI Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point poot Enable aamen mie De Sel to ON e This parameter sets the extraction of square root low cut point used for the inputs The data after extracting the square root is shown below e The low cut point is used for extracting the square root for flowrate sen sors 4 Function Operation result 100 FS Oe r a f Ex
164. arameter by pressing the ce Key Limit 5 Press the A and Keys to set 100 D Decimal Point Select the Decimal Point parameter by pressing the cel Key 7 Press the A and Keys to set 1 8 To return to the operation level press the O Key for one second 4 4 Executing Heating Cooling Control 4 4 1 Heating Cooling Control Heating cooling control can be used on the E5CN LIMLJ 500 with an E53 CNQLILIN2 E5CN LI2MLI 500 E5AN LI3LIMLJI 500 N or E5EN LIBLIML 500 N Heating cooling control operates when H i heating cooling is selected for the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter 95 Executing Heating Cooling Control Section 4 4 The following functions are assigned to outputs in the initial status Symbol Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment adet Control output for heating Control Output 2 Assignment UER Not assigned Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment E5AN EN only Each output assignment is automatically initialized as shown below when the control mode is changed Example E5CN Parameter name Symbol Without control output 2 With control output 2 Standard Heating cooling Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment heating heating heating heating Control Output 2 Not assigned See Not assigned See Not assigned Control output
165. arameter was changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or r key operations 1 _ ireruttston ste uma oranges FuN a ne spain eer e The Program Start parameter was changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key Sper before the soak time expired e The RUN STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the above operation is performed e The Program Start parameter is again changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key opera tions e The RUN STOP status will AAE change to RUN mode when the above PPAR is performed C EEND Tasen on e na spain pogam DOAS ON os O e END flashes on the No 2 aale and the program END output turns ON e The END display is cleared and the program END output turns OFF e Key operations are used to switch the RUN STOP status to RUN with the Program Start parameter set to RSET stopped e Normal control operation is started e The Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT after the process value stabilizes e The RUN STOP status remains as RUN e Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band Measuring the soak time stops when the pro cess value leaves the wait band e Key operations are used to change the RUN STOP status to RUN e Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band continuing from the time between 7 and 9 e The RUN STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the measured time reaches the soak time e END flashes on the No 2 dis
166. ariable is displayed when the MV Monitor Heating and MV Monitor Cooling parameters are set to ON and not displayed when these parameters are set to OFF Function O o Sening Doen D GN Displayed aFF Not displayed OFF Setting E Related Parameters See MV monitor heating Page 175 MV monitor cooling Page 176 operation a level WEE Automatic Display Return Time e In the operation level adjustment level or monitor setting item level the display automatically returns to the PV SP if there are no key operations for the time set for this parameter e The automatic display return time is disabled when the parameter is set to OFF In that case the display will not be automatically switched Setting range Unit a OFF 11096 gt Function Setting moe Alarm 1 must be assigned and the H iLE Alarm 1 Latch alarm 1 type must not be 0 JL Alarm 2 must be assigned and the HELE Alarm 2 Latch alarm 2 type must not be 0 or 12 IL Alarm 3 must be assigned and the HILE Alarm 3 Latch alarm 3 type must not be 0 or 12 e When this parameter is set to ON the alarm function is held until one of the following conditions is satisfied Function a The power is cycled b The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel c The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel 227 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 e The
167. arm we Work bit 2 See note 4 Work bit 3 See note 4 Work bit 4 See note 4 Work bit 5 See note 4 I L N Ni 7 Li j a a ral Gee ai J l LI 1 j M4 vi hit z lt a ri Za x hit _ Ti i lt I a _ m gt ZZ a Mm Work bit 6 See note 4 7 Work bit 7 See note 4 Work bit 8 See note 4 gt zn D l gt 2a 1 1 m ri ni ry Note 1 If L a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output 2 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 3 If the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control control automatically switches to L a 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used E Related Parameters See Standard or heating cooling Page 204 Program pattern Page 205 initial ae setting level 239 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Siib 4 Function a Setting See 240 Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Note F I min J j Ti pan x Za gt lt
168. arm 1 HS alarm 2 adjustment level Page 184 Failure detection advanced function setting level Page 235 Error Displays Lif i Page 283 gt Function a Monitor See Leakage Current 2 Monitor Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Monitor range Unt 0 0 to 55 0 errrr is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e If an HS alarm 2 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the leakage current 2 monitor will flash E Related Parameters HS alarm 1 HS alarm 2 adjustment level Page 184 HS alarm use advanced function setting level Page 235 Error Displays Li F7 Page 283 Operation Level Section 5 3 OOCL The Program Pattern parameter Prat Program Start must not be set to OFF This parameter starts and stops the simple program function e The RUN STOP status will automatically switch to RUN when this param eter is set to STRT e The simple program will stop when this parameter is set to RSET e This parameter will function as a monitor display for the start stop status of the simple program if an e
169. arm 222 248 OO 0000 og o0 0000 N oo N o0 0000 OF a T a D HY e Ca Gre HE E 4 A e E J Control Output 1 D Monitor Setting 248 Assignment Auxiliary Output 5 Item 5 3 Open in Alarm 222 5 7 A g ca Lim ia a oF ot fs oo 0000 Diz ary NO NO Oo Oooo HY D o0 0000 i 7 ml mi PV SP Display PV Change 230 Screen Selection 249 Color Control Output 2 Assignment HB ON OFF N N N 000 rq ra 000000 oo 0000 lt A 4 OL im Heater Burnout PV Stable Latch Band Auxiliary Output 1 240 MV Display 249 Assignment Selection N N NO 09 GO OO NO NO NO 31 o0 0000 AA ooo00 og DRET lt a PV Decimal 250 Point Display 000 J Heater Burnout Hysteresis m Alarm 1 ON 2932 Auxiliary Output 2 Delay 42 Assignment 241 o ek ia ol oF co po 4 A Alarm 2 ON Delay T a Vt T 2 zZ ST Stable Auxiliary Output 3 242 PV Status 0 Range Assignment Display Function op 0000 oo co 4 3 i
170. arm value lower limit 2 174 alarm value lower limit 3 175 alarm value upper limit 1 174 alarm value upper limit 2 174 alarm value upper limit 3 175 alpha 224 AT calculated gain 225 AT execute cancel 179 AT hysteresis 225 auto manual select addition 234 auto manual switch 166 automatic cooling coefficient adjustment 245 automatic display return time 227 auxiliary output 1 assignment 240 auxiliary output 1 open in alarm 222 auxiliary output 2 assignment 241 auxiliary output 2 open in alarm 222 auxiliary output 3 assignment 242 auxiliary output 3 open in alarm 222 character select 243 cold junction compensation method 229 communications baud rate 255 communications data length 255 communications parity 255 communications stop bits 255 communications Unit No 255 communications writing 180 control output assignment 238 control output 1 ON OFF count alarm set value 253 control output 1 ON OFF count monitor 252 control output 2 assignment 239 control output 2 ON OFF count alarm set value 253 control output 2 ON OFF count monitor 252 control period cooling 206 control period heating 206 cooling coefficient 189 Index dead band 189 decimal point 202 derivative time 188 direct reverse operation 206 display refresh period 251 event input assignment 216 extraction of square root enable 216 extraction of square root low cut point 194 HB ON OFF 222 heater burnout de
171. assword input set value 169 Advanced Function Control in progress E Control stopped 218 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Advanced Function Setting Level Alarm 1 Latch Heater 247 Overcurrent Hysteresis ee a va Parameter 290 Initialization HS Alarm Use 2 N N oo 0000 og oo00 HP 4 Multi SP Uses 290 Alarm 2 Latch HS Alarm Latch PF Setting 247 go 0000 N N R Alarm 3 Latch N N N SP Ramp Time Unit 220 HS Alarm i Monitor Setting 248 Hysteresis Item 1 go 0000 i Standby Sequence 221 Reset J Monitor Setting 248 Move to Protect 298 LBA Detection it 5 em Level Time a Time m oooo oF g p 000000 Ag F oo fF Input Error E Output LBA Level Auxiliary Output 599 Monitor Setting 1 Open in Alarm 248 Item 3 Fe oo 0000 g Ke Oo 0000 ooooo0 cy Hg Ed 00 0000 oo B 7 1 ea F pe a Cold Junction Compensation 22 Method MB Command Logic Switching Monitor Setting Item 4 LBA Band 1d pd P Auxiliary Output 2 Open in Al
172. ast three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the el Key Move to Ad vanced Function Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level 3 Use the Key to enter the password 169 It is possible to move to Paame the advanced function setting level by either pressing the kel Key or wait L INL Initialization ing two seconds without pressing any key On iy Oo Livy Control Output 4 Press the Ice Key to select the Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm Set 1 ON OFF Value parameter Count Alarm Set Value Control Output 5 Use the lA Key to set the parameter to 10 1 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value Initial Setting Level 6 Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the initial setting lev Input Type el 7 Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the operation level 4 21 Displaying PV SV Status 4 21 1 PV and SV Status Display Functions PV Status Display The PV in the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Display and the control and alarm Function status specified for the PV status display function are alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles Symbol Funston OFF pF No PV status display Manual MA MANU is alternately displayed during manual control Stop STOP is alternately displayed while
173. ate with the COM port of the personal computer To perform communications using USB Serial Conversion Cable set the communications port COM port number to be used for the software to the COM port assigned to the Cable 1 2 3 1 Turn ON the power to the Temperature Controller Note Ifthe Cable is connected when the power to the Temperature Con troller is OFF power will be supplied from the personal computer and impose a load on the internal circuits of the Temperature Con troller 2 Connect the Cable Connect the personal computer s USB port with the Support Software port on the Temperature Controller using the Cable 45 Using the Support Software Port Section 2 3 e Temperature Controller Connection Method E5CN CN U Personal computer s USB port Communications port for Support Software E58 CIFQ1 H I Bottom view of E5CN Communications port Communications port P for Support Software for Support Software Bottom view of E5AN Setup Tool port 1j ma E T E 7 i A A al j i 4 5 r oes
174. ater burnout detection Setting range Unt Default 0 116 50 0 E Related Parameters HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 223 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 ST must be ON and temperature ST Stable Range input standard control 2 PID control must be set e The setting of this parameter determines when ST operates This parameter cannot be used when ST is set to OFF Function Setting range Unit Default a 15 0 Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 PID ON OFF Page 204 ST Page 205 initial setting o level ALFER m ST must be OFF and 2 PID control Function T Setting See must be set e Normally use the default for this parameter e This parameter sets the 2 PID control a constant Setting range O Unit 0 00 to 1 00 0 65 E Related Parameters PID ON OFF Page 204 ST Page 205 initial setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 AE L AT Calculated Gain Control must be set to 2 PID control HE H AT Hysteresis LEMA Limit Cycle MV Amplitude e Normally use the default values for these parameters e The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain for when PID values are calculated using AT When emphasizing response decrease the set Function ize value When emphasizing stability increase the set value e The AT Hysteresis parameter sets the hysteresis for limit cycle operation during autotuning when switching ON and OFF
175. atic RT eiar Move to 254 Display Return F Overcurrent Calibration Level 254 Time c Latch Input Digital Filter NO NO O G ie Oo 0o00 oF co Ea lt O1 Additional PV MV at Stop and Display Ee Error Addition mi D oo 0000 J lt J B N Sz oo F Oi Zn Ea lt o iat 5 MV Display 00 0000 oo os M Oo 0000 m Or 7 7 a o0 0000 219 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 3 Parameter Initialization e This parameter returns all parameter settings to their defaults e After the initialization the set value automatically turns aF F Function Setting range Default oF Initialization is not executed ALE Initializes to the factory settings described in the manual Setting l The model must not support event MSP Multi SP Uses inputs or the number of multi SP uses must be 0 This parameter enables switching between set points O to 3 by operating the keys on the front panel Prerequisites Function e A model without event inputs e The Number of Multi SP Uses parameter set to 0 on a model with event inputs oi Set points 0 to 3 can be selected _ arr Se
176. atic and manual operation is possible for a max imum of one million times e Manual operation can be used only for PID control Note In balanceless bumpless operation the MV before switching is used initially after the switch and then gradually changed to achieve the proper value after switch to prevent radical changes in the MV after switching operation The overall manual operation is illustrated in the following figure MV Balanceless bumpless r rN r Time 0 A MV switched OFF ON Power in t terrupted Related Displays and Parameters Symbol teea J Remas PV MV Manual MV Manual Control Level 5 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control 105 0 to 105 0 See note 2 Auto Manual Switch A r Operation Level Switches between automatic and manual modes Auto Manual Select Addi AMAJ Advanced Function Setting Enables switching between automatic and man tion Level ual modes Note 1 Refer to 4 16 Output Adjustment Functions for information on the priority for the MV 2 For Manual MV Limit Enable this value will be between the MV upper limit and the MV lower limit 122 Performing Manual Control Section 4 13 Manual MV Limit When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON enabled the MV Enable limits will function and the setting range for the Manual MV parameter will be between the MV upper limit and the MV lower limit When the parameter is set to OFF disabled MV limits will no
177. ations and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our prac tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifica tions of the Product may be changed without any notice When in doubt spe cial part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please consult with your Omron s representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product Errors and Omissions Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions OMRON AUTOMATION amp SAFETY OMRON INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS Schaumburg IL USA 847 843 7900 800 556 6766 www omron24 7 com OMRON CANADA INC HEAD OFFICE OMRON ARGENTINA e SALES OFFICE Toronto ON Canada 416 286 6465 866 986 6766 www omron24 com Cono Sur 54 11 4783 5300 OMRON ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO HEAD OFFICE OMRON CHILE e SALES OFFICE M xico DF 52 55 59 01 43 00 001 800 556 6766 mela omron com Santiago 56 9 9917 3920 OMRON ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO SALES OFFICE OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES Apodaca N L e 52 81 11 56 99 20 e 001 800 556 6766 e mela omron com 54 11 4783 5300 OMRON ELETR NICA DO BRASIL LTDA
178. be set to a 2 point shift or the Input Type parameter must be set for an infrared sensor These parameters are used to shift the input temperature at two points an upper limit temperature and a lower limit temperature as opposed to the Temperature Input Shift parameter which shifts the input temperature by set ting the shift for only one point A 2 point shift enables more accurate offset of the input range compared with a 1 point shift if the input shift values at the upper and lower limits differ This parameter sets input shift values for the upper and lower limits 2 point shift of the input range Function Setting range Unit Default 199910909 Corr 00 Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 Input shift type advanced function setting level Page 233 187 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 pP Proportional Band The control must be set to 2 PID i control L Integral Time d Derivative Time 4 Function a Seiting See 188 These parameters set PID control constants PID constants are automatically set when AT or ST is executed P action Refers to control in which the MV is proportional to the deviation control error Refers to a control action that is proportional to the time integral of the deviation With proportional control there is normally an offset control error Proportional action is thus used in combination with integral action As time
179. be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Vii Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for yo
180. between the start and 1 2 and 3 and 4 and 5 and will measure the time only between 1 and 2 3 and 4 and 5 and the end If the wait band is set to OFF the wait band will be treated as infinity and the timer will measure time continuously after changing from RSET to STRT 131 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 4 15 2 Operation at the Program End Note Operating Procedure 132 Display at the Program End When the program ends the process value will be displayed on the No 1 dis play see note and the set point and end will be alternately displayed on the No 2 display at 0 5 s intervals One of the following displays PV SP PV only or PV MV Program End Output The output assignment parameters can be used to assign the program END output to any output The program END output can also be used in communi cations status E5CN CN U E5AN EN When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT for the E5CN E5CN U E5AN or E5EN the Auxiliary Output 1 Assign ment parameter will automatically be set to the END output When the Pro gram Pattern parameter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF the Alarm 1 Output Assignment parameter will automatically be initialized to ALM1 E5GN When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT for the E5GN the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter will auto matically be set to the END output When the
181. but the setting will be disabled e Loop burnouts are not detected during SP ramp operation e Loop burnouts are not detected during auto tuning manual operation or while stopped e If the alarm 1 latch is set to ON the latch will be effective for the loop burnout alarm Automatically Setting e The LBA detection time is automatically set by auto tuning the LBA Detection It is not set automatically however for heating cooling control Time e If the optimum LBA detection time is not obtained by auto tuning set the LBA Detection Time parameter advanced function setting level 119 Loop Burnout Alarm Determining the LBA Detection Time 1 2 3 1 3 LBA Level LBA Band Section 4 12 e To manually set the LBA detection time set the LBA Detection Time parameter to twice the LBA reference time given below Set the output to the maximum value Measure the time required for the width of change in the input to reach the LBA band Measurement time Temperature Tm py LBA band MV 100 Time LBA detection time Tm x 2 Set the LBA Detection Time parameter to two times the measured time e Set the control deviation when the control loop is working properly e The default is 8 0 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 10 00 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs e There is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation is
182. by Sequence Reset parameter advanced function setting level For details refer to the Standby Sequence Reset parameter in SECTION 5 Parameters 93 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs Section 4 3 4 2 2 Alarm Latch e The alarm latch can be used to keep the alarm output ON until the latch is canceled regardless of the temperature once the alarm output has turned ON Any of the following methods can be used to clear the alarm latch e Turn OFF the power supply The alarm latch is also cleared by switching to the initial setting level communications setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level e Use the PF Key e Use an event input For details on setting the PF Key refer to 4 19 Setting the PF Key For details on setting events refer to 4 5 Using Event Inputs Summary of Alarm The following figure summarizes the operation of alarms when the Alarm Type Operation parameter is set to lower limit alarm with standby sequence and close in alarm is set Alarm type Lower limit alarm with standby sequence E a a A Alarm value A Standby sequence canceled eee ON OFF ON closed OFF open Alarm Parameters Symbol Parameter level Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis Initial setting level Alarm Standby Sequence Advanced function setting level Alarm 4 3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs Note 4 3 1 Analog Input Scali Whe
183. by the E5CN U2LLI 2 auxiliary outputs E5AN E5EN LMUU 1 auxiliary output ESAN E5EN LJ3_ILILI 3 auxiliary out puts the E5CN LU17ULLIU 1 auxiliary output the E5CN LU2ULLIU 2 auxiliary outputs E5GN LI1LILIL 1 auxiliary output and E5GN 2L 2 auxiliary outputs Alarms can also be used by setting the Control Output 1 Assignment or Control Output 2 Assignment parameter to any of the alarms from alarm 1 to 3 The alarm output condition is determined by a combination of the alarm type alarm value alarm hysteresis and the standby sequence For details refer to 4 2 Alarm Hysteresis e This section describes the Alarm Type Alarm Value Upper limit Alarm and Lower limit Alarm parameters 3 9 1 Alarm Types Set value Alarm type Alarmoutput operation Alarmoutput operation operation Description of function When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative oOo Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm 1 See note Upper and lower limit L H See note 2 Set the deviation in the set A by 1 setting the alarm a limit H and alarm lower limit L Upper limit gt a oa Set the upward She in the set Orr M on by setting the alarm value 69 Alarm Outputs Dii Lower limit 4 See note 1 Upper and lower limit range Upper and lower limit with standby sequence Upper limit with standby sequence Lower limit with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit
184. calibration procedure 210 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 _ Transfer output type Doan ooo o e _ PV co oe ares T ma R MV monitor heating MV monitor cooling jme rq M IIN E Related Parameter See Transfer output upper limit Transfer output lower limit initial setting level a Page 212 211 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 LR H Transfer Output Upper Limit There must be a transfer output or a current output cR L Transfer Output Lower Limit ty output type must not be set to e This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of transfer outputs 4 Function Transfer output Setting range a type es __ Transfer output lower output upper limit limit Settin eee Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP lower limit SP upper limit EU Set point ee SP lower limit to SP upper limit ee ae Temperature Input setting range lower limit Input setting Input setting to input setting range upper range lower range upper limit limit limit ene Analog scaling lower limit to Scaling lower Scaling upper scaling upper limit limit limit MV monitor Standard 5 0 to 105 0 100 0 heating Heating 0 0 to 105 0 cooling MV monitor 0 0 to 105 0 cooling E Related Parameter See Transfer output type initial setting level Page 210 Control output 1 must be a current a I E Linear Current Output aup This parameter selects th
185. cannot be assigned to an event input 13 Changing Control Output and Auxiliary Output Settings Control output and auxiliary output assignments can be changed The items that can be changed depend on the Controller model For details re fer to 3 5 3 Assigned Output Functions Assigning a work bit to either a control output or to an auxiliary output is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned 14 Displaying Parameter Guides A description of the parameters can be displayed 15 Displaying the Work Bit Use Destinations Display a list of destinations where the work bits are used Operating Procedure This procedure uses event input 2 to change to RUN or STOP Event input 2 ON RUN Event input 2 OFF STOP Q Always OFF Always OFF Always OFF 1 Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo OSE VewMode preia e S enea S Om Ge a e tree and click the Start Button xl Channel Name Channel 1 Parame ter Name Logic Operation Editor CH1 Channel 1 Setting Range ESAN RY3BT N Edit Form 343 Control in Progress Parameters Protect Level Operation Level _ Adjustment Level _ Manual Control Level lac operacon zix 2 The Logic Operation Editor will be displayed Confirm Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation o
186. cel the pro tection applied by the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter In the default setting the advanced function setting level is protected and you cannot move to this setting level 1 2 3 1 Press the O and kel Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in op eration level Note The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter advanced function setting level Protect Level 2 The Controller moves to the protect level and the Operation Adjustment Operation Adjust Protect parameter is displayed ment Protect Initial Setting Press the kel Key once to move to the Initial Setting Communications Pro Communica tect parameter tions Protect 4 Set the set value to O 108 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Section 4 8 Operation Level 5 Press the O and cel Keys simultaneously for at least one second to re turn to the operation level 6 Move to the advanced function setting level Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 7 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press Move to Ad ing the el Key vanced Function Setting Level Advanced function setting level 8 Press the Key enter the password 169 and then either press the PL sieaetgeinieiian
187. code Suu Mannal AWAN Corporal ior ADF IY JAPAN Top of Controller Bottom of Controller Top of Controller Box Labels E5GN No ID number N6 has been added to identify the new mod els TYPE ESGN RTC TYPE ESGN RT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ee CONTROLLER WET FRANGE MULT 1 RANGE VOLTS 100 740 VAC 100 240 VAC LOT No xxxx QYT Ne LOT No wee CYT 1 OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA XX X Conventions Used in This Manual Model Notation The E5CN LILILI ESCN LILILWIU E5AN LILILI ESEN LILIL and ES5GN LILILJ are given as the E5CN E5CN U E5AN E5EN and E5GN when they share functionality The following notation is used when specifying differences in functionality E5UIN Two event inputs E5IN RS 485 communications E5N One of HB HS and heater overcurrent detection E5LIN Two of HB HS and heater overcurrent detection See note 1 E5UIN Control output 2 voltage output See note 1 E5UIN External power supply to ES1B See note 1 ES5SUN LILIL101 RS 232C communications See note 2 ES5SUN LLIF Transfer output See note 3 Note 1 Excluding the E5GN 2 Excluding the E5CN 3 The E5AN and E5EN only Meanings of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in parameter names figures and in text explanations These abbreviations mean the following Heater short See note 1 Engineering unit See note 2
188. contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document ii Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities iii Energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equip ment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations iv Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or prop erty Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Prod uct NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON S PRODUCT IS PROP ERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM Programmable Products Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable Product or any consequence thereof Performance Data Data presented in Omron Company websites catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitabil ity and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of Omron s test conditions and the user must correlate it to actual application require ments Actual performance is subject to the Omron s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Change in Specifications Product specific
189. coo Assignment note 1 note 1 ing Auxiliary Output 1 a 1 See note ii 1 See note zi 1 See note aii 1 See note Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 sar 2 See note Seer output coo Sa 2 cat 2 Assignment ing See note 3 Example E5GN Symbol Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Assignment heating heating Auxiliary Output 1 on 1 See note Control output coo Assignment ing Auxiliary Output 2 a 2 Alarm 2 Assignment Note 1 No parameter assignment is displayed because there is no control output 2 2 The output set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program END output unless the program pattern is OFF 3 For the ESAN EN the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is set for control output cooling the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is set for alarm 2 e The heating cooling operation of the control outputs will switch when the Direct Reverse Operation parameter is set to direct e When DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation is assigned for an Event Input Assignment 1 or 2 control will start with the contents set for the Direct Reverse Operation parameter inverted when the event input turns ON and with the contents left according to the setting when the event input turns OFF For details on event inputs and control combined with the Direct Reverse Operation parameter refer to Control by Inverting Direct Reverse Operation on page 103
190. ct Lovela ais wees Operation Level Adjustment Level Monitor Setting Item Level Manual Control Level Initial Setting Level Advanced Function Settings Level s 45 4 s aut aah aaentn weak eee na AE EEE Communications Setting Level SECTION 6 CALIBIRA TION aeaoe cha hae aead E 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 Parameter Structure User Calibration Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 20 0 0 0 Analog Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input 0 0 00 eee Checking Indication Accuracy 129 136 137 139 141 143 145 147 157 158 159 163 177 196 197 199 218 255 257 258 260 260 264 265 267 270 APPENA 3 5 55 ares ahaa aap ore ate arate ate arate a aa a AO EILE o EET tah hereto tata EEE E E tad E ave Gr L EE ETN E EE 309 Revision History 6406506660008 46se0sideseessiowse SIT XXXIV About this Manual This manual describes the ES5CN CN U AN EN Digital Temperature Controllers and includes the sec tions described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to set up or operate an ESCN CN U AN EN Digital Temperature Controller e Over
191. cting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT installation po sitions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so be take that into account when setting the detection current Load such as a heater AC line Product To CT input Product To CT input 3 V connecting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT installation posi tions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so be take that into account when setting the detection current Product To CT input AC line Product To CT input 3 10 3 Calculating Detection Current Values e Calculate the set value using the following equation Normal current value Burnout current value 2 Heater Burnout Detection 1 2 set value Leakage current value output OFF HS current value 2 HS Alarm 1 2 set value Normal current value Overcurrent value 2 e To set the current for heater burnout when two or more heaters are con nected through the CT use the value from when the heater with the small est current burns out If all of the heaters have the same current use the value from when any one of them burns out Heater overcurrent 1 2 set value 75 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 e Make sure that the following conditions are satisfied Heater with a current of less than 10 0 A Current value at normal operation Current value at heater burnout
192. cuit failure is likely to occur If the output remains shorted fire will occur due to overheating of the heater or other cause Take measures in the overall system to prevent excessive temper ature increase and to prevent fire from spreading When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case confirm that the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the case If the body of the Temperature Controller is not inserted properly faulty contact in the terminal section or reduced water resistance may occasionally result in fire or mal function 3 The tightening torque is 0 5 N m for the ESCN U and 0 43 to 0 58 N m for the E5GN The terminal torque is 0 5 to 0 6 N m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN X Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent operation failure malfunction or adverse affects on the performance and functions of the product Not doing so may occasionally result in unexpected events Use the product within the specifications 1 The product is designed for indoor use only Do not use the product outdoors or in any of the following locations Do not use or store the product in any of the following locations e Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment e Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere e Places subject to direct sunlight e Places subject to dust or corrosive gas in particular sulfide gas and ammonia gas
193. d band 97 189 setting 98 HS alarm 13 73 276 310 settings 82 HS Alarm error display 283 hysteresis 60 62 I O configuration 6 basic model ESAN 9 ESCN 6 ESCN U 7 ESEN 9 ESGN 11 main functions 12 indication accuracy 270 indicators explanation 4 operation 4 infrared temperature sensor 270 initial setting level 17 199 parameter operation list 291 initial setting communications protect 110 initial settings 50 examples 50 51 initialization 220 Input Error error display 281 input sensor types 12 200 input shift 89 one point shift 89 two point shift 90 calculating 90 input types 52 303 default values 200 list 53 setting 52 inputs wiring 36 installation 22 25 ESAN ESEN mounting the terminal cover 26 mounting to the panel 26 ESCN ESCN U mounting the terminal cover 26 mounting to the panel 25 ESGN mounting to the panel 27 panel cutout ESAN 24 ESCN 24 ESCN U 24 ESEN 24 ESGN 25 removing from case ESAN 29 ESCN 28 ESEN 29 removing the terminal block ESGN 30 integral time 68 188 K keys down key 5 key operations 15 level key 5 mode key 5 operations 5 up key 5 L LBA loop burnout alarm 118 band 119 detection time 119 120 level 119 120 level key 5 loop burnout alarm LBA 118 M main functions 12 manual control 103 122 manual control level 16 moving to 123 parameter operation list 294 manual se
194. d heater overcurrent latches are cancelled 3 For details on auto manual operations using the PF Key refer to 4 73 Per forming Manual Control E Related Parameters See Monitor setting item 1 to 5 advanced function setting level Page 248 OC Ix k ks The PF Setting parameter must be Prd Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 set to PEDP e Set the PF Key parameter to Monitor Setting Item to enable using the function key to display monitor setting items The items that will be dis played are set using the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters The set Function tings are listed in the following table Set value O Remas SS S a Monitor Setting Symbol o Daa sM aooo vemm cames 2 PVISPIMV See note Canbest SP J B PVISP Soaktime remain Canbe st SP a Preperenat bande fones P fntegraltime Canses i Derivatvetime 0 Canbest a Alarmvauet canbest r Eo n rat Can be set O o o Alarm value ower imti _ Canbeset a ao mamvawe2 Canses ae mo Alarm value upporimt2 Canbest an 2 Mamvaue lower imt2 Canbest ee s hamvas Cenbest pa a Marmvale upporimit3 Canbest am 15 Mamvale ower imta Canbeset P3 Note The MV for heating and cooling control is set in the MV Display Selection parameter E Related Parameters See PF setting Page 247 MV display selection Page 249 advanced function set ting level 248 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 5
195. d or Heating Cooling Initial Setting Level 3 Press the Al Key to set the parameter to H Note The following output assignments do not need to be set because they are set automatically by changing the control mode but they are shown here as a reference for checking the assignments for each out put 57 Setting Output Specifications Chiat Z 97 Move to Ad tty vanced Function r Setting Level LI C On Advanced Function Setting Level Parameter Initialization Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment 11 13 14 15 Section 3 5 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the el Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level Select the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter by pressing the ce Key Press the Al or I Key to set a The default is a Select the Control Output 2 Assignment parameter by pressing the kel Key Press the A or Key to set L a When 4 7 is selected for the Standard or Heating Cooling parame
196. d other settings is done using parameter displays The O and ce Keys are used to switch between parameters and the amount of time that you press the keys determines which parameter you move to This section describes two typical examples Changing Parameters A _limage means that there are parameters Continue pressing the ce key to change parameters until you reach the intended parameter Changing Numbers IT Numeric data and selections in each A screen can be changed by using the A and keys Oo oodo Setup Procedure An S E RR error will be Operation displayed if Level the power supply is turned ON before the sensor is connected Initial Setting Level Control stops Press the O key for at least 3 s Initial Setting Level Check input type Input Type 5 specifications Set control Check that ON OFF ts control method is control E ON OFF control PID Dd control Check alarm type Alarm 1 Type Set alarm type Press the O key for at least 1 s Control starts Operation Level Use the IA and keys to set the g SP to 100 C Confirm that unning Operation control is running Stopped 5 P Level U
197. de Power supply e With the E5CN connect to terminals 9 and 10 with the ESCN U connect to pins 10 and 11 with the E5AN E5EN and E5GN connect pins 1 and 2 The following table shows the specifications Input power supply E5CN E5CN U ESAN EN E5GN 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 7 5 VA 10 VA 5 5 VA 24 VAC 50 60 Ha 55VA 24 VDC no polari e These models have reinforced insulation between the input power supply the relay outputs and other terminals 35 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Input e Make the connections according to the input type as shown below using terminals 3 to 5 for the E5CN pins 1 to 3 for the ESCN U pins 18 to 20 for the E5AN or E5EN and pins 10 to 12 for the E5GN 3 o 2 3 o b On g m er Oe 5 O Platinum resistance thermometer E5CN aa Pont AA Oh Or O ORE 204 20 eoa Platinum resistance thermometer E5AN EN Thermocouple Analog input Thermocouple Analog input Do not Do not Do not lt _ au we mA lt V Do not use Platinum resistance Thermocouple inonnomelst Analog input E5CN U o T mA Om ise ara 1 a i Do not pe Ps __ Do not use use Platinum resistance thermometer E5GN Thermocouple Analog input When extending the thermocouple lead wires be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple type When extending the lead wires of a platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use
198. e Key 3 Use the Al Key to set the parameter to STOP 4 Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level 5 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Adjustment Level Display 6 Select the Soak Time parameter by pressing the cel Key Soak Time 7 Use the lAl Key to set the parameter to 10 The soak time unit is set in Soak Time Unit parameter in the advanced function setting level The de fault is minutes 133 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 Adjustment Level 8 Select the Wait Band parameter by pressing the Ice Key Wait Band 9 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 3 0 10 Press the O Key to move from the adjustment level to the operation level PV SP 134 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 4 15 3 Application Example Using a Simple Program The program will be started by changing the setting of the Program Start parameter The following example shows using a simple program with the pro gram pattern set to STOP Si OI Pa ec set cee etree ___ Wait band Soak time END display END output Program start SS E q oe oe a O e The Program Start p
199. e ON OFF counter exceeds the value set for this parameter e It is possible to assign ON OFF count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen e This function is disabled when the set value is 0 Setting range Ume 0 to 9999 100 times E Related Parameters Control output 2 ON OFF count monitor advanced function setting level Page 252 253 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 RAL Control outputs 1 and 2 must be sup ON OFF Counter Reset ee Relay or voltage outputs for driving SSR must be used e This parameter resets the ON OFF counter for specified control outputs Function a 0 Disable the counter reset function 1 Reset the control output 1 ON OFF counter Setting 2 Reset the control output 2 ON OFF counter Note After the counter has been reset the set value will be automatically returned to O E Related Parameters See Control output 1 ON OFF count monitor Control output 2 ON OFF count mon 4 itor advanced function setting level Page 252 LMav Move to Calibration Level haa a i a Function See 254 This parameter sets the password to move to the calibration level e Set the password to move to the calibration level The password is 1201 e Move to the calibration level either by pressing the el Key or O Key or by waiting for two seconds to elapse E Related Parameter Initial setting communications protect protect level Page
200. e PV SP Display Screen Parameter Is Set to 2 Operation Level PV SP Display 1 Press the PV SP P Display 2 key co Ir PV SP MV PV SP Multi SP Select either the manipulated variable heating or manipulated variable cool ing as the MV to be displayed for PV SP MV during heating and cooling con trol The MV Display Selection parameter is displayed only when heating cooling control is being performed and PV SP MV is selected in the PV SP Display Screen parameter or a Monitor Setting Item Display parameter Symbol Display contents MV Display Selection Manipulated variable heating C O Manipulated variable cooling Setting the No 3 Display Section 3 11 Operating Procedure This procedure displays PV SP MV and PV SP Multi SP on the Process Value Set Point display The PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter is set to 2 Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation r PV SP level to the initial setting level La E OC On CILI Initial Setting Level 2 Press the kel Key to select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level S l Input Type parameter LINT CI OC On m Initial Setting Level 3 Use the Key to enter the password 169 Wioveio It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by either Advanced pressing the kel Key or waiting two seconds without pressing any key Function Setting Level Advanced Func
201. e and move to the manual control level During manual operation it is not possible to move to any displays other than PV MV Manual MV Press the PF Key for at least one second from the PV MV display in the manual control mode to change the mode to automatic mode move to the operation level and display the top parameter in the operation level e When MANU Auto Manual is selected for an event input the Auto Man ual Switch parameter is not displayed In that case switching between auto and manual mode is executed by using an event input Auto Manual Select e The Auto Manual Select Addition parameter must be set to ON in the Addition advanced function setting level before it is possible to move to manual mode The default is OFF Note 1 Priority of Manual MV and Other Functions Even when operation is stopped the manual MV is given priority Auto tuning and self tuning will stop when manual mode is entered 2 Manual MV and SP Ramp If operating the SP ramp function will continue even when manual mode is entered Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to set the manipulated variable in manual mode Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Press the cel Key to select PID ON OFF and then select PID with the A Key 3 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press Move to Ad
202. e eae ee core set value SP ramp time unit s min SP before change Time Point of change The rate of change during SP ramp is specified using the SP Ramp Set Value and SP Ramp Time Unit parameters The SP Ramp Set Value parameter is set to OFF by default i e the SP ramp function is disabled Changes in the ramp set point can be monitored in the Set Point During SP Ramp parameter operation level Use this parameter when monitoring SP ramp operation The SP ramp function operates in the same way when switching the set point using the multi SP function Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate Section 4 7 Parameters Symbol Parameter level Cc al Cc al a AJ a fae J J i Z 1 r Lim Operation at Startup Restrictions during SP Ramp Operation MV Upper Limit Adjustment level To limit the manipulated variable MV Lower Limit Adjustment level To limit the manipulated variable Set Point Upper Limit Initial setting level To limit the SP setting Set Point Lower Limit Initial setting level To limit the SP setting SP Ramp Set Value Adjustment level To limit the SP rate of change SP Ramp Time Unit Advanced function setting level Unit for setting the SP Alarm SP Selection Advanced function setting level Alarm SP selection If the SP ramp function is enabled when the Controller is turned ON or when switching from ST
203. e electronic components to touch the case Always turn OFF the power supply before removing the terminal block from the E5GN and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with Use standard grade alcohol Design system control panel etc considering the 2 second of delay that the controller s output to be set after power ON The output may turn OFF when shifting to certain levels Take this into consideration when performing control The number of EEPROM write operations is limited Therefore use RAM write mode when frequently overwriting data during communications or other operations Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the Digital Temperature Controller to discharge static electricity from your body Do not remove the terminal block from the E5CN E5AN or E5EN Doing so may result in failure or malfunction Control outputs that are voltage outputs are not isolated from the internal circuits When using a grounded thermocouple do not connect any of the control output terminals to ground Doing so may result in an unwanted circuit path causing error in the measured temperature When replacing the body of the E5CN E5AN or E5EN check the condition of the terminals If corroded terminals are used contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the E5CN E5AN or E5EN to increase possibly resulting in fire If the
204. e is 0 or when the control Function output is a linear output Monitorrange Unit O to 9999 100 times Monitor Control output 2 must be supported Relay or voltage outputs for driving RAZM Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Monitor must be used The Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter must not be set to 0 e This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 2 is ii turned ON and OFF e This function is not displayed when the set value is 0 or when the control Function output is a linear output O to 9999 100 times Monitor Section 5 8 Advanced Function Setting Level WA i Function a Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm ate wal ii nahia elay or voltage outputs for driving Set Value SSR must be used e An ON OFF count alarm occurs when the ON OFF counter exceeds the value set for this parameter e It is possible to assign ON OFF count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen e This function is disabled when the set value is O Setting range Ume O to 9999 100 times Monitor E Related Parameters See Control output 1 ON OFF count monitor advanced function setting level Page 252 pga Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Alarm C0ntol output 2 must be supported Function m Monitor See Relay or voltage outputs for driving Set Value SSR must be used e An ON OFF count alarm occurs when th
205. e local switch of the E5UJ e The setting indicated by the shaded cell indicates the default same logic as E5 lJ Set Text data of MB command a 0000 o OFF Communications writing enabled Communications writing disabled remote mode selection local mode selection ON Communications writing disabled Communications writing enabled local mode selection remote mode selection Terms in parentheses are the terms used on the E5 JJ E Related Parameters Communications writing adjustment level Page 180 Protocol setting communications setting level Page 255 229 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Function Setting 230 PV Change Color Use the PV color change function to change the color of the PV display No 1 display There are three display colors orange red and green and you can select from the following three modes and eight types e Constant This mode displays orange red or green all the time e Linked to Alarm 1 This mode switches the PV display color from red to green when alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when alarm 1 turns ON e Linked to PV stable band This mode switches the PV display color between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable band or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV stable band Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter in the advanced function setting level e The default is Fd
206. e output type for linear current outputs _ Linear current output Setting L ctl 4 to 20 mA i L 0 to 20 mA Note Even when control output 1 is used as a control output or a simple transfer output O to 20 mA can be used E Related Parameter See Transfer output type initial setting level Page 210 212 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 EY mM Number of Multi SP Uses An event input must be assigned e Multi SP is a function for setting set points O to 3 in advance and switch ee ing between these set points using a combination of event input ON OFF signals Function e The Number of Multi SP Uses parameter is used to switch between using two and four preset set points _ Setting range Default e Whether the Event Input Assignments 1 and 2 parameters are displayed or hidden is determined by the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter set ting Setting Models with Two Event Inputs 1 and 2 Event input assignment 1 Event input assignment 2 Description of EV1 and EV2 operation Number of multi Displayed Multi SP not used EV1 and EV2 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 1 and 2 parameters Not displayed Operation per Displayed Event input 2 not EV1 will be used for the Multi formed with two Multi SP used as multi SP switch SP function to switch between points set points 0 and 1 EV2 will per form the operation command assigned using the Event Input
207. ear set point e g 110 C YL Set temperature lower limit e g 0 C Figure 3 Illustration of 2 Point Shift a Lower limit temperature input shift value ae YL Y1 ey E CNSL g x X2 Y2 X1 Y1 X1 Y1 b Upper limit temperature input shift value YH Y1 Y2 Y1 ZME Lt LINGI x X2 Y2 X1 Y1 X1 Y1 3 After setting the calculated values to N5L and NSH check the Controller readout A and thermometer temperature B 4 Here offsets are set at two points near room temperature and near the set point To improve accuracy within the measurement temperature range another point in the measurement temperature range other than the set point should be set instead of room temperature 92 Alarm Hysteresis Section 4 2 Example of a 2 point In this example we use the ES1B K 0 to 260 C specification In equations 1 Temperature Input and 2 the set temperature lower limit YL is 0 C and the set temperature upper Shift limit YH is 260 C Check the temperature of the control target The temperature input offset values can be calculated as shown below when the Controller readout Y1 is 40 C for a room temperature X1 of 25 C and when the Controller readout Y2 is 105 C for a set point temperature X2 of 110 C Lower limit Temperature Input Shift Value E MIC m aN o9 0 40 LI IL temperature CNIL 110 1 25 4 25 40 27 3 Se aut hill fae Tong Ne a eee
208. east 1 s See Press the O Key for at least 3 s Display will flash after 1st second Control Level Press the note 1 O Key for at least 1 s Note The time taken to move z l to the protect level can iti i ommunica be adjusted by chang Control stops ae elle lt gt tions Setting ing the Move to ee Press the Level tect level time setting O Key for less than 1 s Refer to page 228 Input password while HMav is displayed Set Press the O Key for at least 1 s value 169 Advanced Function Setting Level Input password CO Control in progress D Control stopped Calibration Level See __ Not displayed for some models note 2 lt Level change Note 1 You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset 2 You cannot move to other levels by operating the keys on the front panel from the calibration level You must turn OFF the power supply 3 From the manual control level key operations can be used to move to the operation level only Protectlewel Sanese Operation eanes o ooo Adjustmentlevel Canes SS Manual controli Canes Monitor settingtemievel Canes nti setting evel o oane O 15 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1 3 Protect Level Operation Level Adjustment Level Monitor Setting Item Level Manual Control Level
209. east one second to move to the operation level If the Alarm 1 status is ON PV and ALM 1 will be alternately displayed 4 22 Logic Operations 4 22 1 The Logic Operation Function CX Thermo e The logic operation function logically calculates as 1 or O the Controller status alarms SP ramp RUN STOP auto manual etc and the external event input status and outputs the results to work bits The work bit status can be output to auxiliary or control outputs and operating status can be switched according to the work bit status Work bit logic operation can be set from 1 to 8 Set them to No operation Always OFF the default when the work bits are not to be used When logic operations are being used a dot will be displayed on the No 2 dis play of the adjustment level display Adjustment Level 147 Logic Operations Section 4 22 4 22 2 Using Logic Operations Logic operations are set using the CX Thermo Starting Logic There are two ways to start logic operations Operations e Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo tree and click the Start Button CX Thermo Untitled File Edit View Communications TrendMonitor Options Help O LA ER E View Mode Advanced Level T a fale EE A kaal Ce Le oe mt R xj Channel Name Channel 1 E er eee CH1 Channel 1 Setting Range j ESAN RY3BT N Control in Progress Parameters H Protect Level
210. eater overcurrent are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less m Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e f a heater burnout detection 2 or heater overcurrent detection 2 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the heater cur rent 2 value monitor will flash E Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1 Heater burnout detection 2 adjustment level a Pages 181 and 183 HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Error Displays L 7 Page 283 169 Operation Level Section 5 3 gt Function G Monitor See Leakage Current 1 Monitor Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits The heater current is measured and the leakage current 1 monitor is dis played e HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Monitor range Unt 0 0 to 55 0 e If an HS alarm 1 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash E Related Parameters HS al
211. eating control or cooling con trol Reverse operation Hysteresis heating Set point e In heating cooling control a dead band an area where both control out puts are 0 can be set to either the heating or cooling side This makes it possible to use 3 position control Reverse operation Dead band Hysteresis heating Hysteresis cooling ON Heating Cooling side side OFF PV A Set point Using ON OFF Control Section 3 7 Parameters Symbol Parameter level Application Standard or Heating Cooling Initial setting level Specifying control method PID ON OFF Initial setting level Specifying control method Direct Reverse Operation Initial setting level Specifying control method Dead Band Adjustment level Heating cooling control Hysteresis Heating Adjustment level ON OFF control Hysteresis Cooling Adjustment level ON OFF control 3 7 2 Settings To execute ON OFF control set the Set Point PID ON OFF and Hysteresis parameters Setting the PID ON OFF Parameter Operating Procedure Confirm that the PID ON OFF parameter is set to aNaF in the initial setting level Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 The Input Type parameter is displayed in the initial setting level Input Type PID ON OFF 3 Select the PID ON OFF parameter by pressing the Ee Key 4 Check that the
212. ed SSS a PV SP Multi SP and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order 6 PV SP MV and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order Only PV SP Soak time remain are displayed A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized When 1 2 5 or 6 is selected press the Ice Key to display PV SP Display 2 Example When the PV SP Display Screen Selection Parameter Is Set to 2 Operation Level PV SP Display 1 PV SP Display 2 Press the key PV SP MV PV SP Multi SP E Related Parameters Input type Page 200 Set point upper limit Set point lower limit Page 203 ini tial setting level PV SP display screen selection advanced function setting level Page 249 R M Operation See 166 The Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 parameters must not be set to Auto Manual and the Auto Manual Select Auto Manual Switch Addition parameter must be set to ON The control must be set to 2 PID control e This parameter switches the Controller between automatic and manual modes e If the O Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds when the Auto Manual Switch parameter is displayed the manual mode will be entered and the manual control level will be displayed e This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to MANU auto manual E Related Parameters PID ON OFF initial setting level Page 204 Auto manual select
213. ed by changing the settings for con trol and auxiliary output assignments e The default function assignments for each output are shown below Symbol Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment adet Control output heating Control Output 2 Assignment ake Not assigned Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment E5AN EN only e Refer to pages 240 to 242 for the functions that can be assigned to the outputs e Each output is automatically initialized as shown below by changing the control mode Example E5CN Parameter name Symbol Without control output 2 With control output 2 Standard Heating cooling Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment heating heating heating heating Control Output 2 Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Control output Assignment See note 1 See note 1 cooling Auxiliary Output 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Assignment See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 Control output Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment See note 3 cooling See note 3 56 Setting Output Specifications Section 3 5 Example E5GN Symbol Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Assignment heating heating Auxiliary Output 1 Alarm 1 Control output Assignment See note 2 cooling Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment Note 1 There is no control output 2 and no parame
214. ed for alarm 1 turns ON for input errors Note For details on input errors refer to Error Displays on page 281 e The alarm 1 output is an OR output of alarm 1 HB alarm HS alarm heater overcurrent alarm and input error e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Setting range Domn aN Enabled aF F Disabled Cold Junction Compensation Method Input type must be thermocouple or infrared temperature sensor e This parameter specifies whether cold junction compensation is to be per formed internally by the Controller or to be performed externally when the input type setting is 5 to 22 24 or 25 canon e The cold junction compensation external setting is enabled when the tem perature difference is measured using two thermocouples or two ES1B Sensors oo Settingrange Derat _ oN Internally a F Externally Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 l l l Communications must be supported RLRY MB Command Logic Switching CompoWay F must be selected as Function Setting See the protocol e This parameter switches the logic of the MB command communications writing switch for the SYSWAY communications protocol e The MB command communications writing switch is the equivalent of the MB command remot
215. el The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed Moves to Ad vanced Function Setting Level Heater Burnout 4 Select the Heater Burnout Detection parameter by pressing the kel Key Detection Check that this parameter is set to ON the default Next set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter m Setting Heater Burnout Detection 5 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level Press the O key again for at least one second to move to the operation level PV SP 6 Press the O Key for less than one second to move from the operation Adjustment Level level to the adjustment level Display Heater Current 7 Select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter by pressing the kel 1 Value Monitor Key Check the current value Next set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter Heater Burnout 8 Select the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter by pressing the ce Key Detection 1 Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values on page 75 on when mak ing the settings 80 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 9 For this example set 2 5 To return to the operation level press the LO Key for less than one second 3 10 6 Settings Heater Short Alarm To activate the
216. el Display Temperature 2 Select the Temperature Input Shift parameter by pressing the cel Key Input Shift 3 Press the A or Key to set 1 0 Operation Level 4 To return to the operation level press the O Key The process value is 1 C larger than before the shift was applied 89 Shifting Input Values Two point shift Upper limit Temperature Input Shift Value Lower limit Input Shift Value Section 4 1 e Separate shift values can be set for the upper limit and lower limit of the sensor input range for an infrared sensor as well as for a thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer with the Input Shift Type parameter set to INS2 If different shift values are set for the upper limit and lower limit then the slope of the line will be different before and after applying the input shift For example if the upper limit value is set to 2 C and the lower limit value is set to 1 C the input temperature will be shifted by 1 5 C for a 50 input i e by the average of the upper limit and lower limit values e Set the upper limit value in the Upper limit Temperature Input Shift Value parameter and the lower limit value in the Lower limit Temperature Input Shift Value parameter Upper limit temperature Temperature input shift value Upper limit F After shifting Before shifting Lower limit Input Lower limit temperature 4
217. elect the LBA Level parameter by pressing the ce Key 9 Press the IA Key to set the parameter to 8 0 The default is 8 0 10 Select the LBA Band parameter by pressing the kel Key 11 Press the A or Key to set the parameter to 3 0 The default is 3 0 12 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced Input Type function setting level to the initial setting level 13 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting PV SP level to the operation level 121 Performing Manual Control Section 4 13 4 13 Performing Manual Control 4 13 1 Manual Operation e The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode if the PV MV param eter is displayed in the manual control level The final MV used in auto matic mode will be used as the initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode In manual mode the change value will be saved immediately and reflected in the actual MV e The automatic display return function will not operate in manual mode e Balanceless bumpless operation will be performed for the MV when switching from manual operation to automatic operation See note e If a power interruption occurs during manual operation manual operation will be restarted when power is restored using the same MV as when power was interrupted e Switching between autom
218. ely the Products by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies Omron Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyers purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with or in addition to these Terms Prices Payment Terms All prices stated are current subject to change with out notice by Omron Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice Discounts Cash discounts if any will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges taxes and duties and will be allowed only if i the invoice is paid according to Omron s payment terms and ii Buyer has no past due amounts Interest Omron at its option may charge Buyer 1 1 2 interest per month or the maximum legal rate whichever is less on any balance not paid within the stated terms Orders Omron will accept no order less than 200 net billing Governmental Approvals Buyer shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs involved in obtaining any government approvals required for the impor tation or sale of the Products Taxes All taxes duties and other governmental charges other than general real property and income taxes including any interest or penalties thereon imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirec
219. ent alarm is output when the heater current exceeds the value set for this parameter e When the set value is 50 0 the heater overcurrent alarm is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the heater overcurrent alarm is turned turn ON Setting range Unit Defaut 0 0 to 50 0 50 0 E Related Parameters Heater current 2 value monitor adjustment level Page 180 Heater overcurrent use Heater overcurrent latch Heater overcurrent hystere sis advanced function setting level Page 222 183 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be LERI Leakage Current 1 Monitor EA ET The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current when the heater is OFF e HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less a Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 gt Function Monitor See errrr is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e If an HS alarm 1 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash E Related Parameters See HS alarm 1 HS alarm 2 adjustment level Page 184 a HS alarm use advanced function setting level Page 235 Error Displays Lif i Page 283 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be HS
220. ent note 7 note 7 Auxiliary Output See See 2 Assignment note 6 note 6 Auxiliary Output See See 3 Assignment note 6 note 6 Event Input See See Assignment 1 note 8 o Event Input See oo Assignment 2 note 8 00 Related param eter initializa tion execution condition Wa Appendix Changed Scaling Stan Pro parameter Lower dard or gram Related initial Limit imi Heat Pattern ized parame Scaling ing ters Upper Cooling Limit Related param eter initializa tion execution condition Move to Protect Level MV Display Selection Temperature Input Shift Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift DeadBand j t e de de e e a e tere PP PoP oP PP Heating om ff a a a a a a a Cooling O eee ee e ee e Al 1to3 frees a A a A A D A M ST Stable fee a a a a a a a a E rt 3 Weatetad f EEE m e a ee ee ee E teapa e a ee e a a e e Note 1 initialized to input setting range upper and lower limits or scaling upper and lower limits 2 Clamped by SP upper and lower limits 3 Initialized only when the input type is changed to analog input when RT turns ON The defaults are as follows RT OFF Proportional band 8 0 Integral time 233 Derivative time 40 4 Initialization is performed as shown below according to the transfer output type setting The initial ization differs depending on the changed
221. er HB alarm HS alarm Heater overcurrent output output alarm output oo indicator Yes Normal Seene 1 OFF SS SS No ah note 2 Re ora See rote 2 _ OFF Normat overcurrent status See note 3 Ton Toff See note 4 g See note 5 ON Control output heating OFF Note 1 In the above diagram power is considered to be ON normal if the heater current is greater than the heater burnout detection current during the Ton interval If the heater is burned out the measured current decreases and falls below the heater burnout detection value The output is then activat ed as the heater burnout alarm 2 In the above diagram power is considered to be OFF normal if the leak age current is less than the HS alarm current during the Toff interval If the SSR output is short circuited the measured current increases be yond the HS alarm value The output is then activated as the HS alarm 3 In the above diagram it is regarded as normal when the heater current is less than the heater overcurrent detection current during the Ton period Current is increased when excessive current flows to the heater causing the heater overcurrent detection value to be exceeded and an OC heater overcurrent alarm to be output 4 Heater burnout and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control out put heating ON time Ton is 100 ms or less 5 HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time Tof
222. er supply 2 Connect a precision resistance box called a 6 dial in this manual to the platinum resistance thermometer input terminals as shown in the follow ing diagram r gt 9 Input power supply ____ Q Input power supply o2 re Input power supply Lr 3 Turn the power ON 4 Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed 5 Execute calibration for the main input Press the ce Key to display the count value for each input type rion IIL The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in o Ean hexadecimal Set the 6 dial as follows IJ oe ee e Input type O 390 Q APULNPES i 2 dra e Input type 1 2 30r4 280 Q2 TI I Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the I peony be S Key to temporarily register the calibration settings So ECAD If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 264 Analog Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 5 Input type O Press the kel Key to display the count value for each input type The No 2 di
223. eration as function key prohibited e The default is OFF 4 9 2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level e Protect level can be moved to only by display the password display and entering the correct password The user can set any password in the Protect Level Password parameter If no password is set i e if the pass word is set to 0O in the Protect Level Password parameter the password input display to move to protect level will not be displayed and the protect level can be moved to directly Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to move to protect level E Example with a Password of 1234 Operation Level PV SP 1 Press the O and Ice Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the Moreto Protect Move to Protect Level Time parameter to move from the operation level Level to the protect level 2 Press the Al Key to set the parameter to 1234 password input 3 Move to the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter by pressing the O or kel Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds Operation Adjust ment Protect E Example with No Password Set PV SP Press the O and kel Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the Operation Adjust Operation Adjustment Protect parameter to move from the operation level to ment Protect the protect level When a password is not set the Operatio
224. ermocouples to 0 C Make sure that internal thermocouples are dis abled i e that tips are open e In the above figure STV indicates a standard DC current voltage source e Use the compensating conductor designed for the selected thermocou ple When thermocouples R S E B W or PLII or an infrared temperature sensor is used the cold junction compensator and the compensating con ductor can be substituted with the cold junction compensator and the compensating conductor for thermocouple K E Connecting the Cold Junction Compensator Correct process values cannot be obtained if you touch the contact ends of the compensating conductor during calibration of a thermocouple Accord ingly short circuit enable or open disable the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator as shown in the figure below to create a con tact or non contact state for the cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Short circuit ES E5CN E5CN U E5CN U E5AN E5AN E5EN E5EN E5GN Compensating conductor E5GN Compensating conductor 261 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 3 In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with a Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input with thermocouple infrared temper ature sensor set as the input type 1 2 3 1 2 Input types 6 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
225. ess the O Keys for at least 3 s See note Protect Level Control in Progress To move from the operation level to the protect level press O and cel Keys for three seconds see note or more Note The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the Move to Protect Level Time parameter setting Protect Level Page 160 Operation Adjustment Initial Setting Communications Protect Setting Change Protect PF Key Protect Parameter Mask Enable assword to Move to rotect Level k R N l Parameters that are protected will not be displayed and their settings cannot be changed 159 Protect Level Section 5 2 The Password to Move to Protect ae Move to Protect Level Level password must not be set to 0 The password to move to the protect level is entered for this parameter e The password to move to the protect level i e the password set for the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter is entered for this parame ter gt PARION e The Operation Adjustment Protect parameter will be displayed if the cor rect password is entered E Related Parameters See Password to move to protect level protect level Page 162 oHPE Operation Adjustment Protect LLPE Initial Setting Communications Protect These parameters specify the range of parameters
226. et Point Lower Limit parameter the set point will automatically be change to a value within the set Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values Section 4 6 range The upper and lower limit values of the set point limiter are set using the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parameters in the initial setting level When the set point limiter is reset the set point is forcibly changed to the upper or lower limit value of the set point limiter if the set point is out of the limiter range Also when the input type and the temperature unit scaling upper limit value or lower limit value are changed the set point limiter is forcibly reset to the input setting range or the scaling upper or lower limit value Input setting range Set point limiter Y Setting range vor h er Set point A BS Upper limit O x Cannot be set value changed Upper limit value changed V A Set point C Input type changed _ CC NCS Set point A Set value Y Upper lower limit values B V Sensor upper lower limit values O Can be set Symbol Parameter level Parameters Set Point Upper Limit Initial setting level To limit the SP setting Set Point Lower Limit Initial setting level To limit the SP setting 4 6 2 Setting Set the set point upper and lower limits in the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parameters in the initial setting level In this example it is assumed that the input type is set to a K
227. et the STV to 6 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the I Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the lAl Key The No 2 display changes to 4E5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the el Key This stores the temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE PROM press the cel Key while Va is displayed in the No 2 display with out pressing the Al Key The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input Section 6 6 6 6 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input 6 6 1 Calibrating a Current Input In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with an Analog Input with a current input set as the input type 1 2 3 1 2 Connect the power supply Connect an STV and DMM to the current input terminals as shown in the following diagram ES5CN E5AN EN Input power supply Input power supply E5CN U ES5GN Input power supply Input power supply Turn the power ON
228. etection parameter Heater 8 Press the ke Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter Overcurrent Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values on page 75 when setting 9 For this example set 20 0 To return to the operation level press the O Key for less than one second 83 Setting the No 3 Display Section 3 11 3 11 Setting the No 3 Display This section describes how to set the No 3 Display E5AN EN The Multi SP MV or soak time remain can be displayed on the No 3 display 3 11 1 PV SP Display Selection Note MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control 84 The following table shows the set values and display contents for the PV SP Display selection Display contents 0 Only PV SP is displayed with no No 3 display PV SP Multi SP and PV SP MV are displayed in order See note PV SP MV and PV SP Multi SP are displayed in order See note 2 a PV SP MV and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order See note Only PV SP Soak time remain is displayed e A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory set value 0 A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized set value 4 For details on setting the MV for heating and cooling control refer to MV Dis play for Heating and Cooling Control below When 1 2 5 or 6 is selected press the el Key to display the next value set for the PV SP display display 2 Example When th
229. f is 100 ms or less 73 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 e For Controllers with heater burnout HS and heater overcurrent alarms an OR output is established between the ALM 1 function and the alarms If the ALM1 function is to be used for the heater burnout HS and heater overcurrent alarms only set O as the alarm 1 type i e do not use ALM1 e Turn the heater power ON simultaneously or before turning ON the ESUN power If the heater power is turned ON after turning ON the E5AN power the HB alarm will be activated e Control is continued even when the heater burnout HS or heater over current alarm is active e The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur rent flowing to the heater Use the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Leakage Current 1 Monitor and Leakage Current 2 Monitor parameters to check the actual current being used e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may become unstable To stabilize detection set a cur rent value difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters of less than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or more If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the diagram below Looping it through once will double the detection current Load line gt er 3 10 2 Installing Current Transfo
230. f Work Bit5 Doerr that the screen for work bit 1 is displayed and select oe Operation 3 from the Operation Type Field Wuik Bil 1 Number of Multi SP Uses Control Output Assignment 1 25P X Control Output 1 Curnlivl vutpul hreatiriy Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Control Output 2 No assignment Event Input 1 Event input 1 extemal ing Y None Stara ore EventInput 2 Event input 2 extemal ing Y RUN STOP hd Auxiliary Uutput 1 Alacn 1 AuviiyOuput2 Aem o i bd Ausiliary Output 3 Alarm 3 Event Input Event Input 153 Logic Operations Section 4 22 ini 3 Set the operation by selecting one of the following Import of Library _ Gore Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work BR 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Wark Bit 5 Operation of Work Ba 4l gt i i 1 E 1 eateries Work bit 1 input assignment A 4 Event input 2 ex ternal input Work bit 1 input assignment B 0 Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment C 0 Always OFF e Se Work bit 1 input assignment D 0 Always OFF 1 25P ba Control Output 1 Control output heating hd Event Input Assignment Control Output 2 Mo assignment stiCi i id pmet Z Event Input 1 v a a Amyoeet faew 4 Invert work bit 1 Click lt gt Normally open to change Event Input 3 Everk input 3 extemal ing None lt AuwkeyUulpt2 Am2 ii Event Inout 4 Evert input 4 extemal
231. for SYSWAY The host device sent another command The response must always be read after sending a command except for before receiving a response from the Control broadcast commands ler The host device sent the next command too After receiving a response wait at least 2 ms before sending the next soon after receiving a response from the command Controller 286 Appendix O Meaning O Countermeasures The communications line became unstable Initialize the reception buffer in the host device before sending the first when Controller power was turned ON or command and after turning OFF the power to the Controller interrupted and the host device read the unstable status as data The communications data was corrupted Try using a slower baud rate from noise from the environment Separate the communications cable from the source of noise Use a shielded twisted pair cable for the communications cable Use as short a communications cable as possible and do not lay or loop extra cable To prevent inductive noise do not run the communications cable parallel to a power line If noise countermeasures are difficult to implement use an Optical Inter face Note For details on errors refer to E5CN E5AN E5EN E5GN Digital Temperature Controllers Communica tions Manual Basic Type Cat No H158 287 Appendix Parameter Operation Lists Universal input Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Uni
232. g 62 e When AT is executed the optimum PID constants for the set point at that time are set automatically A method called the limit cycle method for forcibly changing the manipulated variable and finding the characteristics of the control object is employed e Either 40 AT or 100 AT can be selected depending on the width of MV variation in the limit cycle In the AT Execute Cancel parameter specify Ht e 100 AT or E i 40 AT To cancel AT specify aFF AT can cel e Only 100 AT can be executed for heating and cooling control e AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON OFF con trol e The results of AT are reflected in the Proportional Band P Integral Time 1 and Derivative Time D parameters in the adjustment level Adjustment Level Proportional Band Integral Time Derivative Time Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 AT Operations PV AT is started when either HE 7 100 AT or Hi 40 AT is specified for the AT Execute Cancel parameter During execution the AT Execute Cancel parameter on the No 1 display flashes When AT ends the AT Execute Can cel parameter turns OFF and the No 1 display stops flashing AT Execute Cancel No 1 display 100 AT execution in progress If you move to the operation level during AT execution the No 2 display flashes to indicate t
233. g heating cooling control the manipulated variables on the control output heating is monitored e The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed Control Monitor range Unt Standard 5 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 E Related Parameters MV display advanced function setting level Page 227 175 Operation Level Section 5 3 The control system must be set to heating cooling control MV Monitor Cooling The MV Display parameter must be set to ON mx D This parameter is used to check the manipulated variable for the cooling con trol output during operation e This parameter cannot be set e During heating cooling control the manipulated variable on the control output cooling is monitored e The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed a Control Monitorrange Unit Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 3 Function Monitor E Related Parameters See Standard or heating cooling initial setting level Page 204 MV display advanced function setting level Page 227 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 5 4 Adjustment Level This level is for executing AT auto tuning and other operations and for set control parameters This level provides the basic Controller parameters for PID control propor tional band integral time derivative time and heating cooling control Operation Level Control in progress To move to the adjustment leve
234. gned e Set to use the heater burnout alarm Setting range Doe aN Enabled aFF Disabled AN Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Hoe Heater Burnout Latch Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Burnout Detection parameter must be set to ON e When this parameter is set to ON the heater burnout alarm is held until either of the following conditions is satisfied a Heater burnout detection is set to 0 0 A Function b The power is cycled c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel d The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level Settingrane Defaut T aN Enabled afF Disabled BR Setting E Related Parameters See Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 HB ON OFF Page 222 PF setting Page 247 advanced function setting level The Heater Burnout parameter must be set to ON The Heater Burnout Latch parameter HbH Heater Burnout Hysteresis MOE a T Function T Setting See Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned e This parameter sets hysteresis for he
235. guration and Key Operations Section 1 3 Initial Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level Communications Setting Level Calibration Level e To move to the initial setting level from the operation level or the adjust ment level press the O Key for at least 3 seconds The PV display flashes after one second This level is for specifying the input type and selecting the control method control period setting direct reverse opera tion setting the alarm types etc You can move to the advanced function setting level or communications setting level from this level To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second To move to the communications setting level press the O Key for less than one sec ond When moving from the initial setting level to the operation level all the indicators will light Note Pressing the Ol Key for at least 3 seconds in the operation level s auto manual switching display will move to the manual control level and not the initial setting level e To move to the advanced function setting level set the Initial Setting Com munications Protect parameter in the protect level to O and then in the ini tial setting level input the password 169 e From the advanced function setting level it is possible to move to the cali bration level or to the initial setting level e This level is for setting the automatic display return time and
236. hat AT is being executed PV SP AT execution in progress Only the Communications Writing RUN STOP AT Execution Cancel and Pro gram Start parameters can be changed during AT execution Other parame ters cannot be changed AT Calculated Gain The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain for when PID values are cal culated using AT When emphasizing response decrease the set value When emphasizing stability increase the set value AT Hysteresis The AT Hysteresis parameter sets the hysteresis when switching ON and OFF for the limit cycle operation during auto tuning Limit Cycle MV Amplitude The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during auto tuning Note This setting is disabled for 100 AT m 40 AT The width of MV variation in the limit cycle can be changed in the Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter but the AT execution time may be longer than for 100 AT The limit cycle timing varies according to whether the deviation DV at the start of auto tuning execution is less than 10 FS Deviation gt 10 FS Deviation lt 10 FS Limit Cycle MV PV Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 40 Amplitude 40 e fo O ste A l TE Deviation l Deviation 10 FS 10 FS A A A AT started AT ended AT started AT ended 63 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 Operating Pr
237. he E5AN EN L_ILJHLILJ alarms are output to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function On the E5CN and E5CN U when heating cooling control is used auxil lary output 2 becomes control output cooling On the E5AN and E5EN when heating cooling control is used auxiliary output 3 becomes control output cooling On the E5GN when heating cooling control is used auxiliary output 1 becomes control output cooling For models that have a heater burnout alarm an OR of the alarm 1 func tion and the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is sent to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function auxiliary output 1 If the alarm 1 function is to be used for HB alarm only set the alarm 1 type to O i e do not use alarm 1 function The following diagrams show the internal equalizing circuits for auxiliary outputs 1 2 and 3 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 ee E5CN E5CN U z 6 ari SUB1 6 SUB2 SUB2 e A SUB1 Terminal 14 is on the bottom E5AN EN E5GN ALM1 2 3 can be output to auxiliary output 1 2 3 or changed with the advanced function setting level e The relay specifications are as follows SPSTNO 250 VAC 3A SPSTNO 250 VAC 2A Event Inputs e The E5LIN L_I_I_IB supports event inputs When event inputs 1 2 are to be used connect to terminals 11 to 13 or terminals 7 to 9 When event inputs 3 4 are to be used connect to 23 to 25
238. he Heater Burnout Detection or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value Function e Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less m Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e f a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the heater cur rent 1 value monitor will flash E Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1 Heater burnout detection 2 adjustment level a Pages 181 and 183 HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Error Displays Lt i Page 283 Operation Level Section 5 3 Heater burnout HS alarm and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs tte Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Burnout Detection or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value Function e Heater burnouts and h
239. he IA and Keys to set the set point to 200 C 3 7 Using ON OFF Control In ON OFF control the control output turns OFF when the temperature being controlled reaches the preset set point When the manipulated variable turns OFF the temperature begins to fall and the control turns ON again This oper ation is repeated over a certain temperature range At this time how much the temperature must fall before control turns ON again is determined by the Hys teresis Heating parameter Also what direction the manipulated variable must be adjusted in response to an increase or decrease in the process value is determined by the Direct Reverse Operation parameter 3 7 1 ON OFF Control Hysteresis Three position Control 60 e Switching between 2 PID control and ON OFF control is performed using the PID ON OFF parameter in the initial setting level When this parame ter is set to FL d 2 PID control is selected and when it is set to cof ON OFF control is selected The default is aNaF e With ON OFF control hysteresis is used to stabilize operation when switching between ON and OFF The control output heating and control output cooling functions are set in the Hysteresis Heating and Hystere sis Cooling parameters respectively e In standard control heating or cooling control the setting of the Hystere sis Heating parameter in the adjustment level is used as the hysteresis regardless of whether the control type is h
240. hermometer 0 2 of PV or 0 8 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Analog input 0 2 FS 1 digit max CT input 5 FS 1 digit max Temperature variation Thermocouple R S B W PLII influence See note 2 ESCN AN EN GN 1 of PV or 10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max E5CN U 2 of PV or 10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Other thermocouples E5CN AN EN GN 1 of PV or 4 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Voltage variation influ E5CN U 2 of PV or 4 C whichever is greater 1 digit max ence See note 2 K thermocouple at 100 C max 10 C max Platinum resistance thermometer 1 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Analog input 1 FS 1 digit max CT input 5 FS 1 digit max Controllers with Thermocouple 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Resistance Thermometer Uni in units of 0 1 C or F See note 3 versal Inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 to 99 99 FS in units of 0 01 FS Controllers with Thermocouple 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Resistance Thermometer Uni in units of 0 1 EU See note 3 Hysteresis Proportional band P versal Inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 1 to 999 9 FS in units of 0 1 FS 0 01 to 99 99 FS in units of 0 01 FS Integral time I 0 to 3 999 s in units of 1 s Derivative time D 0 to 3 999 s in units of 1 s When RT is ON 0 0 to 999 9 in units of 0 1 s Shock resistance 300
241. i SP Uses Setting 2 Select the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter by pressing the ce Key Number of iM Multi SP Uses 3 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 2 Set points 0 1 2 and 3 will be set according to the ON OFF states of event inputs 1 and 2 E5AN EN E5GN p EV1 we EVI A EV1 Q EV1 Ora EV1 h y EV2 R N 8 EV1 4 a 2 2 3 ace 3 i 9 a lt 4 5 4 Operation Commands Other than Multi SP 102 The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input Assignment 1 or 2 is displayed None RUN STOP Auto Manual PRSE Program Start See note 1 ARS I nvert Direct Reverse Operation mee 100 AT Execute Cance Bee ae 40 AT Execute Cancel See note 2 ime AlarmLatchCancel OOO OOOO S Using Event Inputs Note Executing Run Stop Control Switching between Auto and Manual Control Controlling the Start of the Simple Program Function Control by Inverting Direct Reverse Operation Section 4 5 1 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern param eter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 2 This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled When any of the following functions is set for an Event Input Assignment parameter the same function cannot be set for another Event Input Assign ment parameter STOP RUN STOP MANU Auto Manual Switch PRST Pr
242. ignment Event Input 1 Event input 1 external ing x None x Awdiery Output Assignment Event Input 2 E vent input 2 external inp Y RUN STOP z Ausiliary Output 1 Event Input 3 Event input 3 external ing Y None z Ausiliary Qutput 2 Alarm 2 z Event Input 4 Event input 4 external inp Y None z Ausiliary Output 3 Alarm 3 This parameter sets the function to be assigned to alarm output 1 Program end output can be selected only when the program pattern is not set to OFF 1 2 3 1 Displaying the Library Import Dialog Box Logic operation samples for specific cases are set in the library in advance Examples of settings for specific cases are loaded by selecting them from the library list and clicking the OK Button 148 Logic Operations Section 4 22 Example Selecting Library 1 Import of Library d lol x Library List iets Keeping an alarm output off while operation is stopped Library4 Library5 Library6 m Function overview While operation is stopped an auxiliary output does not output an alarm m Operation illustration RUNISTOP Alarm 1 Work bit 1 i TZ uxiliary output 1 i 1 2 1 While operation is stopped auxiliary output 1 does not output alarm 1 2 While operation is running auxiliary output 1 outputs alarm 1 m Configuration content Work bit operation pw ww wr ee wn oe ee wn oo wn wo ne ee ee blam RUNISTOP Work bit
243. ill be disabled 3 If the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control when there is no control output 2 E5CN CN U control automat ically switches to L a 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used E Related Parameters Standard or heating cooling Page 204 Program pattern Page 205 initial setting level 241 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 ri FT Auxiliary output 3 must be assigned Subs Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment ESAN and ESEN only T e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to Auxiliary output 3 gt Function Setting range No function is assigned to auxiliary output 3 Heating control output is output Cooling control output is output See note 1 Alarm 1 is output Alarm 2 is output Alarm 3 is output Program end is output See note 2 Control output ON Off count alarm Work bit 1 See note 4 Work bit 2 See note 4 Work bit 3 See note 4 4 Work bit 4 See note 4 Work bit 5 See note 4 Work bit 6 See note 4 Work bit 7 See note 4 Work bit 8 See note 4 j T rq in Setting I jme n a IT j II 1 _ J Mo gt gt lt l 2 e am hit e J I ak l gt A1 l Daa LI
244. ing level Page 205 243 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 HL SP Alarm 1 2 and 3 functions must be assigned The SP Ramp Set Value parameter must not be set to OFF The ST parameter must be set to OFF The alarm type must be set to 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Alarm SP Selection This parameter sets whether the set point that triggers a deviation alarm dur ing SP ramp operation is to be the ramp SP or target SP e Set whether the set point that triggers a deviation alarm is the ramp SP or target SP Function Seningranss Derat a 5P M Ramp SP 57 SP GP Setting E Related Parameters See SP ramp set value adjustment level Page 193 ae ST initial setting level Page 205 MANL Manual MV Limit Enable eee Function a Setting See 244 This parameter sets whether the MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit param eters are to be enabled for manual MV in manual mode o o o ngran OOOO Domn an Enabled aF F Disabled E Related Parameters MV upper limit MV lower limit adjustment level Page 193 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Py PP PV Rate of Change Calculation Period 2 oud acer cnet ar ee Nal e The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period Dif ferences with previous values in each set period are calculated and an alarm is output if the results exceed the alarm value Function e The PV rate of change calculation period can be se
245. input 1 to 5 V O to 5 V O to 10 V Input impedance 1 MQ max Control output Relay output E5CN Relay output SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical dura bility 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Long life relay output using a triac SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical dura bility 1 000 000 operations Load power supply voltage 75 to 250 VAC See note 3 Leakage current 5 mA max 250 VAC 60 Hz E5CN U SPDT 250 VAC 3A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA E5AN Relay output E5EN SPST NO 250 VAC 5 A resistive load electrical dura bility 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Long life relay output using a triac SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical dura bility 1 000 000 operations Load power supply voltage 75 to 250 VAC See note 3 Leakage current 5 mA max 250 VAC 60 Hz E5GN SPST NO 250 VAC 2 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Voltage output E5CN Output voltage 12 VDC 15 PNP max load current E5CN U 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit E5AN Output voltage 12 VDC 15 PNP max load current E5EN 40 mA with short circuit protection circuit Note Control output 2 12 VDC 15 PNP max load cur rent 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit E5GN Output voltage 12 VDC 15 PNP
246. inputs 0 to 2 set in the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter initial setting level are used for the multi SP function e Of these only the number of event inputs 0 to 2 set in the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter initial setting level are automatically assigned by the multi SP function Displays for event input assignments will not be displayed for inputs that are automatically assigned by the multi SP func tion Event inputs 1 and 2 are used for the multi SP function by models with four event inputs e Event inputs can be used on the following models E5CN LIMLJ 500 with the E53 CNLIBLIN2 for the ESCN E5AN EN LIMLJ 500 N with the E53 AKB for the ESAN EN e When using event inputs to switch the multi SP the event input assign ment display will not appear Whether the set value and event input assignments 1 and 2 will be displayed or hidden is shown in the tables below e Do not connect the contacts from the same switch to more than one E5LIN Controllers Models with Two Event Inputs 1 and 2 Event input assignment 1 Event input assignment 2 Description of EV1 and EV2 operation Number of Multi Displayed Multi SP not used EV1 and EV2 will perform the SP Uses operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 1 and 2 parameters Not displayed Operation per Displayed Event input 2 not EV1 will be used for the Multi formed with two Multi SP used as multi SP switch SP function to switch between point
247. iod Heating and Control Period Cooling parameters in the initial setting level The default is 20 seconds e The control periods are used only for PID control e The Control Period Cooling parameter is used only for heating cooling control 54 Setting Output Specifications Section 3 5 e When control output 1 is used as a current output Control Period Heat ing cannot be used 3 5 2 Direct and Reverse Operation e Direct operation increases the manipulated variable whenever the pro cess value increases Reverse operation decreases the manipulated vari able whenever the process value increases Manipulated variable Manipulated variable 100 100 0 0 Low Set Value High Low Set Value High temperature temperature temperature temperature Direct operation Reverse operation For example when the process value PV is lower than the set point SP in a heating control system the manipulated variable increases according to the difference between the PV and SP Accordingly reverse operation is used in a heating control system Direct operation is used in a cooling con trol system in which the operation is the opposite of a heating control sys tem The Control Output 1 Assignment is set to a control output heating for either direct or reverse operation e Direct reverse operation is set in the Direct Reverse Operation parameter in the initial setting level The default is aF F reverse operation Operating Procedure
248. ion 1 Heater Overcurrent 0 0 to 50 0 50 0 A Detection 1 Heater Current 2 0 0 to 55 0 A Value Monitor Heater Burnout 0 0 to 50 0 A Detection 2 Heater Overcurrent 0 0 to 50 0 50 0 A Detection 2 Leakage Current 1 0 0 to 55 0 Monitor HS Alarm 1 HS 10 0 to 50 0 Leakage Current 2 0 0 to 55 0 Monitor HS Alarm 2 HS2 0 0 to 50 0 SP 0 SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP 2 SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP 3 SP lower limit to SP upper limit Temperature Input 199 9 to 999 9 ae ty or Shift Upper Limit Temper 199 9 to 999 9 al i or ature Input Shift Value sepu sh a p Proportional Band ature Input Shift Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Value AnaloginputO1to9999 oo Fs ows f ES Derivative Time RTOFF 0103999 o seod RTON 00t09999 wo seoa Cooling Coefficient E 5E ooreo fo nme Dead Band Universal input 199 9 to C or F 999 9 See note 1 Analog input 199809890 oo es 289 Appendix Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Set value Manual Reset Value aF F 00101000 oo a Hysteresis Heating Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 1 0 C or F See note Hysteresis Cooling Universal Fem 0 1 to 999 9 1 0 See note Wait Band Aneel input OFF 0 1 to 999 9 MV at Stop MY 5 5 0 to 105 0 standard 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool MV at PV Error 5 0 to 105 0 standard 105 0 to 105 0
249. ions P for control output assigned to heating side P P for control output assigned to cooling side P for control output assigned to heating side x cooling coefficient The cooling coefficient is multiplied by the P for the control output assigned to the heating side to obtain control with characteristics that differ from those of the control output assigned to the heating side Output Output P for control output assigned to heat P for control output p ing side x 1 0 assigned to heat ing side x 1 0 P for control output P for control output P for control output 3 P for control output assigned to heating side assigned to cooling side assigned to heating side assigned to cooling side 0 r PV 0 x PV Set point Set point P for control output assigned to P for control output assigned to heating side x 0 8 heating side x 1 5 Automatic Cooling By executing AT during heating cooling control the cooling coefficient can be Coefficient Adjustment automatically calculated along with the PID Sea Setting rage Automatic Cooling OFF Disabled ON Enabled set Coefficient Adjust ment Note If there is strong non linear gain for the cooling characteristics such as when cooling water boils for cooling control it may not be possible to obtain the opti mum cooling coefficient at the Controller and control may take the form of 97 Executing Heating Cooling Control Section 4 4 oscillating wave
250. ions Input temperature range Controllers Platinum resistance Pt100 od 200 to 850 C 300 to 1 500 F with Ther thermometer 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 mocouple 2 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 Resistance 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to ma o Thermome 4 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 l NO JPt100 M ter Multi inputs Thermocouple K IN o o 1 900 aooo e __ 20 0 0 5000 0V0 0t09000 F J 100 to 850 oT to 1 500 a e 200104000 C0y0 0107500 C T e ormoc nce 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 E m 200 600 Cy S00 0 1 100 F O 100 to A C910 to 1 500 T z 14 199 9to ae C 199 9 toa BR _ 16 0to 1 700 CyOI03000 F B fe 1000 7 800 CyS00 0 3200 F infrared Tempera oo 0 to 120 C 0 to 240 F joie 2e0 0 22 oto 260 ev 1 800 F Analog input O to 50 a One of the following ranges depending on the scal ing 1 999 to 9 999 199 9 to 999 9 Thermocouple Wo RA O to 2 300 C 0 to 3 200 PLIL 25 Oto 1 300 C 0 to 2 300 z ee Input type Specifications Input temperature range Controllers Current input 4 to 20 mA eo One of the following ranges depending on the scal with Ana 0 to 20 mA ing log Inputs 1 999 to 9 999 or amp Oto5V 19 99 to 99 99 Oto 10V 1 999 to 9 999 E Related Parameters See Temperature unit Set point upper limit Set point lower limit initial setting es level Page 20
251. is Poe A i used an input error 5 ERR will occur Check the E53 EN01 E53 EN03 E53 AKB_ no polarity setting of the input type parameter RS 232C RS 485 Event inputs ig SD 1 B 4 l Control output 1 l od Relay output PEN Event Inputs RD A lt 8 250 VAC 5A Q Ol SG 3 DONOTUSE Jet resistive load Input power sup l Be ee J Voltage output 134 Sj for driving SSR j l 12 VDC 40 mA 3 i 43 Oto OMADE vonirol ouput ead as eee External Power Supply 4 to 20 mA DC l Load 600 Q max Control output 2 r Gs 15 External power supply l ole Auxiliary output 3 DO NOT 12 VDC 20 mA Control output 2 i 6 Volt tout T C oltage outpu USE for driving SSR T D E T lan OUPA A DO NOT a l 250 VAC 3 A 8 USE i resistive load B i Auxili tput 1 Ca V m Auxiliary outpu i y P qs B P T A heater burnout alarm heater short alarm _ t heater overcurrent alarm or input error is Auxiliary output o l 1 2 3 TC Pt universal input Analog input sent to the output to which the alarm 1 Relay outputs function is assigned 250 VAC 3A resistive load Since the voltage output control output is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer Con nection makes measurements unreliable due to sne
252. isplay Default Unit Set value Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment NONE No assignment O Control output heat ing Control output cool ing Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 C O ALM1 ALM2 ALMS PEND Program end output See note 3 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 4 Work bit 1 See note 5 Work bit 2 See note 5 Work bit 3 See note 5 Work bit 4 See note 5 Work bit 5 See note 5 Work bit 6 See note 5 Work bit 7 See note 5 Work bit 8 See note 5 NIT NE INCOME r J m ta w w 4 wd m Uu D My w _ ot l ma m 1 d gt 1 _ ta i Sr TS lt i1 a I ua T Tm T gt er va gt lt oO 70 1 _ _ gt D w il Auxiliary Output 2 Same as for control output 1 ALM2 None Assignment Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment E5AN E5EN only Character Select _ ESEL OFF ON aFFan ON None Soak Time Unit E U Alarm SP Selection Manual MV Limit MANL Enable PV Rate of Change Calculation Period Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjust ment Heater Overcurrent Use Heater Overcurrent Latch Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis PF Setting Same as for control output 1 SP M Ramp set p
253. it mm 0 4 5 0 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes one on the top and one on the bottom to release the hooks 2 Insert the flat blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and rear case two on the top and two on the bottom and use it to pry and pull out the front panel slightly Then pull out on the front panel gripping both sides Be sure not to impose excessive force on the panel Gap between the Front Panel and Rear Case Gap between the Front Panel and Rear Case Four gaps two on the top and two on the bottom Four gaps two on the top and two on the bottom Top View of E5AN Top View of E5EN 29 Installation Section 2 1 Removing the Terminal Block E5GN 1 2 3 Note 30 3 When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other make sure that the sealing rubber is in place and press the E5AN EN toward the rear case until it snaps into position While pressing the ESAN EN into place press down on the hooks on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks securely lock in place Make sure that electronic components do n
254. itch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 EV 1 EV2 EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 1 2 3 and 4 parameters EV1 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1 EV2 EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 2 3 and parameters EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 EV3 and EV4 will per form the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assignment 3 and 4 parameters Using Event Inputs Section 4 5 Two set points are set externally by using the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter e Switching is possible between two set points O and 1 by setting the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter to 1 The default setting is 1 and does not need to be changed to switch between two set points Set points O and 1 are specified by the status of event input 1 EON E5AN EN EV1 p EV1 er pes EV2 E53 CNCIBLIN2 in the E53 AKB in the ESAN EN CIMCI 500 N E5CN I i 500 for E5CN for ESAN EN E5GN D lt EV1 8 EV1 lt EV2 EV2 4 5 2 How to Use the Multi SP Function The multi SP function allows you to set up to four set points SP O to 3 in the adjustment level The set point can be switched by operating the keys on the front panel or by using external input signal
255. itor setting items Normal ON OFF Count Alarm Alternating PV SP display OP IUU Control Output ON If the ON OFF counter exceeds the control output ON OFF count alarm set OFF Count Alarm value an ON OFF count alarm will occur The alarm status can be assigned Function to a control output or an auxiliary output or it can be displayed at the Control ler The ON OFF count alarm set value function is disabled by setting the ON OFF count alarm set value to O Seting range Unt Default Control Output 1 ON OFF Alarm Set O to 9999 100 times i ting Control Output 2 ON OFF Alarm Set O to 9999 100 times T ting ON OFF Counter Reset Function The ON OFF counter can be reset for a specific control output Setting range Unt Defaut ON OFF Counter Reset 0 Disable the counter reset function 1 Reset the control output 1 ON OFF counter 2 Reset the control output 2 ON OFF counter Note After the counter has been reset the control output ON OFF count monitor value will be automatically returned to O lf an error occurs in the control output ON OFF counter data the ON OFF count monitor value will be set to 9999 and an ON OFF count alarm will occur The alarm can be cleared by resetting the ON OFF counter 144 Displaying PV SV Status Section 4 21 Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Control Output 1 ON OFF Alarm Setting parameter to 10 1 000 times Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at le
256. k to make sure which model you are using 3 2 1 Input Type The following example shows how to set a K thermocouple for 20 0 to 500 0 C Operating Procedure Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Press the A Key to enter the set value of the desired sensor When you use a K thermocouple 20 0 to 500 0 C enter 6 as the set value Hint The key operation is saved two seconds after the change or by press ing the LO or cel Key 52 Setting the Input Type Section 3 2 List of Input Types poe Input type Specifications Input temperature setting range Controllers Platinum resistance or 200 to 850 C 300 to 1 500 F with Ther thermometer 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 mocouple Thermome 199 9 to a C 199 9 7 a 0 o a oot 1000 oy0 01021000F Thermocouple 20010 1 300 Cy 300102 300 F 6 __ 20 0 0 5000 0V0 0t09000 F 100 to 850 oe to 1 500 i fe ___ 20 0 0 400 0 0 0 0107500 F T o 200 0 400 Cy 800 1070 CF 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F E h komron E 100 to a C 100 to 1 500 14 199 9 to a C 199 9 7 n Ro fe berots B fe 1000 7 800 030103200 infrared temperature SORON BALD 0 to 120 C 0 to 240 F mowes f fotoa60 cyt 80 F Analog input O to 50 mV Either of the following ranges by scaling 1 999 to 9 999
257. l J a H38 a Ni eS tdp E ah 38 g i OOOO ii iN ih aa 20 m p ESAN a TaN E5EN p 19 2 F 6 78 Dt 2 i e s les S Sel JL i HAJS Df q pez mo e Gp Ge E MM i I i mi h cg g J i i ii o o o P gt c if On W C ct j 1 fi l a o i 3 Ik a m N ae ST J tl J A vain Ea H O STOP on ia T OUTI CMW Ma HHRH J i 5 m Dh f j L i i 3 Lrg a aa S E p 1 aoe gt a fj i i IEC 3 E n a p JW ESEN Dt J N FF F TO S Ee gt m ii mf AY Y SCH i G b a ra 22 Installation Section 2 1 E5GN e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks L pH B D CL To e
258. l from the operation level press the O Key once e The set points O to 3 in the adjustment level are the set values for switch ing the set point during multi SP input e The following parameters are displayed for Controllers with CT Inputs Heater current monitors Leakage current monitors heater burnout detec tions HS alarms and heater overcurrent detections e Adjustment level parameters can be changed after setting the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter to 0 Displays and changing levels are not possible if the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 1 to 3 Protection is set in the protect level Adjustment Level Oj Key less than 1 s Press the 177 Section 5 4 Adjustment Level O QO O O O N N oO ep sp O O O O O O O O O O b al ba bod y ba ba D LEE bE T Dead Band Hysteresis Heating Hysteresis Cooling Soak Time MV at Stop MV at PV Error SP Ramp Set Value MV Lower Limit MV Change Rate Limit Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point Cl I A Manual Reset Value C l H m L I H MV Upper Limit ab e O Ko Ko Ko Ko N N D 40 00 oe oe 00
259. larm See note HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm HS alarm or heater over current alarm is ON e The default is OFF HA can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection but the function will be disabled Example When ALM1 Is Selected for the SV Status Display Function Normal When ALM1 Is ON PV SP display Logic Operations Operating Procedure Initial Setting Level Display mvt Dv tb Display Dn M Ja HL V Move to Ad vanced Function Setting Level Parameter Initialization PV Status Function PV Status Function Input Type Section 4 22 This procedure sets the PV Status Display Function parameter to ALM1 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the el Key 3 Use the Key to enter the password 169 It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by either pressing the kel Key or waiting two seconds without pressing any key 4 Press the 5 Press the 6 Press the el 7 Press the ce Key to select the PV Status Display Function parameter Al Key to select ALM1 O Key for at least one second to move to the initial setting lev O Key for at l
260. layed only when a parame ter mask is set Password to Move to Protect Level Password setting Displayed only when a password is set Restricts moving to protect setting and advanced function setting oor Protocol Setting L L Switches between aoa f WE CompoWay F SYS ii WAY and Modbus Baud Rate CompoWay F OG Communications SYSWAY only 1 L EN Communications _ Data Length Communications Stop Bits Communications Parity e J Oo ooo0 ma j a AN LW HE Send Data Wait Time 0000 Ly D Communications Unit No Note 1 When the PF Setting parameter is set to A M for a Controller with a PF Key E5AN EN 2 When the PF Setting parameter is set to PFDP for a Controller with a PF Key E5AN EN go 0000 00000 OO 0000 Move by setting password 169 Monitor Setting Item Level ESAN EN only ar PS Monitor Setting z Monitor Setting PF 1 Monitor Setting PF B Monitor Setting Eea Item Display 1 re Item Display 2 ne Item Display 3 Pc
261. less clamp terminal blocks use wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 equal to a cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm The length of the conductive portion inserted into the termi nal must be 10 mm for wires and 8 to 12 mm for ferrules Ferrules must be 0 8 to 1 4 mm in diameter 0 8 to 1 4mm 8 to 12 mm eu Ferrules wires e Recommended Ferrules for ESGN Screwless Clamp Terminals Model number Altech Corp 2623 0 Daido Solderless Terminal Mfg Co AVA 0 5 J S T Mfg Co TUB 0 5 Nichifu Co Single 1 wire TGNTC 1 25 9T TGVTC 1 25 11T TGNTC 1 25 11T TC0 3 9 5 TC1 25 11S ST TC1 25 11S TC2 11S Double 2 wires TGWVTC 1 25 9T TGWVTC 1 25 11T e Use wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 0 205 to 0 823 mm for auxiliary output 2 on the ESGN The exposed conductor length inserted into the terminal for wires or fer rules must be 6 mm Ferrules must be 0 8 to 1 5 mm in diameter 34 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 0 8 to 1 5mm 3mm max 1 zm fie fe Ferrules Wires e Recommended Ferrules for SUB2 on E5GN Manufacturer Model number Phoenix Contact Al 0 25 6 BU Al 0 34 6 TQ Al 0 5 6 WH Al 0 75 6 GY Al 1 6 RD Note Do not remove the terminal block from the E5AN E5EN or E5CN Doing so may cause product malfunction or incorrect operation 2 2 3 Wiring In the connection diagrams the left side of the terminal numbers represents the inside of the Controller and the right side represents the outsi
262. line and signal lines of the models listed in the following table See illustra tions Install the ferrite cores as close to the terminal block of the E5LIN as possible As a guideline the ferrite core should be within 10 cm of the terminal block Lines Requiring Ferrite Cores Signal and power lines provided with ferrite cores E5CN E5CN U or ESCN H _ Input power supply E5EN E5AN E5EN H or Input power supply and I O lines control outputs 1 and 2 communications E5AN H event inputs 1 to 4 transfer output and external power supply Advanced Type models do not have an external power supply Recommended Ferrite Core Seiwa Electric Mig Co Lid Ferrite Core Connection Examples 1 ESCN E5CN H Auxiliary outputs relay outputs gunle coma Control output 1 Auxiliary output 2 _ ere Auxiliary output 1 Input power DONOT DONOT 4 gt USE USE rar Power supply I 4 I cw V I DO NOT L gt aE 3 turns USE UAE I Analog input TC Pt universal input 2 ESAN E5EN E5AN H E5EN H Connected to Input power n supply communications or EV 3 turns event inputs 1 and 2 Control External Power Supply Connected to CT1 CT2 Output 2 control output 1 E Control output 1 M P Control External power supply Connected to B Output 2 12 VDC 20 mA m control output 2 E _ 3 turns or external Auxiliary output 3 DO NOT DO NOT power supply l USE USE D
263. ling 176 MV monitor heating 175 MV upper limit 193 number of multi SP uses 213 ON OFF counter reset 254 operation adjustment protect 160 parameter initialization 220 parameter mask enable 161 password to move to protect level 162 PF key protect 161 PF setting 247 PID ON OFF 204 process value 165 process value set point 165 program pattern 205 program start 171 proportional band 188 protocol setting 255 PV change color 230 PV decimal point display 250 PV rate of change calculation period 245 PV stable band 231 PV status display function 250 PV MV manual MV 197 PV SP display screen selection 249 RT 234 RUN STOP 172 scaling lower limit 202 scaling upper limit 202 selecting 17 send data wait time 255 set point during SP ramp 167 setting change protect 161 soak time 191 soak time remain 171 soak time unit 243 SP 0 186 SP 1 186 SP 2 186 SP 3 186 SP lower limit 203 SP ramp set value 193 SP ramp time unit 220 SP upper limit 203 Index ST self tuning 205 ST stable range 224 standard or heating cooling 204 standby sequence reset 221 SV status display function 251 temperature input shift 186 temperature unit 202 transfer output lower limit 212 transfer output type 210 transfer output upper limit 212 upper limit temperature input shift value 187 wait band 191 part names 2 password 111 112 PID constants 62 65 setting manually
264. ll items have been calibrated to new values Therefore be sure to temporarily register all items when you perform the calibration When the data is registered it is also recorded that user calibration has been performed Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration For details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment refer to the respective instruction manuals 6 3 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input e Calibrate according to the type of thermocouple thermocouple 1 group input types 5 7 11 12 15 and thermocouple 2 group input types 6 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 e When calibrating do not cover the bottom of the Controller Also do not touch input terminals pins terminals 4 and 5 on the E5CN pins 1 and 2 on the E5CN U pins 19 and 20 on the E5AN E5EN or pins 11 and 12 on the E5GN or compensating conductors 260 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 3 6 3 1 Preparations gt E5CN Input power supply Input power supply Lp Lp Q Cold junction Cold junction compensator compensator tO 0 C 32 F 0 C 32 F Input power supply Input power supply Lu Lp Cold junction Cold junction compensator compensator 0 C 32 F 0 C 32 F Compensating conductor Compensating conductor e Set the cold junction compensator designed for compensation of internal th
265. lows Manual MV gt MV at stop gt MV at PV error 136 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Section 4 17 4 16 3 MV at PV Error e The MV to be output for input errors can be set The MV at stop takes priority when stopped and the manual MV takes pri ority in manual mode Setting range Umt Default MV at PV ERROR 5 0 to 105 0 for standard Yo control 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool ing control Note The order of priority is as follows Manual MV gt MV at stop gt MV at PV error e The order of priority of the MVs is illustrated in the following diagram MV upper limit MV at PV Error Leaning RUN STOP Output Manipulated variable Q Q Q PID calculations Input error MV at Stop MV lower limit Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit Auto manual switch 4 17 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Extraction of Square Roots Extraction of Square Root Enable e For analog inputs the Extraction of Square Root parameter is provided for inputs so that differential pressure type flow meter signals can be directly input e The default setting for the Extraction of Square Root parameter is OFF The Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter must be set to ON in order to use this function e f the PV input i e the input before extracting the square root is higher than 0 0 and lower than the
266. ly OUT2 Control Output 2 Excluding the E5GN Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 2 turns ON For a current output however OFF for a 0 output only 4 STOP Lights when operation is stopped During operation this indicator lights when operation is stopped by an event or by key input using the RUN STOP function 5 CMW Communications Writing Lights when communications writing is enabled and is not lit when it is dis abled 6 MANU Manual Mode Lights when the auto manual mode is set to manual mode 7 Om Key Lights when settings change protect is ON i e when the IA and Keys are disabled by protected status The temperature unit is displayed when parameters are set to display a tem perature The display is determined by the currently set value of the Tempera ture Unit parameter L indicates C and F indicates F This indicator flashes during ST operation It is OFF on models with linear inputs Names of Parts Section 1 1 1 1 3 Using the Keys This section describes the basic functions of the front panel keys PF Function Auto This is a function key When it is pressed for at least 1 second the function set Manual Key in the PF Setting parameter will operate FANEN SNY Example When A M auto manual is selected in the PF Setting parameter initial value A M the key operates as an auto manual switch switching between Auto Mode and Manual Mode If the key is p
267. mA A E A 13 DO NOT EV2 DO NOT EV2 DO NOT USE USE USE 4 4 External Ext ik power su a cn O 12 VDC 15 Control output 2 m CT1 P 20 mA E53 CNHO3N2 E53 CNO3N2 E53 CNBN2 E53 CNQHN2 E53 CNQHHN2 E53 CNQBN2 Communications Communications Event inputs Control Output 2 Control Output 2 Event Inputs and RS 485 and CT RS 485 and CT and CT2 Control Output 2 B js RS Control output 2 Control output 2 A DO NOT 19 DO NOT USE USE EV2 DO NOT o USE 14 i CT1 ontrol output 2 DO NOT 65 USE gt Since the voltage output control output is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer Con nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents To comply with EMC standards the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable is longer than 30 m the EMC standards will not be satisfied 31 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 E5CN U The E5LIN TL is set for a K thermocouple input type of 5 by default If a difference sensor is used an input error 5 FF will occur Check the setting of the input type parameter Auxiliary output 250 VAC
268. max load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC Load 500 Q max for ESGN and 600 Q max for other models Resolution Approx 10 000 275 Appendix Auxiliary output SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA SPST NO 250 VAC 2 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Control method 2 PID or ON OFF control Digital setting using front panel keys 11 segment 7 segment digital display and single lighting indicator Depend on the model 10 to 55 C with no condensation or icing with 3 year guarantee 10 to 50 C 25 to 85 25 to 65 C with no condensation or icing 2 000 m or less T2A 250 VAC time lag low shut off capacity Installation environment Installation Category II Pollution Class 2 IEC 61010 1 compliant Note 1 For the setting ranges for each sensor input see page 303 2 When connecting the ES2 THB connect it 1 1 3 Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected because a triac is used for switching when closing and opening the circuit HB HS and Heater Overcurrent Alarms for ESCN AN EN GN Controllers with Heater Burnout HS
269. mit or Scaling lower limit to scaling upper limit MV monitor heating 5 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control 0 0 to 105 0 See note 2 MV monitor cooling 0 0 to 105 0 See note 2 Note 1 The default is OFF 2 The output value will be different between when the Transfer Output Type parameter is set to MV monitor heating or MV monitor cooling and when the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter is set to a heating con trol output or cooling control output Example When a Current Output Is Set to 4 to 20 mA and MV Monitor Heating Is Selected When used as a transfer output 4 0 mA will be output for 0 and 20 0 mA will be output for 100 When used as a control output 3 7 mA will be output for 0 and 20 3 mA will be output for 100 so that the actuator is controlled at 0 or 100 Transfer Output Type Output current mA Transfer output value Control output MV 100 The above graph is for when the linear current output type is set to 4 to 20 mA 127 Using the Transfer Output Section 4 14 Transfer Scaling e Reverse scaling is possible by setting the Transfer Output Lower Limit parameter larger than the Transfer Output Upper Limit parameter If the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters are set to the same value when 4 to 20 mA is set the transfer output will be output continuously at 0 4 mA e f the SP SP during SP ramp or PV is selected the
270. mo EST2 2C MV4 161 Protect Level Section 5 2 PRLP Password to Move to Protect Level This parameter is used to set the password to move to the protect level e To prevent setting the password incorrectly the X and O Keys or and Function O Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password Setting range Default m 1999 to 9999 ooo Setting e Set this parameter to 0 when no password is to be set E Related Parameters See Move to protect level protect level Page 160 Note Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password Be careful not to forget it If you forget the password contact your OMRON sales representa tive Operation Level 5 3 Operation Level Section 5 3 Display this level to perform control operations on the E5LIN You can set alarm values monitor the manipulated variable and perform other operations in this level In the advanced function setting level you can set a parameter to hide or show the set points Operation Level Press the O Key for at least 1 s Adjustment Level Press the Key less than 1 s O Press the O Key for at least 1 s display will flash Press the O Key for at least 3 s Control stops Initial Setting Level Control in progress Press the O Key for less than 1 s Control stopped This level is displayed immediatel
271. munications Bits Stop Bits Communications None Even Odd VONE EVEN odd Even None Parity Send Data Wait Time 19 Insulation Block Diagrams Section 1 5 1 5 Insulation Block Diagrams E5CN E5CN U E5AN EN E5GN 20 The insulation block diagrams for the ESCN E5AN E5EN and E5GN are pro vided in this section Input CT input Q outputs outputs 1 and 2 Communications and events External power supply C output Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 e Reinforced insulation Functional insulation Power supply Input and Q output output 1 C output supply Y output Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 e Reinforced insulation Functional insulation Input CT input and Q output output 1 Communications and events External power supply and Q output output 2 C output and transfer output supply Reinforced insulation Functional insulation Input CT input Q output output 1 Communications and events Power C output supply R output Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 2 e Reinforced insulation Functional insulation SECTION 2 Preparations This section describes the work required to prepare the ESCN ESAN and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers for operation including installation and wiring 2A WS ta AON iis cr aT EAA DERE we eR E eR ane 22 2da DIMENSION ous oes oe eegole e Pa a Ree Ae Ei 22 2l JPanel Culoul oere a n a a A 24 2y MOUNN keer ee aera ees EREE eae
272. n Alv z Work Bit 1 is used by Work Bit 1 Always OFF Number of Multi SP Uses Control Output Assignment hP Control Dutput 1 Control output heating v Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Control Output 2 No assignment gt Evert Inout 1 Event input 1 etemal ing None d Ausiliary Output Assignment Event Input 2 Event input 2 extemal ing RUN STOP Ausiliary Output 1 am i Event Input 3 E vent input 3 extemal ing gt None t lt it sS YS Auxiliary Output 2 Sam S Event Input 4 Event input 4 extemal inp 7 None amp Ausiliary Output 3 ams 154 Logic Operations Section 4 22 lo x 3 Select Library 7 from the library list and then click the Library List O K B utto n p l i Confirm the following settings and then click the OK Library6 m Function overview While operation is stopped an auxiliary output does not output an alarm B utto n m Operation illustration ae Work bit 1 operation type Operation 1 Mami 7 Work bit 1 input assignment A 7 Alarm 1 Work bit 1 i ZF pusinyoutl f i Work bit 1 input assignment B 19 Invert for RUN STOP Work bit 1 input assignment C 0 Always OFF emea Work bit 1 input assignment D 0 Always OFF 2 1 2 1 While operation is stopped auxiliary output 1 does not output alarm 1 2 While operation is running auxiliary output 1 outputs alarm 1 a a a a ee zl Auxiliary output 1 Work bit 1 Cancel aax
273. n Odd NONE CicCcn 7J Cy CN OOC 01099 20m iP Send Data Wait Time Sdik Note When setting CWF either CompoWay F or SYSWAY can be used as the communications protocol CompoWay F and SYSWAY are automatically identified by the command frames 299 Appendix Initialization According to Parameter Changes The parameters that are initialized when parameters are changed are shown under Related initialized parame ters Changed parameter Related initial ized parame ters Input type Scaling Stan Pro Lower dard or gram Limit imi Heat Pattern Scaling ing Limit imi Analog input SP Upper Limit See See See SP Lower Limit aa 1 a 1 note 1 ia Set Point See See See See a note 2 ad 2 a 2 ne 2 rt SPO to SP3 See See See See bn note 2 note 2 oe 2 ae 2 rt See note 3 Proportional See aes a Band See note note 3 note 9 10 Integral Time See See See note 10 note 3 note 9 Derivative Time See See See note 10 note 3 note 9 MV Upper Limit See MV Lower Limit ns 5 Map Stops les de Ja eee ee Co or E Ca ee ee ee ee ee ee a Transfer Output See See See See See See Upper Limit o 4 o 4 ss 4 a 4 ae 4 rt 4 Transfer Output Lower Limit See note 4 Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 See See Assignment aa 6 ne 6 Auxiliary Output See See 1 Assignm
274. n 1 Heater burnout detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Error displays Lt i Page 283 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be Hb Heater Burnout Detection 1 supponga Alarm 1 must be assigned The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output e The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls below the setting of this parameter e When the set value is 0 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF Functi i id When the set value is 50 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON a Setting range Unit Defaut Setting 0 0 to 50 0 A 00 E Related Parameters See Heater current 1 value monitor adjustment level Page 180 Heater burnout detection Heater burnout latch Heater burnout hysteresis advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported oL il Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 Function Setting See Alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Overcurrent Use ON OFF parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current value f
275. n Adjustment Protect parameter will be displayed 111 Using the Key Protect Level Section 4 9 Setting the Password Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to set the password to move to the protect level E Example To set the Password to 1234 Operation Level 1 Press the O and Ice Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the Operation Adjust Move to Protect Level Time parameter to move from the operation level ment Protect to the protect level 2 Select the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter by pressing the Password to cel Key Move to Protect Level 3 Press the O and A Keys to set the parameter to 1234 To prevent setting the password incorrectly the A and O Keys or and O Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password Note Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password Be careful not to forget it If you forget the password contact your OMRON sales representative Communications e The Write Variable operation command can be used via communications Operation Command to write the password to the Move to Protect Level parameter When the to Move to the Protect correct password is written the display will change to the Operation Level Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the protect level will be enabled Note 1 If the Write Variable operation command is used to
276. n Dis eS sar Side View of the E5GN Note Hold the connector when inserting or disconnecting the Cable 3 Install the driver Install the driver to enable the Cable to be used with the personal comput er e Installation When the Cable is connected with the personal computer the OS detects the product as a new device At this time install the driver using the instal lation wizard For details on installation methods refer to the user s man ual for the E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable 4 Setting Setup Tool Communications Conditions Set the communications port COM port number to be used for the CX Thermo Setup Tool to the COM port number assigned to the USB Serial Conversion Cable Refer to the E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable Instruction Manual 46 Using the Support Software Port Section 2 3 and Setup Manual for details on how to check the COM port assigned to the USB Serial Conversion Cable The communications conditions for Setup Tool COM ports are fixed as shown in the table below Set the communications conditions for the CX Thermo Setup Tool according to the following table Communications Unit No Communications baud rate 38 4 kbps Communications data length 7 bit
277. n an analog input is selected scaling can be performed as needed caling Upper Limit o by the control application e Scaling is set in the Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit and Deci oN Saino Lower Limit mal Point parameters initial setting level These parameters cannot be used when a temperature input is selected Ted hee Point e The Scaling Upper Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the upper limit value of input and the Scaling Lower Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lower limit value of input The Decimal Point parameter specifies the number of digits below the decimal point 94 Executing Heating Cooling Control Section 4 4 e The following figure shows a scaling example for a 4 to 20 mV input After scaling the humidity can be directly read Here one place below the decimal point is set Display humidity Upper limit 95 0 Lower limit 10 0 Input mA 20 Operating Procedure In this example scaling is set to display 4 to 20 mA as 10 0 to 95 0 Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for three seconds to move from the operation level to Input Type the initial setting level N Select Scaling Upper Limit parameter by pressing the kel Key ZM Scaling Upper Limit 3 Use the A and Keys to set the parameter to 950 Scaling Lower Select the Scaling Lower Limit p
278. nd band o i i PV A SP The default is 5 0 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Ther mometer Universal Inputs and 5 00 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs To display the PV in a stable green display when the PV is within 15 0 C of the set point to enable checking the control process at a glance set the PV Change Color and PV Stable Band parameters PV change color F LF Red to Green to Red PV stable band 15 0 C Release the protection before setting the PV Change Color and PV Stable Band parameters to enable moving to advanced function setting level Refer to steps 1 to 8 on page 108 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the el Key vanced Function 3 Use the Key to enter 169 the password Move to the advanced function setting level by pressing the cel Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds 4 Select the PV Change Color parameter by pressing the ce Key PV Change Color Section 4 10 5 Press the A Key to set the parameter to F LF 6 Select the PV Stable Band parameter by pressing the ce Key 7 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 15 0 8 To return to the initial setting level press the O Key for at least one sec ond 9 To return to the opera
279. nd E5GN models with communications e User calibration of the sensor input is supported e The structure is waterproof IP66 Not applicable to the ESCN U e Conforms to UL CSA and IEC safety standards and EMC Directive e The PV display color can be switched to make process status easy to understand at a glance This manual describes the E5CN E5CN U E5AN E5EN and E5GN Read this manual thoroughly and be sure you understand it before attempting to use the Digital Temperature Controller and use the Digital Temperature Controller correctly according to the information provided Keep this manual in a safe place for easy reference Refer to the following manual for further information on communications E5CN ESAN ESEN ESGN Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual Basic Type Cat No H158 Refer to the following manual for information on the Advanced Type Controllers ESCN ESAN E5EN H Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual Advanced Type Cat No H157 Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2008 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or
280. nd related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given XXXV XXXVI SECTION 1 Introduction This section introduces the features components and main specifications of the ESCN and ESAN and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers fel Names ol Pans ccc yan ce nee eam E ewer NEES hha Ee 2 lak Front Panel gesen E E A E we E A R 2 1 1 2 Explanation of Indicators 0 0 cece cee 4 Tele Usine Tie Keys errre ice aw sed amp wesc eee ee A a ae Se ae 5 1 2 TO Configuration and Main Functions 0 0 00 6 1 2 1 TVO Conheuration eu Saeki ech toe e edhe heed dee es 6 22 Main FUNCHONS cc4 oreaneecsetes bre bees tween weet ores 12 1 3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations 0 15 32 Selectine Parameters reio ir e er a e e ara 17 lsa Saving SeN Saray dae a etalk a Ae ead ed 18 1 4 Comimunicavions Function 25 1234 ote bedee ou iee pine eas 18 1 5 Insulation Block Diagrams 0 cece teens 20 Names of Parts Section 1 1 1 1 Names of Parts 1 1 1 Front Panel E5CN CN U The front panel is the same for the E5CN and E5CN U or D AA DA DA DA VAI AL IAN IAI ES5AN IAI IAN IN A RY M A W OA JAY AN WA i ML foray Mode Key Names of Parts Section 1 1 E5EN gt D E Mme ANAIA 0 1 display IAL TAL IAL HAY T No 2 display l 10AN No 3 display Mode Key Lup key i A
281. nd hepa ew owe eek eae eee ee wae ea as 258 G2 ser CaliDralions sa 5 E tas eica mes aut ese eae eee eased 260 6 2 1 Calibrating Inputs cerises totista Ceti sae eee es 260 6 2 2 Registering Calibration Data 0 0 0 eee eee 260 6 3 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 260 G35 Preparations secarei eiei oats sea eae ae 261 6 4 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 264 6 5 Analog Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 265 6 6 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input 000055 267 6 6 1 Calibrating a Current Input 20 0 0 00 267 6 6 2 Calibrating a Voltage Input 0 0 0 eee 268 6 7 Checking Indication Accuracy 0 0 ccc eee eens 270 6 7 1 Thermocouple or Infrared Temperature Sensor 270 6 7 2 Platinum Resistance Thermometer 0000005 27i CI Analog ANpUG naa eee scot mee eat eres Ga ea eee eee ee 272 257 Parameter Structure Section 6 1 6 1 Parameter Structure e To execute user calibration enter the password 1201 at the Move to Cal ibration Level parameter in the advanced function setting level The mode will be changed to the calibration mode and Aa will be displayed e The Move to Calibration Level parameter may not be displayed when the user is doing the calibration for the first time If this happens set
282. nd spreading of fire Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber As an additional safety measure provide error detection in the control loop Use the Loop Burnout Alarm LBA and HS alarm that are provided for the E5LIN Varistor load Varistor Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions Long life relay output Voltage used Varistor voltage 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1 000 A min 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output See note The out put will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected Long life relay outputs are not supported for the E5GN Set the alarm type and alarm value or the alarm value upper and lower limits e If necessary a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by setting a standby sequence alarm hysteresis auxiliary output close in alarm open in alarm alarm latch alarm ON delay and alarm OFF delay If the Input Error Output parameter is set to ON the output assigned to alarm 1 function will turn ON when an input error occurs Optimum PID constants can be set easily by performing AT auto tuning or ST self tuning With the E53 CNL_IBLIN2 for the E5CN or the E5AN EN L_IMLJ 500 N with the E53 AKB for the E5AN EN the following functions can be executed using event inputs switching set points multi SP 4 points max switch ing RUN STOP switching between automatic and manual operation start i
283. ndby sequence canceled Alarm E Z Y Soe Oly Standby sequence reset l l l l Alarm output i Condition A Alarm output LS LNL Condition B Setting range Domn A Condition A b Condition B A E Related Parameters Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Page 207 to 209 Alarm 1 to 3 latch advanced function setting level Page 227 221 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 gt Function Setting See Auxiliary Output Open in Alarm Auxiliary output 1 2 or 3 must be 1 to 3 assigned e This parameter sets the output status of auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 e When Close in Alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output function is output unchanged When Open in Alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output function is reversed before being output The following table shows the relationship between the auxiliary output function auxiliary output and operation displays SUB1 to SUB3 Auxiliary output Auxiliary output Operation display function SUB1 to SUB3 Close in Alarm Open in Alarm on fore fr Setting range Domn N a Close in alarm N L Open in alarm Ma E Related Parameters Auxiliary output 1 to 3 assignment advanced function setting level Pages 240 to 242 Hou Function T Setting 222 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be HB ON OFF supported Alarm 1 must be assi
284. ng or AT auto tuning When using self tuning turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Controller and load heater etc at the same time or turn ON the load power supply first Accurate self tuning and optimum control will not be possible if the power supply to the load is turned ON after turning ON the power sup ply to the Temperature Controller Shorten the control cycle A shorter control cycle improves control performance but a cycle of 20 ms minimum is recommended in consideration of the service life of the relays Set appropriate PID constants using either of the following methods e Execute AT autotuning e Set PID constants individually using man ual settings Use breeder resistance if the problem is due to leakage current Also investigate the errors detected by the HS alarm function Select either forward or reverse operation depending on the required control Reverse operation is used for heating operations Check whether heater burnout or deteriora tion have occurred Also investigate the errors detected by the heater burnout alarm Insufficient heater Check whether the heaters heating capac capacity ity is sufficient Check whether a cooling system is operat ing Set the heating prevention temperature set ting to a value higher than the set tempera ture of the Temperature Controller Section 1 of Communi cations Manual See note 62 54 62 54 54 54 Note Refer to the
285. ng cooling control 98 HS alarm 82 moving to advanced function setting level 81 82 hysteresis 62 LBA detection time 119 password 112 PID ON OFF 61 saving 18 SP lower limit 106 SP upper limit 105 Index switching between SPs 102 shifting input values 89 simple program function 129 135 controlling start 103 starting 131 soak time 131 SP ramp 106 alarm operations 108 operation at startup 107 restrictions 107 specifications 275 Current Transformer CT 278 279 external power supply for ESIB 45 output 54 USB Serial Conversion Cable 280 ST self tuning 64 ST stable range 65 startup conditions 65 standard control 204 standby sequence 93 startup conditions 65 operation 107 support software port 45 T temperature input 12 13 shift values 93 temperature unit 4 54 terminals arrangement ESAN ESEN 32 ESCN 31 ESCN U 32 33 wiring 31 thermocouple 270 calibration 260 Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer input type 264 265 universal input type 265 three position control 60 transfer output 126 type 127 troubleshooting 284 two point shift 90 92 93 calculating 90 U up key 5 USB Serial Conversion Cable specifications 280 user calibration 260 V voltage input calibration 268 W wait band 131 wiring 35 auxiliary outputs 1 2 and 3 40 communications RS 232C 44 RS 485 42 control output 1 37 control output 2 39 CT inputs 42 event inputs 41
286. ng direct reverse operation using event inputs or communications commands X A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized Automatic cooling coefficient adjustment for heating cooling control XXV E Communications Characteristics pt Previousmodels Upgraded models _ Communications Double word access only Word access and double word access access size CompoWay F services Composite Read from Variable Area and Com posite Write to Variable Area Communications buffer 40 incl 217 bytes size Baud rate 38 4 kbps max ee 19 2k max 57 6 kbps max Setup Tool Cable Communications 38 4k fixed External communica RS 485 RS 232C external communications RS 485 RS 232C external communications and tions and Setup Tool communications cannot be Setup Tool communications can be used at the used at the same time same time E Other Upgrades S Previous models Upgraded models Mounting Bracket E5AN EN only Modified section Mounting Bracket for upgraded models Mounting Bracket for previous models Note The Mounting Bracket for the previous models cannot be used for upgraded models Packing case e Previous ID code N5 e New ID code N6 E5AN EN only TYPE E5AN R3MT 500 TYPE E5AN R3MT 500 N TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TEMP TEMP MULTI RANGE MULTI RANGE VOLTS VOLTS 100 240 VAC _ 100 240 VAC b N5 LOT No _
287. ng level Page 209 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 2 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 2 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level Alarm 3 must be assigned Al J Alarm Value 3 The alarm 3 type must not be 0 1 4 5 or 12 Function a Setting See This parameter is set to one of the input values X in the alarm type list e This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 3 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Setting range Unit Default e99 109999 EU o E Related Parameters Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point initial setting level Page 202 initial setting level Alarm 3 type initial setting level Page 210 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 3 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 3 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level 173 Operation Level Section 5 3 AL IH Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 Alarm 1 must be assigned ii EN The alarm 1 type must not be 1 4 or RL iL Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 5 These parameters independently set the alarm value upper and lower limits when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 1 Type parameter initial setting level e This parameter sets the upper and lower
288. ng level to the initial setting level Press the O key again for at least one second to move to the operation level 6 Press the O Key for less than one second to move from the operation Adjustment Level level to the adjustment level Display Leakage Current 7 Select the Leakage Current 1 Monitor parameter by pressing the ce Key 1 Monitor Check the current value Next set the HS Alarm 1 parameter HS Alarm 1 8 Select the HS Alarm 1 parameter by pressing the kel Key Refer to Calcu lating Detection Current Values on page 75 when setting the values 9 For this example set 2 5 To return to the operation level press the O Key for less than one second 3 10 7 Settings Heater Overcurrent Alarm To activate heater overcurrent alarm set the Heater Overcurrent Use parame ter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the Heater Overcur rent Detection 1 and Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 parameters in the adjustment level Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter to 20 0 m Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The default setting for the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter is ON so set the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter Operation Level 1 Move to the advanced function setting level Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to
289. ng resetting the program inverting direct reverse operation 100 AT execute cancel 40 AT execute cancel setting change enable disable and canceling the alarm latch e With the E53 CNLIJHLIN2 or E53 CNLIHHLIN2 for the E5CN or the E5AN EN LJILJHLI 500 N or ESAN EN LILIHHLJ 500 N the heater burnout detection function HS alarm function and heater overcurrent detection function can be used 13 I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 Communications Functions Note External Power Supply for ES1B Note Transfer Output 14 e Communications functions utilizing CompoWay F See note 1 SYSWAY See note 2 or Modbus See note 3 can be used RS 485 Interface Use the E53 CNLJ03N2 for the E5CN or the E53 ENO3 for the E5AN EN RS 232C Interface Use the E53 EN01 for the ESAN EN 1 CompoWay F is an integrated general purpose serial communications protocol developed by OMRON It uses commands compliant with the well established FINS together with a consistent frame format on OMRON Programmable Controllers to facilitate Communications be tween personal computers and components 2 SYSWAY communications do not support alarm 3 3 Modbus is a communications control method conforming to the RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric 4 The ESCN and ESCN U do not support the RS 232C interface The E5AN LIPLI N or ESEN LIPLI N with the E53 CNLIPLIN2 can be used as the
290. ng the kel Key NE MZE CUNO 139 Setting the Width of MV Variation Section 4 18 PIDCON OFF 3 Use the IA Key to select 2 PID control 4 Press the cel Key to select the ST parameter 5 Press the Key to select OFF 6 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting PV SP level to the operation level 7 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level MV 8 Press the ce Key to select the MV Change Rate Limit parameter Change Rate Limit MV 9 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 5 0 Change Rate Limit 10 Press the O Key to return to the operation level PV SF 140 Setting the PF Key Section 4 19 4 19 Setting the PF Key 4 19 1 PF Setting Function Key PF Setting e Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes the operation set in the PF Setting parameter E5AN EN only Symbol Setting Function _ AFE Disabled Does not operate as a function key RUN RUN Specifies RUN status STOP sf StEGP SkoP STOP STOP Specifies STOP status Specifies STOP status status RUN STOP reverse Specifies reversing the RUN STOP operation operation status AT 2 100 AT Specifies reversing the 100 AT Exe Execute Cancel cute Cancel status See note 1 Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling all alarm latches See
291. ng the termi nal block and connectors Power supply inputs Wire the power supply inputs correctly Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the internal circuits Operating environ Ambient temperature The ambient operating temperature for the product is 10 to 55 C with ment no condensation or icing To extend the service life of the eth install it in a location with an ambient temperature as low as possible In locations exposed to high temperatures if necessary cool the products using a fan or other cooling method Vibration and shock Check whether the standards related to shock and vibration are satis fied at the installation environment Install the product in locations where the conductors will not be subject to vibration or shock Foreign particles Install the product in a location that is not subject to liquid or foreign particles entering the product Note The tightening torque is 0 5 N m for the ESCN U and 0 43 to 0 58 N m for the E5GN The terminal torque is 0 5 to 0 6 N m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN xvii E Upgraded Functions The functionality of the ESCN ESCN U E5AN and E5EN was improved starting from December 2007 production The functionality of the E5GN was improved starting from August 2009 production The design of the front panel can be used to differentiate between the previous and upgraded models E5CN CN U The upgraded Controllers are basically compatible with the previous Controllers
292. ns the same the Controller must be repaired If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical noise Operation at Error Control output and alarm output turn OFF Current output is approx 0 mA Current Value Exceeds Meaning This error is displayed when the heater current value exceeds 55 0 A 282 Appendix Action Control continues allowing normal operation An error message is displayed when the following items are dis played Heater current 1 value monitor Heater current 2 value monitor Leakage current 1 monitor Leakage current 2 monitor Heater Burnout HS Alarm Heater Overcurrent Meaning When heater burnout HS alarm or heater overcurrent occurs the No 1 display in the applicable setting level flashes Action When a heater burnout HS error or heater overcurrent is detected the HA indicator lights and the No 1 dis play flashes for the applicable Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Leakage Cur rent 1 Monitor or Leakage current 2 Monitor parameters in the operation level and adjustment level Control continues allowing normal operation 283 Appendix Troubleshooting Checking Problems lf the Temperature Controller is not operating normally check the following points before requesting repairs If the problem persists contact your OMRON representative for details on returning the p
293. nt Monitor Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value ON OFF Counter Reset Move to Calibration Level Appendix Monitor Setting Item Display 5 Appendix 308 Numerics 2 PID control 54 204 A adjustment level 16 177 parameter operation list 289 advanced function setting level 17 218 moving to 108 parameter operation list 294 alarm delays 116 alarms 13 alarm delays 116 alarm hysteresis 93 alarm latch 94 alarm outputs 69 alarm types 69 alarm values 71 operation 94 analog input 94 272 calibration 265 267 AT auto tuning 62 auto control 103 auto manual select addition 124 234 auto manual switch 166 auxiliary output 1 assignment 240 auxiliary output 2 assignment 241 auxiliary output 3 assignment 242 auxiliary outputs 1 2 and 3 40 wiring 41 basic model ESAN 9 ESCN 6 ESCN U 7 ESEN 9 ESGN 11 C calibration analog input 265 267 current input 267 indication accuracy 270 input types 260 Index platinum resistance thermometer 264 registering calibration data 260 thermocouple 260 user calibration 260 voltage input 268 characteristics 277 cold junction compensator connecting 261 communications operation commands 112 wiring RS 232C 44 RS 485 42 communications function 14 communications setting level 17 255 parameter operation list 299 control outputs 13 control ou
294. nting Control Output ON OFF Operations 4 20 1 Control Output ON OFF Count Function With Control Output 1 and 2 ON OFF outputs relay outputs or voltage outputs for driving SSR the number of times that a control output turns ON and OFF can be counted Based on the control output ON OFF count alarm set value an alarm can be output and an error can be displayed if the set count value is exceeded The default setting of the Control Output ON OFF Alarm Setting parameter is 0 ON OFF operations are not counted when this parameter is set to 0 To enable counting ON OFF operations change the setting to a value other than O 143 Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations Section 4 20 Control Output ON This function is not displayed when the Control Output 1 ON OFF Alarm Set OFF Counter Monitor ting and the Control Output 2 ON OFF Alarm Setting parameter are set to 0 Function or when the control outputs are set for linear outputs Setting range Unit Default Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Monitor 0 to 9999 100 times Ooo Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Monitor O to 9999 100 times ooo Display When ON OFF Count Alarm Occurs When an ON OFF count alarm occurs the PV display in the No 1 display shown below alternates with the FAL display on the No 2 display e PV e PV SP Including the items displayed by setting the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter e PV Manual MV PV SP Manual MV e PV SP displayed for the mon
295. ntrol level to the operation level PV SP Operating Procedure In this example A M Auto Manual is set for the PF Setting parameter E5AN EN only Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Press the cel Key to select PID ON OFF and then select PID with the IA Key 3 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press hiove load ing the el Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving H vanced Function to the Advanced Function Setting Level 125 Using the Transfer Output Section 4 14 Advanced Function Setting Level 4 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial q Parameter setting level to the advanced function setting level SO LINL j__ Initialization ee ZE Lu Advanced Function Setting Level 5 Select the Auto Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the ce Key Auto Manual Select Addition 6 Use the A Key to set the parameter to ON 7 Press the el Key to select the PF Setting parameter and confirm that it is set to A M A M is the default setting 8 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level 9 Press the O
296. o adjust the propor tional band P for the control output assigned to the cooling side e In heating cooling control the proportional band P for the cooling control output is calculated using the following formula to set the cooling coeffi cient Cooling control output side P Cooling coefficient x P proportional band e When the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter is set to ON the cooling coefficient is set automatically when AT is executed If there is strong non linear gain for the cooling characteristics however it may not be possible to obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Con troller Setting range Unit Default 0 07 10 99 99 gt Function Setting E Related Parameters See Proportional band adjustment level Page 188 Automatic cooling coefficient adjustment advanced function setting level Page 245 Fab Dead Band The control system must be set to heating cooling control This parameter sets the output dead band width for heating cooling control A negative setting sets an overlapping band e This parameter sets an area in which the control output is O centering around the set point for a heating cooling control e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting O moa Semingrange Unt Default Controllers with Thermocouple Resis 199 9 to 999 9
297. oad Varistor gt Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions Voltage used Varistor voltage 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1 000 A min Long life relay output 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V On the E5CN U2L auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across termi nals 7 and 8 and auxiliary output 2 SUB2 is output across terminals 6 and 8 On the E5CN LJ1LILILIU auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across termi nals 7 and 8 On the E5CN LJ2 ILILIU auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across termi nals 7 and 8 and auxiliary output 2 SUB2 is output across terminals 7 and 9 On the E5AN EN LISBULL I auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across ter minals 9 and 10 auxiliary output 2 SUB2 is output across terminals 7 and 8 and auxiliary output 3 SUB3 is output across terminals 5 and 6 On the E5GN LJ2 ILILJ auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across termi nals 5 and 6 and auxiliary output 2 SUB2 is output across terminals 13 and 14 on the bottom of the Controller Wire terminals 13 and 14 and tighten the screws When the Input Error Output parameter is set to ON the output assigned to the alarm 1 function turns ON when an input error occurs When the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is used with the ES5CN LILJHL ESCN LILIHHLI or ESGN LILJHLI alarms are output to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function When the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is used with t
298. ocedure Adjustment Level AT Execute Cancel PV m 100 AT Operation will be as shown in the following diagram regardless of the devia tion DV at the start of AT execution To shorten the AT execution time select 100 AT PV Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 100 SP AT started AT ended Note The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter is disabled This procedure executes 40 AT 1 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level 2 Press the lA Key to select Ht i The No 1 display for AT Execute Cancel will flash during AT execution 3 aFF will be displayed when AT ends 4 To return to the operation level press the O Key 3 8 2 ST Self tuning 64 ST self tuning is a function that finds PID constants by using step response tuning SRT when Controller operation begins or when the set point is changed Once the PID constants have been calculated ST is not executed when the next control operation is started as long as the set point remains unchanged ST self tuning is enabled when the ST parameter is set to ON in the initial setting level When the ST function is in operation be sure to turn the power supply of the load connected to the control output ON simultaneously with or before starting Controller operation When executing self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the same time as or before suppl
299. of currently selected thermocouple Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E R S B W and PLII thermocouples and for an infrared temperature sensor Disconnect the STV to enable the thermocouple of the cold junction com pensator When doing this be sure to disconnect the wiring on the STV side Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the S Key to temporarily register the calibration settings When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the Al Key The No 2 display changes to 4 5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the l Key This stores the temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM press the cel Key while a is dis played in the No 2 display without pressing the IA Key The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF 263 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 4 6 4 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input In this example calibration is shown for Controller with a Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input with a resistance thermometer set as the input type Use connecting wires of the same thickness 1 2 3 1 Connect the pow
300. og Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with a Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input with an analog input 0 to 50 mV set as the input type E5CN U Input power supply E5AN EN E5GN Input power supply Input power supply 265 Analog Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 5 266 1 2 3 1 2 Connect the power supply Connect an STV and DMM to the analog input terminals same as ther mocouple inputs as shown in the figure above Turn the power ON Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV to 54 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the S Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left S
301. ogram Start DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation AT 2 100 AT Exe cute Cancel AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WIPT Setting Change Enable Disable or LAT Alarm Latch Cancel Turn event inputs ON and OFF while the power is being supplied Event input ON OFF changes are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer However inputs of 250 ms or longer is determined using logic operations The functions are described in detail below Event inputs 1 and 2 are taken as examples When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to STOP RUN STOP control is started when event input 1 or 2 turns OFF Control is stopped when the input turns ON Alarm outputs however will be according to the process value The STOP indicator will light while control is stopped Event input 1 or 2 STOP Event input 1 or 2 When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to MANU auto manual manual control will start when event input 1 or 2 turns ON Auto control will start when the input turns OFF The MANU indicator will light during manual control Evon npu 1 oF Event input 1 or 2 Manual When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to PRST program start the program will start when event input 1 or 2 turns ON The program will be reset when the input turns OFF and the RUN STOP status will automatically switch to STOP mode If the program END out p
302. oint SP Set point 0 1 to 50 0 OFF OFF RUN RUN STOP STOP R S RUN STOP AT 2 100 AT execute cancel AT 1 40 AT execute cancel LAT Alarm Latch Cancel A M Auto manual PFDP Monitor setting item M Minutes H Hours Cro_m l 1 d lt J wr La M s m a mm Da 2 o I m o M m z J j A 1 rr I O A D wL i I a B i m h SP M None PY RP 1 to 999 4 Sampling period eee ee a a I l EEN 297 Appendix Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Set value Monitor Setting Item 0 Disabled 1 None 1 1 PV SP Multi SP 2 PV SP MV 3 PV SP Soak time remain 4 Proportional band P 5 Integral time I 6 Derivative time D 7 Alarm value 1 8 Alarm value upper limit 1 9 Alarm value lower limit 1 10 Alarm value 2 11 Alarm value upper limit 2 12 Alarm value lower limit 2 13 Alarm value 3 14 Alarm value upper limit 3 15 Alarm value lower limit 3 Monitor Setting Item O to 15 Same as for Monitor None 2 Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item O to 15 Same as for Monitor None 3 Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item O to 15 Same as for Monitor 4 Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item O to 15 Same as for Monitor 5 Setting Item 1 PV SP Display 0 PV SP Screen Selection 1 PV SP Multi SP PV SP MV 2
303. oling control this parameter will automatically be set to 4 E Related Parameters rogram pattern initial setting level Page 205 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 4 Function See Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to auxiliary output 2 o o o singren SSC N Ni N Ni I L No function is assigned to auxiliary output 2 l Heating control output is output a Cooling control output is output See note 1 LM i Alarm 1 is output M Lue Li m D rm J Alarm 2 is output Alarm 3 is output eNad Program end is output See note 2 Md vi hit FHL M Control output ON OFF count alarm we Work bit 2 See note 4 wa Work bit 3 See note 4 Work bit 4 See note 4 Work bit 5 See note 4 h Work bit 6 See note 4 I Work bit 7 See note 4 KA Work bit 8 See note 4 lt gt a lt gt 2 gt a Z z _ Lim lt Mm a lt a D w gt 2a 1 1 _ x Auxiliary output 2 must be assigned 1 If L a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output 2 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function w
304. oller and devices that generate powerful high frequencies high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines etc or surge 8 Use this product within the rated load and power supply 9 Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact If the voltage is applied gradually the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur Xii 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Make sure that the Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display When executing self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Temperature Controller If power is turned ON for the Digital Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved A switch or circuit breaker should be provided close to this unit The switch or circuit breaker should be within easy reach of the operator and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit Always turn OFF the power supply before removing the body of the ESCN E5AN or E5EN from the case and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components When inserting the interior of the product do not allow th
305. on CX Thermo 4 22 2 Using Logic Operations 129 129 132 135 136 136 136 137 137 139 141 141 143 143 145 145 147 147 148 Shifting Input Values Section 4 1 4 1 Shifting Input Values 4 1 1 Shifting Inputs The input shift matched to the sensor currently selected in the Input Type parameter is displayed e A 2 point shift is applied for infrared temperature sensors A 2 point shift can also be used if the Input Shift Type parameter advanced function set ting level is set to INS2 for a thermocouple or platinum resistance ther mometer e There is no shift for analog inputs Use scaling for fine adjustments One point shift e With a 1 point shift the value set for the Temperature Input Shift parame Temperature Cae Input Shift ter adjustment level is applied to each point in the entire temperature input range For example if the input shift value is set to 1 2 C the pro cess value is treated as 201 2 C after the input shift is applied when the measured process value is 200 C Temperature Upper limit After shifting Before shifting 7 Input shift value Lower limit l l l l l l l r Input 0 100 Operating Procedure In this example the input from a K sensor is shifted by 1 C using a 1 point input shift Operation Level Operation Level 1 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Adjustment Lev
306. ond See note 4 Press the PF Key Manual for at least 1 s See Control Level Presa ihe note 1 Key for at least 1 s Press the O Key for at least 3 s Display will flash after 1st second Control stops O Note The time taken to move to the protect level can 7 Communica Initial Setting 4 D be adjusted by chang Level Paan ing the Move to pro Press the tect level time setting O Key for less than 1 s Refer to page 228 Input password while Press the Ol Key Amal is displayed Set for at least 1 s value 169 Advanced Function Setting Level Input password CO Control in progress CD Control stopped E o __ Not displayed for some models A Lev change Note 1 You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset 2 It is not possible to move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel It can be done only by first turning OFF the power 3 From the manual control level key operations can be used to move to the operation level only 4 When the PF Setting parameter is set to A M for a Controller with a PF Key E5AN EN 5 When the PF Setting parameter is set to PFDP for a Controller with a PF Key E5AN EN 305 Appendix Parameter Flow This section describes the parameters set in each level Pressing
307. or heater overcurrent alarm outputs e A heater overcurrent alarm is output when the heater current exceeds the value set for this parameter e When the set value is 50 0 the heater overcurrent alarm is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the heater overcurrent alarm is turned ON Setting range Unit Default 0 00 50 0 E Related Parameters Heater current 1 value monitor adjustment level Page 180 Heater overcurrent use Heater overcurrent latch Heater overcurrent hystere sis advanced function setting level Page 222 181 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs tee Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned The HB ON OFF or Heater Overcur rent Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less Function O Monitor range Unit 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor e e FFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e f a heater burnout detection 2 or heater overcurrent detection 2 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the heater cur rent 2 value monitor will flash E Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1 Heater burnout detection 2
308. ot come into con tact with the case Peat eth H F Make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case until it Snaps into position Make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case until it snaps into position Bottom View of the ESAN The terminal block can be removed from the E5GN It is not possible for the E5CN E5AN E5EN and E5CN U The body of the Controller can be replaced by removing the terminal block from the E5GN 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the tool holes one on the top and one on the bottom to release the hooks Do not apply excessive force Terminal hole Flat blade screwdriver Unit mm The method for removing the terminal block is the same for both screw termi nal blocks and screwless clamp terminal blocks Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Do not connect a different type of terminal block to a Controller For example do not replace a screw terminal block with a screwless clamp terminal block The temperature indication accuracy will decrease 2 2 Wiring Terminals Confirm the location of the terminals terminals 1 to 15 for the E5CN 1 to 30 for the E5AN and E5EN and terminals 1 to 14 for the E5GN using the prod uct labels and case markings 2 2 1 E5CN Controllers Control output 1 Long life relay
309. out 0 A 5A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the common is as fol lows Heater burnout detection current 10 5 2 7 5 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current 10 0 2 5 A To enable detection in either case use 7 5 A as the heater burnout detection current 79 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 3 10 5 Settings HB Alarm To activate the heater burnout alarm set the HB ON OFF parameter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 and Heater Burnout Detection 2 parameters in the adjustment level Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter to 2 5 m Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The Heater Burnout Detection parameter setting is already ON by default so set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter Operation Level 1 Move to the advanced function setting level Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level by pressing the kel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Ad vanced Function Setting Level 3 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting lev
310. output 250 VAC 3A resistive load Relay output 250 VAC 3A resistive load Voltage output for driving SSR 12 VDC 21 mA Current output Terminal Arrangement The ES5LIN T is set for a K thermocouple input type of 5 by Savas If a difference sensor is used an input error 5 FF will occur Check the setting of the input type parameter Auxiliary outputs relay outputs 0 to 20 mA DC 250 VAC 3A 4 to 20 mA DC resistive load Load 600 Q max ay Auxiliary outputs relay outputs Control roliguipul 1 Auxiliary output 2 Control output 2 D D TET Auxili tput 1 Voltage output for driving SSR gt DO 4 D0 NOT Ble es aaa 12 VDC 21 mA m USE Sowa A ts burnout eae heater a alarm at supply eater overcurrent alarm or Input error IS a vor p lt 4 sent to the output to which the alarm 1 r TC Pt 100 to 240 VAC function is assigned Option Units E53 CNHHO3N2 E53 CNHBN2 E53 CNQ03N2 E53 CNPBN2 E53 CNPHN2 E53 CNPO03N2 Communications Event inputs Communications Event Inputs and External Power Communications RS 485 RS 485 and CT2 and CT RS 485 and External Power Supply Supply and CT and External Power Supply Control Output 2 9 B B Ext oe 11 19 voc RS 485 RS power supply EV1 12 20
311. output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level com munications setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level e If an auxiliary output is set to close in alarm the output is kept closed If it is set to open in alarm it is kept open o somngrange Domn a 3N Enabled aFF Disabled GF Setting E Related Parameters See Alarm value 1 to 3 Page 172 to 173 Alarm value upper limit 1 to 3 Page 174 to 175 Alarm value lower limit 1 to 3 Page 174 to 175 operation level Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Page 207 to 210 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output 1 to 3 open in alarm Page 222 advanced function setting level Alarm 1 to 3 hysteresis Page 209 initial setting level Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 HB ON OFF Page 222 PF setting Page 247 advanced function setting level PRLE Move to Protect Level Time e This parameter sets the key pressing time required to move to the protect level from the operation level the adjustment level or monitor setting item level Function Setting range Unit Defaut a Setting E Related Parameters See Operation adjustment protect Initial setting communications protect Setting change protect protect level Page 160 SERA Input Error Output Alarm 1 must be assigned but not to 4 Function a work bit output e When this parameter is set to ON the output assign
312. ower limit and mid point e To check the range of an infrared sensor set the input type parameter to 6 i e a K thermocouple and input a voltage that is equivalent to the start ing power of a K thermocouple 6 7 1 Thermocouple or Infrared Temperature Sensor e Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections Make sure that the ESCN CN U AN EN GN and cold junction compensator are con nected by a compensating conductor for the thermocouple that is to be used during actual operation m Input power supply L__ Cold junction compensator Compensating conductor r Input power suppl daii ee Cold junction compensator Compensating conductor E5AN EN mm Input power suppl ae mie Cold junction compensator Compensating conductor r Input power suppl dii a Cold junction compensator Compensating conductor Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at 0 C and set the STV output to the voltage equivalent of the starting power of the check value The cold junction compensator and compensation conductor are not required when an external cold junction compensation method is used 270 Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6 7 6 7 2 Platinum Resistance Thermometer e Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections r Input power supply Lr Input power supply L r Input power supply L r Input power supply La e Operation Se
313. ower limit a au Temperature Input setting Input setting range upper range lower limit to input setting lower limit range upper limit Analog Scaling lower limit to Scaling upper lower limit EU scaling upper limit MV Monitor Heat Standard 5 0 to 105 0 100 0 0 0 ing Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 MV Monitor Cool 0 0 to 105 0 100 0 0 0 e ing 2 1 Initialized when the transfer output type is changed Initialized if the input type temperature unit scaling upper lower limit or SP upper lower limit is changed when the transfer output type is SP ramp SP or PV When initialized by the initializing settings it is initialized to 100 0 0 0 3 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 293 Appendix Manual Control Level Seting monitor value Display Defaut Unit Setvalue Manual MV 5 0 to 105 0 standard See note 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool ing See note Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit Monitor Setting Item Level The contents displayed vary depending on the Monitor Setting 1 to 5 advanced function setting level setting Advanced Function Setting Level srs ani a epee aes Ok _T Sata tion Multi SP Uses MSPU OFFON aR aN OFF Noe fs SP Ramp Time Unit EN EU second None M EU minute H EU
314. p terminal blocks XXIV E Ratings po Previous models Upgraded models Input sensor types for ther mocouple inputs Input accuracy There are no changes in thermocouple specifications for ESCN U Influence of signal source resistance The following types of thermocouple input were added W and PLII Input range for E thermocouple O to 600 C __ Input range increased for E thermocouple 200 to 600 C Thermocouple 0 5 PV or 1 C which e Thermocouple 0 3 PV or 1 C which ever is greater 1 digit ever is greater 1 digit e Platinum resistance thermometer e Platinum resistance thermometer 0 2 0 5 PV or 1 C whichever is greater PV or 0 8 C whichever is greater 1 digit 1 digit e Analog input 0 5 FS 1 digit e Analog input 0 2 FS 1 digit e Thermocouple 0 1 C Q except B R S Thermocouple 0 1 C Q for all specifica 0 2 C Q B R S tions e Platinum resistance thermometer 0 4 C Q Platinum resistance thermometer 0 1 C Q Current outputs Current output resolution Approx 2 700 Current output resolution Approx 10 000 Auxiliary outputs E5CN E5CN U E5GN E5CN E5CN U E5GN alarm outputs 250 VAC 1A 250 VAC 3A 250 VAC 2A Input sampling cycle E5GN E5GN 500 ms 250 ms E Characteristics po Previous models Upgraded models Model numbers for the ESCN Model numbers for the E5AN EN Model numbers for the E5GN Front panel Models with 24 V
315. parameter and the output type setting SP SP upper and lower limits Ramp SP SP upper and lower limits PV Input setting range upper and lower limits or scaling upper and lower limits MV Heating 100 0 0 0 MV Cooling 100 0 0 0 4 1 Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to SP Ramp SP or PV 4 2 Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to MV Heating or MV Cooling 301 Appendix 302 4 3 Initialized to the above default values regardless of the settings for changing the transfer out put type 5 Initialized as follows according to the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter setting MV Upper Limit 105 0 MV Lower Limit Standard 5 0 heating cooling 105 0 6 Initialized to control output cooling for heating and cooling control according to the following The defaults for standard control are the defaults in the parameter list With control output 2 The Control Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling Without control output 2 and E5AN EN The Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling Without control output 2 and E5CN The Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling E5GN The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling 7 When the program pattern is OFF the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to alarm output 1
316. parameter displayed In addition this operation can be performed using the PF Key by setting the PF Key parameter advanced function setting level to A M Auto Manual For details on the setting method refer to 4 13 Performing Manual Control This setting cannot be made during ON OFF operation e The MANU indicator will light during manual control e It is not possible to move to any displays except for the PV MV parameter during manual operation e To return to the operation level press the O Key or the PF Key in the manual control level for at least one second PV MV Manual MV aca The manual control level display appears as shown below With No 3 Display Without No 3 Display Function PV Manual MV PV Manual MV Note When the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter is 0 CT iforrange Tt Process value Temperature According to indication range for each sensor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Refer to page 303 SP lower limit to SP upper limit 197 Manual Control Level Section 5 6 O semingrangs m MV manual MV Standard control 5 0 to 105 0 Yo See note Heating cooling control 105 0 to 105 0 See note Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit E Related Parameters See Standard or heating cooling initial setting level Page 204 198 Initial Set
317. peration lev el to the initial setting level Press the LO Key for less than one second to move from the initial setting level to the communications setting level Select the parameters as shown below by pressing the el Key Press the A or 4 Key to change the parameter setting Communications Function Section 1 4 Protocol Setting Communications Unit No Communications Baud Rate Communications Data Length See note Communications Stop Bits See note Communications Parity Send Data Wait Time Note The Protocol Setting parameter is displayed only when CompoWay F commu nications are being used Setting Communications Match the communications specifications of the ESCN AN EN GN and the Data host computer If a 1 N connection is being used ensure that the communica tions specifications for all devices in the system except the communications Unit No are the same Symbol Setting monitor value Selection symbols Protocol Setting CompoWay F SYSWAY LiF Mad a oo Modbus SYSWAY Communications 0 to 99 None Unit No Communications 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 kbps Baud Rate 38 4 57 6 Communications 7 8 Bits Data Length Com
318. peration of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work BiL gt A O r B O r C O r D Dperation Type X mmaa a ma When condition A O E F ig Wok B C or D is satisfied Input C 0 Always OFF 0 0 Input D 0 Always OFF v Time Unit Ic min Do e Operation 4 Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bid gt A a n d B a n d C Operation Type z Work Bit 1 is used by and D Auxiliary Output 1 Work Bit 1 ON OFF Delay InputA InputB Input C Input D A Alarm 1 x B 13 RUN STOP x E O Always OFF D 0 Always OFF Ke When conditions A B C and D are all satisfied 150 Logic Operations Section 4 22 4 Selecting Input Assignments Select the input assignment for the work bit logic operation from the follow ing settings Parameter Setting range name Work Bit 1 Input 0 Always OFF Assignment A Always ON ON for one cycle when power is turned ON Event input 1 external input See note 1 Event input 2 external input See note 1 Event input 3 external input See note 1 Event input 4 external input See note 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 2 Control output heating Control output cooling Input error Disabled HB heater burnout alarm HS alarm O
319. perty in the Products is the exclu sive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party Export Controls Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws regulations and licenses regarding i export of products or information iii sale of products to forbidden or other proscribed persons and ii disclosure to non citizens of regulated technology or information Miscellaneous a Waiver No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron b Assignment Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron s written consent c Law These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which Buyer is purchasing the Products without regard to conflict of law princi ples d Amendment These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Omron relating to the Products and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties
320. play and the program END output turns ON 7 e Key operations are used to change the RUN STOP status to STOP during program operation 135 Output Adjustment Functions Section 4 16 4 16 Output Adjustment Functions 4 16 1 Output Limits e Output limits can be set to control the output using the upper and lower limits to the calculated MV e The following MV takes priority over the MV limits Manual MV See note MV at stop MV at PV error Output 100 7 7 MV upper limit MV lower limit Note When the manual MV limit is enabled the manual MV will be re stricted by the MV limit e For heating cooling control upper and lower limits are set of overall heat ing cooling control They cannot be set separately for heating cooling Output 4 Heating MV Cooling MV MV lower limit MV upper limit 4 16 2 MV at Stop e The MV when control is stopped can be set For heating cooling control the MV at stop will apply to the cooling side if the MV is negative and to the heating side if the MV is positive When setting the MV when control is stopped set the MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter advanced function setting level to ON The default is 0 0 so an MV will not be output for either standard or heat ing cooling control Seting range Unit Defaut MV at STOP 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool ing control Note The order of priority is as fol
321. played Resistance thermometer input Except for models with a Resistance thermometer input Except for models with a setting range of 199 9 to 500 0 C setting range of 1999 to 500 0 C Thermocouple input Except for models with a setting range of Thermocouple input Except for models with a setting range of 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 400 0 C ES1B penne range 7 a Control range SF 5 LRF display Numeric display 5 ERF display c display Numeric display 5 FF display Analog Input Analog Input e When display range lt control range e When display range gt control range o Control range Control range 5 ERR display c display Numeric am 2332 display 5 FF display 5ERR display Numeric display 5 ERF display 1999 lt Display range 9999 1999 lt Display range 9999 See note See note Note The display range is shown in numbers with decimal points omitted AD Converter Error Meaning There is an error in internal circuits Action First turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remains the same the Controller must be repaired If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical noise Operation Control output and alarm output turn OFF Memory Error Meaning Internal memory operation is in error Action First turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remai
322. power supply for ES1B Infrared Temperature Sensors The E5GN does not provide a power supply for an ES1B Infrared Tempera ture Sensor A transfer output for 4 to 20 mA can be used with the ESAN E5EN LILIF For E5_IN CLIL models models without F in the model number the cur rent output can be used as a simple transfer output Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1 3 1 3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Parameters are divided into groups each called a level Each of the set val ues setting items in these levels is called a parameter The parameters on the ESCN CN U AN EN GN are divided into the following 9 levels When the power is turned ON all of the display lights for approximately one second Power ON Start in manual mode Start in automatic mode Press the O Key or the PF Key for at least 1 s See note 4 C N Press the Operation Adjustment O Ce Level Level Press the Keys for at O lce least 1 s OOM Press the Keys for at M O least 3 s a MTA Key less than 1s J Display E will flash S PF Key after 1st Press the O Key See note 5 second Manual for at least 3 s while ey Monitor Setting F M is displayed ee note S Tarm Leyal mode A M will flash after 1st second See note 4 Press the PF Key Manual for atl
323. pressing the ce Key Transfer Output Type Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 3 Press the A Key to select 5F set point 4 Select the Transfer Output Upper Limit parameter by pressing the ce Key 5 Use the Key to set the parameter to 200 The default is 1300 Initial Setting Level 6 Select the Transfer Output Lower Limit parameter by pressing the kel Key Transfer Output Lower Limit 7 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 50 The default is 200 8 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second PV SP 4 15 Using the Simple Program Function 4 15 1 Simple Program Function e The simple program function can be used for the following type of control SP Wait band SOLPOR ne PTT Sean ie Wait band A A t RSET gt STRT A eda END display gt END output Select either STOP or RUN 129 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 e The program will start when the Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT END will be displayed on the No 2 display and the output assigned as the program end output will turn ON after the time set in the Soak Time parameter has expired in the wait band The Program Pattern parameter can be used to select moving to STOP mode or continuing operation in RUN mode after the program ends Parameters Related to the
324. put with OFF delay turns OFF the output will turn OFF after the set delay time has elapsed The setting range is 0 to 9 999 The default is O disabled 9 Switching ON OFF Delay Time Unit Select either seconds or minutes for the ON OFF delay time unit The de fault is seconds 10 Selecting the Number of Multi SP Uses Select the number of Multi SP uses from 0 to 2 11 Changing Event Input Data Select the event input conditions from the following setting ranges Setting range Event Input Data 1 Not assigned Event input 1 external input Event input 2 external input Event input 3 external input Event input 4 external input Work bit 1 Work bit 2 Work bit 3 ONO OF WN O Work bit 4 9 Work bit 5 10 Work bit 6 11 Work bit 7 12 Work bit 8 Event Input Data 2 Same as for event input data 1 Event Input Data 3 Same as for event input data 1 Event Input Data 4 Same as for event input data 1 152 Logic Operations Section 4 22 Note The event input data can be changed from the default setting even if there is no event input terminal external input By changing the default setting the event input assignment parameters will be dis played at the Controller display and can be set from the Controller 12 Changing the Event Input Assignment Function Select the setting for the event input assignment When a work bit is selected as event input data Communications Write Enable Disable
325. que is 0 5 to 0 6 N m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN 285 Appendix Symptom Cannot Communicate or a Communications Error Occurs Oo o Meaning Countermeasures The communications wiring is not correct Correct the wiring The communications line has become dis Connect the communications line securely and tighten the screws connected The communications cable is broken Replace the cable The communications cable is too long The total cable length is 500 m maximum for RS 485 and 15 m maximum for RS 232C communications To extend the communications distance for RS 232C communications use OMROM s Z3R Optical Interface The wrong communications cable has been E5CN E5EN or E5AN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG14 cross sec used tional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for the communica tions cable E5GN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the communications cable More than the specified number of communi When 1 N RS 485 communications are used a maximum of 32 nodes cations devices are connected to the same including the host node can be connected communications path for RS 485 communi cations An end node has not been set at each end of Set or connect terminating resistance at each end of the line If the E5CN the communications line for RS 485 commu E5AN E5EN or E5GN is the end node use 120 2 1 2 W terminating nications
326. r 13 _ Alarm 2 must be assigned and the Aco Alarm 2 OFF Delay alarm 2 type must not be 0 12 or 13 _ Alarm 3 must be assigned and the Ado Alarm 3 OFF Delay alarm 3 type must not be 0 12 or Function T Setting 13 Alarm 1 2 or 3 outputs are prevented from turning OFF until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed e Set the time for which the OFF delay is to be enabled e To disable the OFF delay set O Setting range Unit Default 910999 Second 0 E Related Parameters Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Pages 207 to 210 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 CLO The input type must be thermocou LE Input Shift Type ple or resistance thermometer This parameter sets the shift method for thermocouple or resistance ther mometer inputs e When the input type is thermocouple or resistance thermometer set either a 1 point shift or a 2 point shift Function Setting range Doan LNS i 1 point shift cc 2 point shift ENSI Setting E Related Parameters See Temperature input shift Upper limit temperature input shift value Lower limit 7 temperature input shift value adjustment level Page 186 Input type initial setting level Page 200 MICE ae The control must be set to 2 PID MY SE MV at Stop and Error Addition ao This parameter sets whether or not the MV at Stop and MV at PV Error parameters are to be displayed e Set whether or not the MV a
327. r and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type and are expressed as L and H Set value 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always ON H lt 0 L lt 0O L H SP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 e Eoi IH lt IL IH gt L g H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IH lt JLI Set value 4 Lower limit range Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always OFF H lt 0 L lt 0 L HSP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 H lt 0 L gt 0 IH lt L IH gt L H LSP IH gt L H gt 0 L lt 0O SPH L IH lt L Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence Section 3 9 Alarm Outputs 3 9 2 Alarm Values Alarm Lower Limit Value Alarm Upper Limit Value Alarm Value Initial Setting Level Input Type Alarm 1 Type e For the lower limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above the alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps e In case 3 the alarm is always OFF 5 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence e The alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps 6 Refer to 4 2 1 Standby Sequence for information on the operation of the standby sequence 7 Refer to 4 72 71 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 8 Refer to PV Change Rate Alarm on page 72 e Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the initial setting level The default is 2 Upper limit alarm e
328. r is used e When the control object or sensor has much loss time e When hunting occurs in normal mode for any reason e PID constants are initialized to the factory settings by switching to RT mode e When the RT mode is selected the derivative time setting unit be comes the second RT Features e Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode Temperature Temperature Much hunting occurs Hunting is reduced Set value F sr ech ace Set value _ TN z Time A Time Start of control Start of control 66 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 e When the temperature PV falls short of the set point for the PID con stants when using AT or ST in normal mode executing AT or ST in RT mode tends to improve performance Temperature Temperature Set value Set value L A Time A Time Start of control Start of control e When the manipulated variable MV is saturated the amount of over shooting may be somewhat higher in comparison to PID control based on AT or ST in normal mode Operating Procedure This procedure selects RT mode Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press
329. r reset None Reset function 1 Reset the control output 1 ON OFF counter 2 Reset the control output 2 ON OFF counter Move to Calibration Mai 1999 to 9 999 None Level Note 1 Set None as the unit for analog inputs 23 0 to 50 mV 2 The SSR Y range depends on whether control output 1 is a current output or voltage output for driv ing 3 PEND program end output can be set even when the program pattern is set to OFF but the func tion will be disabled 4 Turns ON when either the control output 1 or 2 ON OFF count alarm is ON 5 Displayed when logic operations are used For detail refer to 4 22 Logic Operations Protect Level Parameters Characters Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Set value TCO SC dNone Operaion jusment Fea SAFE owes Jere aep e tions Protect mpe orron eF OFF noe O O PF Key Protect PFPE OFF ON arran OFF None Password to Move to Protect Pa 1999 to 9 999 Le Level Communications Setting Level Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Setvalue Protocol Setting CompoWay F SYSWAY LW Mod Compo None Modbus See note Way F Communications Unit No UNG O to 99 Communications Baud 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 Rate or 57 6 a m J J lt I ns LI m 1 pi E P arr Communications Data 7 8 Length Communications Stop 1 2 2 Bit Bits Communications Parity None Eve
330. re of the control target is to be controlled For this reason check the thermometer temperature B and Controller readout A with the thermometer temperature near room temperature and near the set point e Y1 is the Controller readout at room temperature before shifting and X1 is the Controller readout at room temperature after shifting e Y2 is the Controller readout at the set temperature before shifting and X2 is the Controller readout at the set temperature after shifting e Set the upper limit temperature input shift and the lower limit temper ature input shift using the following formulas based on the tempera tures before shifting Y1 and Y2 the temperatures after shifting X1 and X2 the set temperature upper limit YH and the set temperature lower limit YL The shift is illustrated in Figure 3 After shifting 4 m Upper limit temperature input a o NGH YH Set temperature upper limit shift value e g 52 7 C NaH e g 260 C En EE E eee ae Before shifting ad Controller readout A X2 Controller readout after shifting e g 110 C Y2 Controller readout before shifting 7777777777777 e g 105 C Y1 Controller readout before shifting e g 40 C X1 Controller readout after shifting e g 25 C al vO X1 Room eae Control target temperature B 260 C Lower limit temperature input_ pe shift value e g 27 3 C LNSL ature e g 25 C X2 N
331. ree methods can be used to start the simple program e Setting the Program Start parameter to STRT e Turning ON an event input The program start must be assigned to an event input See note e Starting with an Operation Command using communications When the program start is not assigned to an event input When the simple program is started and reset writing is performed to EEPROM Be sure to consider the write life 1 million writes of the EEPROM in the system design When the program start is assigned to an event input the Program Start parameter will function as a monitor display and the RSET STRT displays can be used to check when the event input has started or reset the simple program When this is done the Program Start parameter func tions as a monitor display only and cannot be changed using key operations If the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF the event input assignment setting will be initialized to None Soak Time and Wait Band Note Wait band BEDO p eo ne naa ee ee ee oe ee Wait band A RSET STRT Soak time remain Set point Set point The wait band is the band within which the process value is stable in respect to the set point The soak time is measured within the wait band The timer that measures the soak time operates only when the process value is within the wait band around the set point i e SP wait band In the following dia gram the timer will be stopped
332. rence between the tempera ture at the start of operation and the set point used when the previous SRT was executed See note 1 The set point change width is greater both of the following Present propor tional band x 1 27 4 C and the ST stable range During reverse operation the new set point is larger than the set point before the change and during direct opera tion the new set point is smaller than the set point before the change The temperature is stable See note 2 Equilibrium with the output amount at 0 when the power is turned ON is also all right See note 3 point is greater both of the following Present proportional band x 1 27 4 C and the ST stable range The temperature at the start of opera tion is lower than the set point during reverse operation and is larger than the set point during direct operation 4 There is no reset from input errors Note 1 The previous SRT implemented set point is the set point that was used for calculating the PID constants for the previous SRT 2 In this state the measurement point is within the ST stable range 3 In this state the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is within the ST stable range or less In the following instances PID constants are not changed by self tuning ST for the present set point 1 2 3 1 When the PID constants have been changed manually with ST set to ON 2 When auto tuning AT has been executed
333. ressed for more than 1 second regardless of key release timing the mode will switch O Key Press this key to move between setting levels The setting level is selected in the following order operation level adjustment level initial setting level com munications setting level Key Press this key to change parameters within a setting level The parameters can be reversed by holding down the key moving one per second in reverse order Key Each press of this key increments the value displayed on the No 2 display or advances the setting Holding the key down speeds up the incrementation Key Each press of this key decrements values displayed on the No 2 display or reverses the setting Holding the key down speeds up the incrementation O cel Keys Press these keys to change to the protect level For details on operations involving holding these keys down simultaneously refer to 1 3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations For details on the protect level refer to SECTION 5 Parameters O A Keys To restrict set value changes in order to prevent accidental or incorrect oper O R Keys ations these key operations require simultaneously pressing the O key along with A or key This applies only to the parameter for the password to move to protect level Refer to page 162 I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 1 2 I O Configuration and Main Functions 1 2
334. reviousmodels _ Upgraded models e Wire connection direction Perpendicular to e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks back surface Wire connection direction Horizontal from the top and bottom of back surface e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Wire connection direction Perpendicular to back surface ZB lt i E ITA Zs EE as EE XXxiii E Wiring Terminals Previous models Upgraded models e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Changed from ferrules to crimp terminals for M3 Tightening torque 0 5 N m Terminals 1to6 AWG24 to 2 1 mm dia AWG14 max C b 5 8 mm max Terminals 7to9 AWG28 to 1 3 mm dia AWG22 max TO bs mm max I e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Wires Changed to 10 mm from 5 to 6 mm 5to6mm 5 to 6 mm Ferrules Changed to 8 to 12 mm from 5 to 6 mm Wires Ferrules torque T Terminals 1 to 6 0 23 to 0 25 N m 10 mm 8 to 12 mm Terminals 7 to 9 0 12 to 0 14 N m Wires Ferrules E Removing the Terminal Block a Previous models Upgraded models E5GN Press firmly in on both sides of the terminal block to Insert a tool into the tool holes one on the top and release the lock and then pull up on the terminal one on the bottom to release the hooks and pull out the terminal block Terminal hole Note The method for removing the terminal block is the same for both screw termi nal blocks and screwless clam
335. rily fasten the E5CN E5CN U 4 Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 29 to 0 39 N m 25 Installation Section 2 1 Mounting the Terminal Cover For the E5CN make sure that the UP mark is facing up and then attach the E53 COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the Temper ature Controller E5AN EN Mounting Mounting Bracket Panel Bracket ET ET l is er HS S Age i AE Terminal Cover SE lt gt n E53 COV 16 ee le Terminal Cover Waterproof packing E53 COV 16 Waterproof packing E5AN ES5EN Mounting to the Panel 1 2 3 1 For waterproof mounting waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function 2 Insert the E5AN E5EN into the square mounting hole in the panel thick ness 1 to 8 mm Attach the Mounting Brackets provided with the product to the mounting grooves on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case 3 Use a ratchet to alternately tighten the screws on the top and bottom Mo
336. rlimt Can beset P o amva canbest 2 1 Alarm value upperlimit2 Can beset A 12 Alarm value lowerlimt 2 Canbeset P 1s Aaamvaues Canbest SAL 14 Alarm value upperimt3 Can beset A 15 Aarm value lower mit Can beset P E Related Parameters See PF setting advanced function setting level Page 247 Monitor setting items 1 to 5 advanced function setting level Page 248 196 Manual Control Level Section 5 6 5 6 Manual Control Level The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode while the PV MV param eter is displayed The final MV used in automatic mode will be used as the initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode In manual mode the change value will be saved immediately and reflected in the actual MV Power ON l v Level Level Press the Ol Key for at least 1 s rt m1 Z m _ Press the O Key for at least 1 s display will flash Press the Key for at least 1 s or the O Key for at least 1 s See note Press the Key for at least 1 s See note Coen CICI Press the O Key for at least 3 s Manual Control Level Note When the PF Setting parameter is set to A M for a Controller that has a PF Key E5AN EN To move from the operation level to the manual control level press the O Key for at least three seconds with the Auto Manual Switch
337. rmers CT Single phase Heaters e This function can be used with E5_IN models that have the HB alarm HS alarm and OC alarm For the E5CN connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 CT1 or 13 and 15 CT2 For the E5AN E5EN connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 CT1 or 15 and 16 CT2 For the E5GN connect the CT in advance to terminals 7 and 8 CT1 Then pass the heater power line through the CT s hole For specifications models and dimensions of current transformers that can be used with this Controller refer to Appen dix Current Transformer CT on page 279 For single phase heaters install the CT in the position shown in the following diagram Load such as a heater AC line ola Product To CT input Three phase Heaters E5AN _ L JHH_I N E5EN UUHHL N and E53 CNUILIHHN2 for E5CN 3 phase Heater Detection Models 74 1 2 3 When a 3 phase power supply is used regardless of the types of connecting lines two current transformers CTs are required to detect heater burnout HS and OC 1 Delta connecting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so be take that into account when setting the detection current Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 Load such as a heater AC line Product _ To CT input AC line Product To CT input 2 Star conne
338. rocess Value otm _ 1 Alarm Value 1 2 yi 3 E A Set Point ate g 1m Decimal Point e p oe p S 5 o gi EID For input type of analog ce e72 Q _ m Auto Manual Switch Str IL g tt g 117 11 PID control only E AL IH parma E Temperature Unit P th aaa Added when auto man am n pp a QTL C Rs e ii ual select addition is ON E 35 E For input type of ey ce 5 i temperature for at a M p Multi SP et 0 I Alarm Value 3 least3 s E Set Point Setting a Lower Limit 1 57E SP Upper Limit Bon a BER a Bi zs l Bes 1300 ce g ot o_ m Set Point During o ae 2 ce Limit the set point 3 I HSP Ramp 5 NLC E e ac C _1 SP Lower Limit EES ul gg a a Si O0 Pon co ce o ono LIL no g tL t Heater Current 1 Value 270 7H Alarm Value LE I P 8 MLE ip T B an Monitor B Le f Upper Limit 2 5 CNE PID ON OFF F ms 1 lz HBS NaF D 3 ra 3 Heater Current 2 Value aco Alarm Value D yi 2 LECE Monitor a HILEL Lower Limit 2 2 C L Standard or Sec AO BES g g IL Heating Cooling sco SENG n LER Leakage Current 1 UE E Ee oi J g 5E ST Selftuning S z 5N For input type of co Ce 2 J temperature stand ari Leakage Current 2 ore a J Alarm Value L S2 ard control or PID g LIE Monitor g tL I Upper Limit 3 3 FL FIM Program Pattern Bes Oo s o 5 a 2 6 amp 0 __aFF When assigning PID or acs ge 4 Ee es control output to ON OFF g PASE Program Start B AL eae eae
339. roduct Timing Status Meaning Countermeasures Page Turning ON the Temperature unit C F is flashing ST self tuning is in progress default setting ON This is not a product fault The temperature 64 unit C F flashes while ST self tuning is power for the first time being performed Input type mismatch Check the sensor type and reset the input 52 type correctly Input error S Err dis Thermometer is not Check the thermometer installation location 31 play installed properly and polarity and install correctly Temperature error is large During opera tion Communications are not possible Communications are not possible Overshooting Undershooting Hunting Temperature is not rising Non recommended adapter is being used Non recommended adapter is being used ON OFF control is enabled default ON OFF control selected Control cycle is longer compared with the speed of rise and fall in tem perature Unsuitable PID con stant HS alarm operation fault Specified operation is unsuitable for required control default Reverse operation Heater is burnt out or deteriorated Cooling system in operation Peripheral devices have heat preven tion device operat ing Make sure that the connected device is not faulty Make sure that the connected device is not faulty Select PID control and execute either ST self tuni
340. s 03 RS 485 communications H03 Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT1 RS 485 communica tions HB Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT1 Two event inputs HHO03 Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT2 RS 485 communications 4 Version N2 Applicable only to models released after January 2008 Not all combinations of function 1 and function 2 specifications are possible for Option Units E53 LILILIL x1 Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected because a triac is used for switching the circuit For details check the conditions in Ratings 2 Auxiliary outputs are contact outputs that can be used to output alarms or results of logic operations I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 E5AN EN Temperature input Control Control output or analog input section heating Control output ig te a cooling Heating cooling FA arm output CT2 input CT1 input I gt ee a fed 4 D 3 a en ee pon Event inputs 1 and Input error 2 2 channels Program end Press one of these keys depending on the model Communications function L ci Note Functions can be assigned individually to each output by changing the set val ues for the Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment
341. s Communications stop bits 2 bits Communications parity 47 Using the Support Software Port 48 Section 2 3 SECTION 3 Basic Operation This section describes the basic operation of the ESCN ESAN and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers including key operations to set parameters and descriptions of display elements based on specific control examples 3L Maitval Setane Examples ysr Orde nmraes hte see Pee eee 50 3 2 Setting the Input Type 0 0 eee eee 52 Sel MPU TY pews eens cena ees hse Ce ha ohn oe bt ha eee ee 32 523 Selecting the Temperature Unitirsi eritada a a n eee 54 Jael Temperature UM eegend aaa aN aaa a 54 3 4 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control 00000055 54 3 5 Setting Output Specifications n se aaaeeeaeo 54 S25eK COntrOlPenOdS erer ae be hsb AS AS ae SOR a 54 3 5 2 Direct and Reverse Operation 0 0 0 eee eee 55 3 5 3 Assigned Output Functions 0 0 0 c ccc eee 56 3 6 Setline the Se POmt SP 226c ecgn ese nere idee i eesieeeeigugsises 59 S202 Cmno eSP reremenna a dob acta sett absense e aE EAA 59 Ir Psm ONOFFCONMO rraian E Rok way le eee eed DERAN 60 Fial ONOFF Contr lina oocas c orth cue as uewtee es chau eae tees 60 See DEDOS ete Bahl ath sect ane ece ant a ae ash cane 61 3 8 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 62 32021 AT CAU OsUInING 5 36s evans E Gad ea ce awe ees eta 62 Fe SPSE
342. s set points 0 and 1 EV2 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 2 parameter Not displayed Operation performed with four Multi SP points EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points O 1 2 and 3 99 Using Event Inputs Number of Multi SP Uses Number of Multi SP Uses 100 Models with Two Event Inputs 3 and 4 Event input assignment 3 Event input assignment 4 Description of EV3 and EV4 operation Displayed Multi SP not used Not displayed Operation per formed with two Multi SP points Displayed Event input 4 not used as multi SP switch Not displayed Operation performed with four Multi SP points Models with Four Event gua 1to 4 Displayed Multi SP not used Not displayed Displayed Event inputs 2 3 and 4 cannot be Operation performed with two Multi SP points Not displayed Operation per formed with four Multi SP points used for multi SP switching Displayed Event inputs 3 and 4 cannot be used for multi SP switching Section 4 5 EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 3 and 4 parameters EV3 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1 EV4 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 2 parameter EV3 and EV4 will be used for the Multi SP function to sw
343. s If that occurs increase the proportional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control 4 4 2 Settings To set heating cooling control set the Standard or Heating Cooling Dead Band and Cooling Coefficient parameters Setting Heating Cooling Control Operating Procedure Standard or heating cooling Heating cooling Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select heating cooling control in the initial setting level Sta Standard control ir 4 L Heating cooling control e Setting the Cooling Coefficient Operating Procedure Cooling Coefficient 10 Adjustment Level 1 Select the Cooling Coefficient parameter in the adjustment level Cooling Coefficient 2 Use the lAl Key to set the parameter to 10 00 Setting the Dead Band Operating Procedure Dead Band 5 Adjustment Level 1 Select the Dead Band parameter in the adjustment level Dead Band 2 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 5 0 98 Using Event Inputs Section 4 5 4 5 Using Event Inputs 4 5 1 Event Input Settings e Event inputs can be used for Multi SP RUN STOP Auto Manual Switch Program Start Invert Direct Reverse Operation 100 AT Execute Can cel 40 AT Execute Cancel Setting Change Enable Disable and Alarm Latch Cancel e Of these only the number of event
344. s event inputs Using Event Inputs m Two Event Inputs Event Inputs 1 and 2 The following tables show the relationship between the ON OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and the selected set points Number of Multi SP Uses 1 Event input 1 Selected set point Number of Multi SP Uses 2 Event input 1 Event input 2 Selected set point Set point 0 ON OFF Set pint ore fon setpoint Using Key Operations You can select any of the set points 0 to 3 by changing the set value of the Multi SP Uses parameter The Multi SP Uses parameter display conditions are as follows e If the Controller does not support event inputs the Multi SP Uses param eter must be set to ON e If the Controller supports event inputs the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter must be set to O and the Multi SP Uses parameter must be set to ON 101 Using Event Inputs 4 5 3 Settings Section 4 5 The following table shows the relationship between the Multi SP Uses param eter set value and the selected set point Multi SP Selected set point C EE Se point Set point 2 Set point 3 The set point can also be switched using communications Switching between Set Points 0 1 2 and 3 Operating Procedure Operation Level The following example sets the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter to 2 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Number of Mult
345. s parameter is set to OFF e During temperature input the decimal point position of the SP ramp set value is dependent on the currently selected sensor and during analog input it is dependent on scaling Function Sening range Umt Default T OFF or 1 to 9999 EU s EU minute or EU h Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point 4 initial setting level Page 202 ST Page 205 initial setting level SP ramp time unit advanced function setting level Page 220 ol H MV Upper Limit The control must be set to 2 PID control al l MV Lower Limit The ST parameter must be set to OFF e The MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters set the upper and lower limits of the manipulated variable When the calculated manipulated variable exceeds the upper or lower limit value the upper or lower limit Function value will be the output level e MV Upper Limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating cooling control are different Control method Setting range Unt Default ae Standard MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 105 0 poe Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 e MV Lower Limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating cooling control are different The manipulated variable for the cooling control output side during heating cooling control is expressed as a negative value Control method Setting range Unit Default St
346. s shown in the following figure e There is a hysteresis of 0 2 C or F Function PV stable PV stable band band Low Within High T PV 0 2 C or F SP 0 2 C or F When analog inputs are used 0 02 FS a Modes Settingrange Unt Default Controllers with Thermocouple Resis 0 1 to 999 9 C or F 5 0 Setting tance Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 to 99 99 Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters See PV change color advanced function setting level Page 230 231 Section 5 8 Advanced Function Setting Level IZM R oi oO Ma I za Hon Alarm 1 must be assigned and the alarm 1 type must not be O 12 or 13 Alarm 2 must be assigned and the alarm 2 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 3 must be assigned and the alarm 3 type must not be O 12 or 13 Alarm 1 ON Delay Alarm 2 ON Delay Alarm 3 ON Delay Alarm 1 2 or 3 outputs are prevented from turning ON until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed e Set the time for which the ON delay is to be enabled Function e To disable the ON delay set O _ Setting _Setting range Unit Default __ owo Sen 0 E Related Parameters See Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Pages 207 to 210 _ Alarm 1 must be assigned and the A lof Alarm 1 OFF Delay alarm 1 type must not be 0 12 o
347. s such as installing a surge absorber As an addi tional safety measure provide error detection in the control loop Use the Loop Burnout Alarm LBA and HS alarm that are provided for the ESUN Varistor load Varistor a Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions Voltage used Varistor voltage Long life relay output 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1 000 A min 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Control Output 2 e Outputs are sent from terminals 11 12 14 and 15 with the E5CN and from pins 14 and 15 with the E5AN EN The following diagrams show the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits Voltage for driving SSR Voltage for driving SSR Relay __ Relay _ Voltage for driving SSF for driving SSR E5CN E5AN EN e The following table shows the specifications for each output type E5CN Output type Specifications Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 21 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion E5AN EN Output type Specifications Long life relay 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 1 000 000 using a triac operations Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 21 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion e Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected e The voltage output for driving SSR is not electrically isolated from the internal circui
348. s than 1 s Press the O M C Temperature Input Shift 1 point shift j T T H Upper Limit Set either IT Temperature of these 00 Input Shift Value parameters 2 point shift 4 Lower Limit Temperature sf Input Shift Value Proportional Band Integral Time oo a Tu tuo Lo Fy PID settings Derivative Time lt co gt ne e o 9 Cooling Coefficient 0000 r i pe LA fa aoa ia j E lt 4 Heating cooling Dead Band Manual Reset Value Clear the offset during 2 gt GAN stabilization of P or PD control ee HHG Hysteresis Heating co Hysteresis settings St Fr uL Hysteresis Cooling BLM Ooo mn DER LLU ce a czo i 3 Gai Soak Time it OOM I 000 l ge Wk b Wait Band Be SFF ce E Mi 5 MV at Stop SS AIE MV at PV Error ae GARL SP Ramp Set Value MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit MV Change Rate Limit pg ooog T gt oe Hg a ME 20 Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 0000 Lm oo 00 os Press the LO
349. se a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the E5GN Cross sectional area of conductor AWG24 0 205 mm AWG14 2 081 mm 43 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 RS 232C E5AN EN GN Onl e When communications are to be used with the E5AN E5EN E5GN LILILIO1LJ connect communications cable across terminals 11 to 13 or terminals 7 to 9 h a2 RD RD RS 232C 8 RS 232C SG SG 9 L101 E5AN EN O001011 E5GN L1 RS 2320 25 pin FONNEN i A ESAN EN _ RS 232C Rs 232C SD TXD RD RXD RD RXD SD TXD RS RTS ER DTR CS CTS SG DR DSR DR DSR SG RS RTS ER DTR CS CTS FG a e Host computer E5GN Host computer DOS V E5GN RS 232C 25 pin Se RS 232C 9 pin RS 232C RS 232C RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS e A 1 1 connection is used The maximum cable length is 15 m To extend the transmission path use the OMRON Z3R RS 232C Optical Interface e Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG14 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for the E5CN E5EN or E5AN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the E5GN gt Cross sectional area of a conductor AWG24 0 205 mm AWG14 2 081 mm N External Power Supply for e Connect terminals 11 and 12 when using the E53 CNULIPHLIN2 as
350. se the IA and keys to set the E alarm value to 20 C Alarm Value 1 20 Set alarm values Start operation Start operation Initial Setting Examples Section 3 1 Example 2 Input type 9 T thermocouple 200 C to 400 C Control method PID control PID constants found using auto tuning AT Alarm type 2 upper limit Alarm value 1 30 C Set point 150 C Setup Procedure Operation Level Press the O key for Initial Setting at least 3 s iti i Control stops Level Initial Setting p Level Use the A and speciticationg select the input type J ON OFF aNaFf For PID set Ped Use the A and specifications PID control PID Pod control Use the Al and To execute aN When ON self tuning keys to set ST a U Ten operates Set alarm type to OFF te oe BF I Check the Control Period It is recommended that 20 seconds I control period T cd be set for a relay output and 2 Unit Seconds seconds for an SSR voltage output Check the alarm type Alarm 1 Type Z Press the O key for PV SP at least 1 s after AT is Control starts stopped Operation Level Oe st Use the A and X keys to se
351. sed for the heating control output and the Control Period Cooling parameter is used for the cooling control output Parameter name Setting range Unit Defaut a Control Period Heating Sati Control Period Cooling E Related Parameters See PID ON OFF initial setting level Page 204 oFEY Direct Reverse Operation Function T Setting 206 e Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased when the process value increases Alternatively reverse oper ation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased when the process value decreases Setting range Domn ar F Reverse operation of c Direct operation aR Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 Alef Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 must be assigned e Select one of the following alarm 1 types Deviation deviation range absolute value LBA or PV change rate alarm Function L Setting Di Alarm output operation When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative Description of function o Alarm fonction OFF Output OFF Upper and lower limit 1 Upper limit Poe 4 See note Upper and lower limit range 1 3 1 5 See note Upper and lower limit 1 with standby sequence Upper limit with standby sequence 7 1 1 1 1 Lower limit with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit 0 Absolute value upper limit with standby sequence Absolute val
352. set value is aia i e the default 5 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second Next set the set point value Setting the SP Operating Procedure In this example the set point is set to 200 The set value i e the SP is shown at the bottom of the display Operation Level 1 Select the Process Value Set Point parameter in the operation level 2 Use the IA and Keys to set the SP In this example it is set to 200 The new set value can be saved by pressing the kel Key or it will go into effect after two seconds have elapsed Next set the hysteresis 61 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 Setting the Hysteresis Operating Procedure Operation Level Adjustment Level Display Hysteresis Heating Set the hysteresis to 2 0 C 1 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level The Adjustment Level Display parameter will be displayed in the adjust ment level Select the Hysteresis Heating parameter by pressing the cel Key Press the lAl and X Keys to set the hysteresis 2 0 in this example Ei ther press the kel Key or wait for at least two seconds after setting the hys teresis value to confirm the setting To return to the operation level press the O Key 3 8 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 3 8 1 AT Auto tunin
353. splay at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexa decimal Set the 6 dial as follows e Input type O 200 Q e Input type 1 2 3o0r4 140 Q Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the Key to temporarily register the calibration settings lf this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 6 When the e Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the 6 dial to 10 Q Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the I Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 7 When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the Al Key The No 2 display changes to 4 5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the el Key This stores the temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE PROM press the cel Key while a is displayed in the No 2 display with out pressing the Al Key 8 The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF 6 5 Anal
354. ss 2 circuits 2 lf the output relays are used past their life expectancy contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur Always consider the application conditions and use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy The life expectancy of output relays varies considerably with the output load and switching conditions 1 A SELV circuit is one separated from the power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation that does not exceed 30 V r m s and 42 4 V peak or 60 VDC 2 A class 2 power supply is one tested and certified by UL as having the current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific levels A CAUTION Tighten the terminal screws to between 0 74 and 0 90 N m Loose screws may occasionally result in fire Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled If they are not suitable unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents A malfunction in the Temperature Controller may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs resulting in property damage To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the Temperature Controller take appropriate safety measures such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line A semiconductor is used in the output section of long life relays If excessive noise or surge is impressed on the output terminals a short cir
355. t the SP to 150 C Adjustment Level Press the O key Adjustment for less than 1 s The set point Level To execute AT execution flashes during 100 AT To execute 100 AT auto tuning auto tuning AT Execute AT To execute select Ht c To execute 40 AT execution 40 AT at il select At I To cancel AT select After AT is Tocancel __ aF F AT cancel When PID stopped i oat control is Press the LO key for less than 1 s selected During A E execution onfirm that a the set point PV SP 5 HE is 150 C g m BEC Ae Operation Confirm that oe Level control is unning mun running Stopped Eai Set alarm value Use the A and X keys to set Alarm 30 the alarm value Value 1 to 30 C Start operation Start operation 51 Setting the Input Type Section 3 2 3 2 Setting the Input Type The Controller supports four input types platinum resistance thermometer thermocouple infrared temperature sensor and analog inputs Set the input type that matches the sensor that is used In the product specifications there are models with thermocouple resistance thermometer inputs universal inputs and models with analog input The settings differ depending on the model Chec
356. t Stop and MV at PV Error parameters are to be displayed Function o Setingan Dom aN Displayed af F Not displayed Setting E Related Parameters See MV at stop MV at PV error adjustment level Page 192 233 Section 5 8 Advanced Function Setting Level AMAA Auto Manual Select Addition The control must be set to 2 PID control This parameter sets whether the Auto Manual Switch parameter is to be dis played e Set whether the Auto Manual Switch parameter is to be displayed Function Setting range Default _ aN Displayed af F Not displayed fone Setting E Related Parameters See Auto manual switch operation level Page 166 The control must be set to 2 PID DE RT control Function Setting See 234 The input type must be set to tem perature input This parameter executes robust tuning RT e When AT or ST is executed with RT selected PID constants are automat ically set which make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when control object characteristics are changed e Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode Setting range Domn oN RT function OFF of F RT function ON E Related Parameters AT execute cancel Page 179 Proportional band Integral time Derivative time Page 188 adjustment level PID ON OFF Page 204 ST
357. t function Setting range Deran Manual MV Limit OFF Disabled ON Enabled ON Enable Moving from the e When the O Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds in the operation level s Operation Level to the auto manual switching display the manual mode will be entered and the Manual Control Level manual control level will be displayed It is not possible to move to any dis plays except for the PV MV parameter during manual operation Press the LO Key for at least one second from the PV MV parameter display in man ual control level to return to automatic mode and display the top parame ter in the operation level Operation Level a key for at least 1 s Manual Control Level Auto Manual Switch Press O key for at least 3 H display flashes for at least 1 s ME Ef Multi SP cyt A mire vi a LI e If an event input is set to MANU auto manual the Auto Manual Switch parameter will not be displayed Use the event input to switch between automatic and manual modes 123 Performing Manual Control Section 4 13 Using the PF Key to e When the PF Setting parameter is set to A M Auto Manual pressing the Move to the Manual PF Key for at least one second while in the adjustment or operation level Control Level will change the mode to manual mod
358. t gener ate powerful high frequencies high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines etc or surge Ensuring Measurement Accuracy When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same Mount the Temperature Controller so that it is horizontally level If the measurement accuracy is low check to see if input shift has been set correctly Waterproofing XIV The degree of protection is as shown below Sections without any specification on their degree of pro tection or those with IP_JO are not waterproof Front panel IP66 Rear case IP20 Terminal section IPOO E5CN U Front panel IP50 rear case IP20 terminals IP00 Precautions for Operation 1 2 3 4 It takes approximately two seconds for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON Due consideration must be given to this time when incorporating Temperature Controllers into a control panel or similar device Make sure that the Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display When executing self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the s
359. t in units of 250 ms Sampling period A Settingrange Wm 1 to 999 Sampling period 4 1s Setting E Related Parameters See Present value Process value set point operation level Page 165 Alarm 1 to 3 type Initial setting level Pages 207 to 210 rorp Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjust The control must be set to heating LALI ment cooling control and 2 PID control e By setting the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter to ON autotuning can be executed during heating cooling control to auto matically calculate the cooling coefficient at the same time as the PID Function parameters If there is strong non linear gain for the cooling characteris tics such as when cooling water boils for cooling control it may not be possible to obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Controller and control may take the form of oscillating waves If that occurs increase the proportional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control gt _ oN Enabled of F Disabled OFF Setting E Related Parameters See Cooling coefficient adjustment level Page 189 245 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be acl Heater Overcurrent Use supported Alarm 1 must be assigned e Set this parameter to use the heater overcurrent alarm 4 Function Seting range Doat aN Enabled aF F Disabled Heater burnout HS alarms
360. t points 0 to 3 cannot be selected Setting e Default OFF E Related Parameters See Multi SP set point setting operation level Page 167 Number of multi SP uses Initial setting level Page 213 SPRI SP Ramp Time Unit ae parameter must be set to Function T Setting See 220 e This parameter sets the time unit for the rate of change during SP ramp operation o somngrange Domn 5 EU s M EU min H EU h E Related Parameters Ramp SP monitor operation level Page 167 SP ramp set value adjustment level Page 193 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 RESE Function T Setting See Alarm 1 to 3 type must be 5 6 7 10 Standby Sequence Reset i e This parameter selects the conditions for enabling reset after the standby sequence of the alarm has been canceled e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level e Condition A Control started including power ON and set point alarm value alarm value upper lower limit or input shift value upper lower limit temperature input shift value changed e Condition B Power ON e The following example shows the reset action when the alarm type is lower limit alarm with standby sequence Condition A only SP change Y Alarm E pees ee es EEE ERE l after change i I of Alarm hysteresis l l l Condition A O Sta
361. t the 6 dial to the resistance equivalent to the check value 271 Checking Indication Accuracy 6 7 3 Analog Input 272 e Preparations Section 6 7 The diagram below shows the required device connections The connection terminals depend on the model and input type Controller with a Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input Analog Input r Input power supply L Input power supply L Input power supply Input power supply L Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6 7 Current Input for a Controller with an Analog Input r Input power supply L Input power supply L rm Input power supply L re Input power supply L gt Voltage Input for a Controller with an Analog Input co Input power supply L Input power supply L r Input power supply L____ r Input power supply L gt e Operation Set the STV output to the voltage or current equivalent to the check value 273 Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6 7 274 Appendix Specifications Ratings Sensor input See note 1 Temperature input type Thermocouple K J T E L U N R S B W PLII Platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140 to 260 C Voltage input 0 to 50 mV Controllers with Analog Inputs See note 2 Current input 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Input impedance 150 Q max Voltage
362. te Function Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 to 99 99 0 10 Hysteresis Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance 0 1 to 999 9 C or F a Cooling Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 0 99 99 Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters See PID ON OFF Standard or heating cooling initial setting level Page 204 190 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 z0 The Program Pattern parameter aofi Soak Time must not be set to OFF e This parameter sets the time for the control operation when using the sim ple program function Function Setting range Unit Default A Tto 9999 Setting E Related Parameters See Program start Soak time remain operation level Page 171 Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 IIL The Program Pattern parameter WE b Wait Band must not be set to OFF e This parameter sets the stable band within which the soak time is mea sured for the simple program function Function Modei Settingrange Unt Default Controllers with Thermocouple Resis OFF or 0 1 to C or F tance Thermometer Universal Inputs 999 9 See note Setting Controllers with Analog Inputs OFF or 0 01 to 99 99 Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters See
363. tection 1 181 heater burnout detection 2 183 heater burnout hysteresis 223 heater burnout latch 223 heater current value monitor 168 180 heater current 2 value monitor 169 182 heater overcurrent detection 1 181 heater overcurrent detection 2 183 heater overcurrent hysteresis 247 heater overcurrent latch 246 heater overcurrent use 246 HS alarm 1 184 HS alarm 2 185 HS alarm hysteresis 236 HS alarm latch 235 HS alarm use 235 hysteresis cooling 190 hysteresis heating 190 initial setting communications protect 160 input digital filter 226 input error output 228 input shift type 233 input type 200 integral time 188 LBA band 237 LBA detection time 236 LBA level 237 leakage current 1 monitor 170 184 leakage current 2 monitor 170 185 limit cycle MV amplitude 225 linear current output 212 lower limit temperature input shift value 187 manual MV limit enable 244 manual reset value 190 MB command logic switching 229 monitor setting item 248 monitor setting item display 1 to 5 196 move to advanced function setting level 217 move to calibration level 254 move to protect level 160 move to protect level time 228 multi SP set point setting 167 multi SP uses 220 MV manual MV 197 MV at PV error 192 MV at stop 192 MV at stop and error addition 233 MV change rate limit 194 MV display 227 MV display selection 249 MV lower limit 193 MV monitor coo
364. ted from the internal wiring one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer Con nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents To comply with EMC standards the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable is longer than 30 m the EMC standards will not be satisfied 2 2 2 Precautions when Wiring e Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external noise e Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG14 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for the E5CN E5EN or E5AN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the E5GN The stripping length is 5 to 6 mm for the E5CN E5AN or E5EN and 6 to 8 mm for the E5GN e Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals e Use the suitable wiring material and crimp tools for crimp terminals e Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 5 N m for the ESCN U and E5GN and to 0 74 to 0 90 N m for other models The terminal torque is 0 5 to 0 6 N m for auxiliary output 2 on the ESGN e For the E5CN E5AN or E5EN use the following types of crimp terminals for M3 5 screws 33 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 F Tc z sania ye e For the E5GN use the following types of crimp terminals for M3 0 screws h C 38 mmmax t TO 88mm max e For E5GN screw
365. ter the setting will be L a Select the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter by pressing the cel Key Press the Al or Key to set ALM i The default is ALM Select the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter by pressing the cel Key Press the Al or Key to set AL Me The default is AL MZ Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level Setting the Set Point SP Auxiliary Output Opening or Closing in Alarm Section 3 6 e When close in alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output is output unchanged When open in alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output function is reversed before being output e Each auxiliary output can be set independently e These settings are made in the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm parameters advanced function setting level e The default is i a Close in Alarm e When open in alarm is set for the alarm 1 output the open in alarm sta tus is also applied to heater burnout HS alarm heater overcurrent and input error outputs Auxiliary output Auxiliary Indicators functions 1 to 3 output SUB1 to SUB3 Glose in Alarm Open in Alarm e The alarm output will turn OFF i e the relay contacts will open when power is interr
366. ter assignment is displayed for that output 2 The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program end output unless the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF 3 For the ESAN EN the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is set as the control output for cooling The Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment param eter is set for alarm 2 E Alarms It will be specified in this section when an alarm must be assigned i e when an alarm must be set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters or for the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Assignment parameters For example if alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarm 1 has been assigned Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 3 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned Operating Procedure This procedure sets the following control and auxiliary output assignments Control output 1 Control output heating Control output 2 Control output cooling Auxiliary output 1 Alarm 1 Auxiliary output 2 Alarm 2 Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Select the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter by pressing the cel Key Standar
367. ter to 7 Alarm Value 1 Operation Level PV SP Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Input Type level to the initial setting level Move to Ad 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press vanced Function ing the cel Key Setting Level 142 Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations Section 4 20 Advanced Function Setting Level 3 Press the gt Key to enter the password 169 It is possible to move to Parine the advanced function setting level by either pressing the kel Key or wait Initialization ing two seconds without pressing any key PF Setting 4 Press the kel Key to select the PF Setting parameter PF Setting 5 Press the A Key to select PFDP Monitor Setting Item Monitor Setting Press the cel Key to select the Monitor Setting Item 1 parameter Item 1 A Monitor Setting Press the Al Key to select 7 Alarm Value 1 Item 1 Initial Setting Level 8 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced Input Type function setting level to the initial setting level 9 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level Monitor Setting Item Level 10 Press the PF Key to display Alarm Value 1 Monitor Setting Item Display 1 4 20 Cou
368. terminals are corroded replace the case as well When removing the terminal block of the E5GN to replace the Digital Temperature Controller check the condition of the terminals If corroded terminals are used contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the Digital Temperature Controller to increase possibly resulting in fire If the terminals are corroded replace the terminal block as well Use suitable tools when taking the Digital Temperature Controller apart for disposal Sharp parts inside the Digital Temperature Controller may cause injury When applying Lloyd s standards install the Digital Temperature Controller according to the requirements given in Shipping Standards Do not use the Temperature Controller if the front sheet is peeling off or torn Service Life Use the Temperature Controller within the following temperature and humidity ranges Temperature 10 to 55 C with no icing or condensation Humidity 25 to 85 If the Controller is installed inside a control board the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55 C including the temperature around the Controller The service life of electronic devices like Temperature Controllers is determined not only by the num ber of times the relay is switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components Compo nent service life is affected by the ambient temperature the higher the temperature the shorter the service life and the lo
369. thermocouple with a temperature range of 200 to 1300 C 200 1300 Input setting range Set point limiter 100 1000 Setting the Set Point Upper limit Value Operating Procedure Set Point Upper Limit 1000 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Input Type ae level to the initial setting level Set Point 2 Select the Set Point Upper Limit parameter Upper limit 105 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate Section 4 7 3 Use the IA and Keys to set the parameter to 1000 Setting the Set Point Lower limit Value Operating Procedure Set Point Lower Limit Set Point Lower Limit 100 1 Select the Set Point Lower Limit parameter in the initial setting level 2 Use the IA and Keys to set the parameter to 100 4 7 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 4 7 1 SP Ramp 106 The SP ramp function is used to restrict the width of changes in the set point as a rate of change When the SP ramp function is enabled and the change width exceeds the specified rate of change an area where the set point is restricted will be created as shown in the following diagram During the SP ramp control will be performed not for the specified set point but rather for the set point restricted by the rate of change set for the SP ramp function SP SP after chang
370. ting Level Section 5 7 5 7 Initial Setting Level This level is used to set up the basic Temperature Controller specifications In this level you can set the Input Type parameter to set the sensor input to be connected limit the setting range of set points set the alarm modes and per form other operations Operation Level Press the Press the O Key for at least 3 s will flash Control stops Control in progress Initial Setting Level Control stopped To move from the operation level to the initial setting level press the O Key for at least three seconds with any parameter displayed except for the Auto Manual Switch parameter e The initial setting level is not displayed when the Initial Setting Communi cations Protect parameter is set to 2 It can be used when the Initial Set ting Communications Protect parameter is set to 0 or 1 e If the Input Type parameter is set for an analog input the following param eters will be set Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit and Decimal point Press the O Key for at least 1 s 199 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 Initial Setting Level Page Transfer Output L ransfer Output Lower 9412 Ey 3 Q Q O D Linear Current Output 212 213 216
371. tion Setting Level 4 Press the kel Key to select the PV SP Display Screen Selection parame ter Parameter ___ Initialization Advanced Function Setting Level 5 Use the A and Keys to set 2 PV SP Display Screen Selection 6 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 7 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level The MV will be displayed on the No 3 display Operation Level 8 Press the kel Key to confirm that the Multi SP is displayed on the No 3 PV SP display 85 Setting the No 3 Display Section 3 11 86 SECTION 4 Applications Operations This section describes scaling the SP ramp function and other special functions that can be used to make the most of the functionality of the ESCN ESAN and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers A b Shine Input Vales an teen eev enw ae Genes S506 49S HSE PEA SeE RES 89 4 1 1 Shifting Inputs 0 cee eens 89 4 1 2 How to Calculate Input Shift Values for a 2 point Shift 90 AD Par CY StCLe SIS i tex easy ness oe ae ae ee eae Ra Be SR ee 93 A221 Standby SCIU NEG sanadera 0 240M catharchenntadhacheuds 93 ADey Alarm Lateh ou arts be Cet heed oe SG BEV Re EG eee Gua ee 94 4 3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 94
372. tion level press the O Key for at least one second 115 Alarm Delays Section 4 11 4 11 Alarm Delays 4 11 1 Alarm Delays e Delays can be set for the alarm outputs ON and OFF delays can be set separately for alarms 1 2 and 3 The ON and OFF delays for alarm 1 function only for the alarm function If the alarm 1 function is set to be out put as an OR with other alarms i e the heater burnout alarm HS alarm heater overcurrent alarm or input error output alarm delays cannot be set for the other alarms The ON and OFF delays for alarms 1 2 and 3 also apply to the individual SUB1 SUB2 and SUBS indicators and to communications status The alarm ON delays will also function when power is turned ON or when moving from the initial setting level to opera tion level e g to software resets All outputs will turn OFF and the OFF delays will not function when moving to the initial setting level or when an alarm is output for a A D converter error Operation of Alarm ON and OFF Delays for an Upper limit Alarm PV Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting ON delay set time OFF delay set time Alarm status Alarm Latch OFF ON delay set time e The alarm will not turn ON if the time that the alarm is ON is equal to or less than the ON delay set time Also the alarm will not turn OFF if the time that the alarm is OFF is equal to or less than the OFF delay set time e f an alarm turns OFF and then back O
373. tly by Omron for the manufacture production sale delivery importa tion consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder including customs duties and sales excise use turnover and license taxes shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron Financial If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement Omron may without liabil ity and in addition to other remedies cancel any unshipped portion of Prod ucts sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts including amounts payable hereunder whether or not then due which are owing to it by Buyer Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts Cancellation Etc Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses Force Majeure Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control including earthquakes fires floods strikes or other labor disputes shortage of labor or materials accidents to machinery acts of sabotage riots delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority Shipping Delivery Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing
374. to a cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 8231 mm2 The stripping length for screw terminals is 6 to 8 mm The stripping length for screwless clamp terminals is 10 mm The stripping length for auxiliary output 2 is 6 mm Up to two wires of the same size and type or two crimp terminals can be connected to one terminal Do not connect more than two wires or more than two crimp terminals to the same terminal Ferrules for screwless clamp terminals must be 0 8 to 1 4 mm in diameter and the exposed conductor must be 8 to 12 mm in length Ferrules for auxiliary output 2 must be 0 8 to 1 4 mm in diameter and the exposed conductor must be 6 mm in length 6 Do not wire the terminals which are not used 7 To avoid inductive noise keep the wiring for the Digital Temperature Controller s terminal block away from power cables carry high voltages or large currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Temperature Controller wiring Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance component When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the temperature controller Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Temperature Contr
375. to be protected Shaded settings are the defaults MM E Operation Adjustment Protect The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range Function of protection Level a O O y ee n Can be displayed Can be displayed Can be displayed Can be displayed eung PV SP Can be displayed Can be displayed Can be displayed Can be displayed and changed and changed and changed Can be displayed Can be displayed Cannot be dis Cannot be dis and changed and changed played and moving played and moving to other levels is _ to other levels is not possible not possible Adjustment Level Can be displayed Cannot be dis Cannot be dis Cannot be dis and changed played and moving played and moving played and moving to other levels is to other levels is to other levels is not possible not possible not possible e Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to 0 E Initial Setting Communications Protect This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level communica tions setting level and advanced function setting level Set Initial setting level Communications Advanced function value setting level setting level Oo Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach 160 Protect Level Section 5 2 i The Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 EPE Setting
376. tputs 1 and 2 wiring 37 39 control periods 54 206 Controllers with Analog Input 267 Controllers with Analog Inputs 259 268 Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input 258 265 cooling coefficient setting 98 current input calibration 267 current transformer calculating detection current 75 Current Transformers CT 74 279 CT inputs wiring 42 external dimensions 279 E54 CT1 279 E54 CT3 279 specifications 278 279 Current Value Exceeds error display 282 D dead band 97 setting 98 derivative time 68 detection current 75 dimensions 22 ESAN 22 ESCN 22 309 ESCN U 22 ESEN 22 ESGN 23 direct operation 55 206 Display Range Exceeded error display 281 down key 5 E error displays 281 Current Value Exceeds 282 Display Range Exceeded 281 Heater Burnout 283 Heater Overcurrent 283 HS Alarm 283 Input Error 281 Memory Error 282 event inputs 13 41 99 101 wiring 41 external dimensions Current Transformer CT 279 external power supply for ESIB 14 44 90 276 F front panel ESAN 2 ESCN 2 ESCN U 2 ESEN 3 ESGN 3 H HB alarm heater burnout alarm 73 settings 80 Heater Burnout error display 283 heater burnout alarm 13 276 heater burnout hysteresis 223 heater burnout latch 223 heater overcurrent hysteresis 247 latch 246 heating cooling control 95 189 193 204 cooling coefficient 97 189 dea
377. traction of square root low cut point 100 FS Argument 1 input data a Setting range Unit Defaut 0 0 to 100 0 oo Setting 194 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 E Related Parameters See Extraction of square root enable initial setting level Page 216 195 Monitor Setting Item Level Section 5 5 5 5 Monitor Setting Item Level Monitor setting items can be displayed by means of the function key when the PF Setting parameter advanced function setting level is set to PFDP Moni tor Setting Item for the ESAN EN only Power ON Operation Adjustment Level Level Press the O Key for at least 1 s Monitor Setting Item Level Key Key C Control in progress The PF Setting parameter must be set to PFDP and the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters must not be Monitor Setting Item Display 1 to 5 set to OFF e When the PF Key is set to display monitor setting items pressing the PF Key will display in order the contents of the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters The contents of these parameters are shown in the following Function table For the setting monitor ranges refer to the applicable parameters C eee R o pusema fomes f PVSPMV Canbeset SP 2 ree oaks rona fares se f Proportional band P _ Canbeset P integral time 0 Canbest ie Derivative ime 0 Canbeset Sd Nam vae Canes r e a Gan be set aC o Alarm vaiue lowe
378. ts Therefore when using a grounding thermocouple do not connect any of the control output terminals to the ground If a control out put terminal is connected to the ground errors will occur in the measured temperature as a result of leakage current With ESAN EN however con trol output 2 voltage output for driving SSR is functionally isolated from the internal circuits e Control output 2 of the E5CN is a voltage output for driving SSR only and outputs across terminals 11 and 12 or 14 and 15 e Control output 1 voltage output for driving SSR and control output 2 voltage output for driving SSR are not isolated e Long life relay outputs use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability However if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals short circuit faults may occasionally occur If the output becomes permanently shorted there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater Design safety into the system including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire 39 Wiring Terminals Auxiliary Outputs 1 2 and 3 40 Section 2 2 Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber As an addi tional safety measure provide error detection in the control loop Use the Loop Burnout Alarm LBA and HS alarm that are provided for the ESUN Varistor l
379. ts for miswiring disconnections and short circuits and check the input type If no abnormality is found in the wiring and input type turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remains the same the Controller must be replaced If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical noise Note With resistance thermometer input a break in the A B or B line is regarded as a disconnection Operation at Error After an error occurs the error is displayed and the alarm outputs function as if the upper limit has been exceeded When the Input Error Output parameter in the advanced function setting level is set to ON the output assigned to the alarm 1 function turns ON whenever an input error occurs An error message is displayed when the PV PV SP or PV MV is displayed Note The control output turns OFF When the manual MV MV at stop or MV at PV error is set however the control output corresponds to the set value Display Range Exceeded Meaning Though this is not an error it is displayed if the process value exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the display range The display ranges are shown below with decimal points omitted e When less than 1 999 CCCE e When more than 9 999 3333 281 Appendix Action Control continues allowing normal operation The message is displayed when the PV PV SP or PV MV is dis
380. tup 68 Memory Error error display 282 mode key 5 mounting 25 terminal cover ESAN ESEN 26 ESCN ESCN U 26 to panel ESAN ESEN 26 ESCN ESCN U 25 ESGN 27 multi SP 101 167 MV at PV error 137 233 MV at stop 136 233 N No 1 display 4 No 2 display 4 O ON OFF control 54 204 setting 61 one point shift 91 operation level 16 163 parameter operation list 288 operation adjustment protect 110 output functions assignments 56 output limits 136 output periods 206 output specifications setting 54 P panel cutout ESAN 24 ESCN ESCN U 24 ESEN 24 ESGN 25 parameter flow 305 parameter operation list 288 adjustment level 289 manual control level 294 operation level 288 parameter operation lists advanced function setting level 294 communications setting level 299 initial setting level 291 protect level 299 parameter structure 258 parameters additional PV display 226 adjustment level display 179 alarm hysteresis 209 alarm latch 227 alarm OFF delay 232 alarm 1 ON delay 232 311 312 alarm 1 type 207 alarm 2 hysteresis 209 alarm 2 latch 227 alarm 2 OFF delay 232 alarm 2 ON delay 232 alarm 2 type 209 alarm 3 hysteresis 209 alarm 3 latch 227 alarm 3 OFF delay 232 alarm 3 ON delay 232 alarm 3 type 210 alarm SP selection 244 alarm value 1 172 alarm value 2 173 alarm value 3 173 alarm value lower limit 1 174 al
381. ue lower limit with standby sequence E Absolute value lower limit 2 LBA alarm 1 type only PV change rate alarm Set the deviation in the set point by setting the alarm upper limit H and alarm lower limit L Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X Set the deviation in the set point by setting the alarm upper limit H and alarm lower limit L A standby sequence is added to the upper and lower limit alarm 1 See note 6 A standby sequence is added to the upper limit alarm 2 See note 6 A standby sequence is added to the lower limit alarm 3 See note 6 The alarm will turn ON if the pro cess value is larger than the alarm value X regardless of the set point The alarm will turn ON if the pro cess value is smaller than the alarm value X regardless of the set point A standby sequence is added to the absolute value upper limit alarm 8 See note 6 A standby sequence is added to the absolute value lower limit alarm 9 See note 6 Refer to page 118 See note 7 Refer to page 72 See note 8 207 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 Note 1 With set values 1 4 and 5 the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type and are expressed as L and H 2 Set value 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 1 Case
382. ue set point operation level Page 165 Alarm 1 type initial setting level Page 207 LBA detection time Page 236 LBA band Page 237 advanced function set ting level LbAb Function Setting See Note Alarm 1 must be assigned The alarm type must be set to 12 LBA Band LBA The LBA detection time must not be 0 e This parameter sets the LBA band e If a control deviation greater than the LBA band is not reduced when the LBA level is exceeded an loop burnout is detected Soning range Unt Derat Controllers with EE 0 0 to 999 9 C or F tance Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 00 to 99 99 Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters Process value set point operation level Page 165 Alarm 1 type initial setting level Page 207 LBA detection time LBA level advanced function setting level Page 236 237 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Function Setting See 238 The transfer output type must be set Control Output 1 Assignment to OFF when the control output is a Note current output e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to control output 1 oo o oo songen SSC s Heating control output is output Cooling control output is output See note 1 D hl jme rq Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 2 Work bit 1 See notes 2 and
383. unting Brackets little by little to maintain balance until the ratchet turns freely Mounting the Terminal Cover Slightly bend the E53 COV16 Terminal Cover to attach it to the terminal block as shown in the following diagram The Terminal Cover cannot be attached in the opposite direction 26 Installation Section 2 1 ia 7 TAN l Nico me meng Slightly bend the Hee E53 COV16 ee Terminal Cover in EE the direction shown Hee J by the arrows to eA attach it to the i ES terminal block URS Enlarged Illustration of Terminal Section E5GN Mounting to the Panel 1 2 3 1 For waterproof mounting waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the water proofing function Insert the E5GN into the mounting hole in the panel Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel and temporarily fasten the E5GN Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 29 to 0 39 N m Panel Waterproof packing E5GN 27 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 4 Removing the Temperature Controller from the Case The Temperature Controller can be removed from the case to perform mainte nance without removing the terminal leads
384. upted and for about two seconds after the power is turned ON regardless of the setting of the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm parameter 3 6 Setting the Set Point SP Operation Level The operation level is displayed when the power is turned ON The process value PV is at the top of the display and the set point SP is at the bottom For Controllers that support a No 3 display E5AN E5EN the contents set in the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter advanced function setting level are displayed below the PV and SP The MV is displayed as the default For details refer to 3 11 Setting the No 3 Display 3 6 1 Changing the SP Operating Procedure Operation Level e The set point cannot be changed when the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 3 For details refer to 4 9 Using the Key Protect Level e To change the set point press the X or Key in the Process Value Set Point parameter in the operation level and set the desired set value The new set point is selected two seconds after you have specified the new value e Multi SP is used to switch between two or four set points For details refer to 4 5 Using Event Inputs for details In this example the set point is changed from 0 C to 200 C 1 Normally the Process Value Set Point parameter is displayed The set point is 0 C 59 Using ON OFF Control Section 3 7 2 Use t
385. ur application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Vill Safety Precautions E Definition of Precautionary Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions The following notation is used Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not ANS OT NUR EO BE avoided is likely to result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage E Symbols General Caution Indicates non specific gener
386. ust be set to OFF e This parameter sets the hysteresis for heater overcurrent detection Function Setting range Um Doan a 0 410 60 0 Setting E Related Parameters See Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 oc The PF Key must be supported e This parameter sets the function of the PF Key gt KARGUAN e The default is A M Setvaue Setting Function i Disabled Does not operate as a function key RUN PUN Specifies RUN status Setting a SE ae STOP STOP Specifies STOP status Specifies STOP status sid status Reversing RUN STOP Specifies reversing RUN STOP opera operation tion status AT 2 At 2 100 AT Specifies reversing 100 AT Execute Execute Cancel Cancel status See note 1 AT 1 HE 40 AT Specifies reversing 40 AT Execute Execute Cancel Cancel status See note 1 LAT LA Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling alarm latches See note 2 Auto Manual Specifies reversing Auto Manual status See note 3 PFDP FFdF Monitor Setting Item Specifies the monitor setting item dis play Select the monitor setting item using the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters advanced function setting level Note 1 When AT cancel is specified it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currently being executed is 100 AT or 40 AT 247 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 2 Alarms 1 to 3 heater burnout HS alarms an
387. ut is ON the program END output will turn OFF Event input T or 2 Event input T or 2 When DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation is set for the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter and the Direct Reverse Operation parameter is set for reverse operation control starts with direct operation cooling control when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and control starts with reverse operation heating control when the event input turns OFF Direct Reverse Operation parameter Event input OFF Direct operation cooling Direct operation cooling Tore Reverse operation heating Reverse operation heating 103 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values Section 4 6 Direct Reverse Operation parameter Switching 100 AT Execute Cancel Switching 40 AT Execute Cancel Switching Setting Change Enable Disable Switching Alarm Latch Cancel Parameters ey ie Direct operation cooling Reverse operation heating roe Reverse operation heating Direct operation cooling When AT 2 100 AT Execute Cancel is set for either the Event Input Assign ment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter 100 AT will be executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF Event input 1 or 2 100 AT cancelled Event input 1 or 2 100 AT executed When AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel is set for either the Event Input Assign ment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter 40
388. uto Manual Key lt n AY E5GN No 1 display NA AA AA A m fA ANANIN Bm a l No 2 display Mode Key Names of Parts Section 1 1 1 1 2 Explanation of Indicators No 1 Display No 2 Display No 3 Display E5AN EN Only Operation Indicators 1 2 3 Temperature Unit Displays the process value or parameter name Lights for approximately one second during startup Displays the set point parameter operation read value or the variable input value Lights for approximately one second during startup The set point will flash during autotuning Displays MV soak time remaining or multi SP Lights for approximately one second during startup A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized 1 SUB1 Sub 1 Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment param eter is ON SUB2 Sub 2 Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment param eter is ON SUB3 Sub 3 E5AN EN Only Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment param eter is ON 2 HA Heater Burnout Heater Short Alarm Heater Overcurrent Detection Output Display Lights when a heater burnout heater short alarm or heater overcurrent Occurs 3 OUT1 Control Output 1 Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 1 turns ON For a current output however OFF for a 0 output on
389. vanced Function Setting Level 3 Press the S Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level 4 Press the 5 Press the 6 Press the 7 Press the 8 Press the cel Key to select the Alarm 1 ON Delay parameter Al Key to set the parameter to 5 ce Key to select the Alarm 1 OFF Delay parameter Al Key to set the parameter to 10 O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level 117 Loop Burnout Alarm Operation Level Section 4 12 9 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level 4 12 Loop Burnout Alarm 4 12 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 118 Set point e With a loop burnout alarm there is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation SP PV is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation is not reduced by at least the value set in the LBA Detection Band parameter within the LBA detection time e Loop burnout alarms are detected at the following times LBA detec tion time 2 LBA OF F LBA level 2 H aw _ LBA level LBA band S l TBA band Area where LBA LBA detection __ LBA detection is not detected time 1 LBA detection time I I I time I I 4 gt 1
390. vel Bdractionof 6 Select the Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point parameter by press Square Root ing the kel Key Low cut Point 138 Setting the Width of MV Variation Section 4 18 7 Use the lAl Key to set the parameter to 10 0 8 Press the O Key to return to the operation level 4 18 Setting the Width of MV Variation MV Change Rate Limit MV Change Rate Limit Heating e The MV change rate limit sets the maximum allowable width of change in the MV per second If the change in the MV exceeds this setting the MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated value is reached This function is disabled when the setting is 0 0 e The MV change rate limit does not function in the following situations e n manual mode e During ST execution Cannot be set when ST is ON e During AT execution e During ON OFF control e While stopped during MV at Stop output e During MV at PV Error output Setting rage MV Change Rate 0 0 to 100 0 z Limit Operating Procedure This procedure sets the MV change rate limit to 5 0 s The related parame ters are as follows PID ON OFF PID ST OFF Operation Level Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Input Type level to the initial setting level NIL PID ON OFF 2 Select the PID ON OFF parameter by pressi
391. vent input is selected to start the simple pro gram Seningrange Defaut O ii RSET Stops the simpler program E STRT Starts the simpler program E Related Parameters See Soak time remain Page 171 RUN STOP Page 172 operation level a Soak time Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 Function ve The Program Pattern parameter GKER Soak Time Remain a a IO OEL e This parameter measures and displays the remaining time of the soak time for the simple program function Function m Monitor range Unt 0 t0 9999 Monitor E Related Parameters See Program start operation level Page 171 m Soak time Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 171 Operation Level Section 5 3 The Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 R 5 RUN STOP parameters must not be set to RUN STOP This parameter starts and stops the control operation When FuN RUN is selected control is started When Sta STOP is selected control is stopped The STOP indicator will light when control Operation The default is FUN This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to RUN STOP Alarm 1 must be assigned AL I Alarm Value 1 The alarm 1 type must not be 0 1 4 5 or 12 This parameter
392. versal Inputs Analog input Controllers with Analog Inputs Operation Level Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Setvalue Process Value Temperature According to EU indication range for each sen Sor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS limit Auto Manual Switch a e Multi SP Set Point Oto3 4 Seiting Set Point During SP 57 SP lower limit to SP upper Ramp limit Heater Current 1 0 0 to 55 0 A Value Monitor Heater Current 2 0 0 to 55 0 A Value Monitor Leakage Current 1 0 0 to 55 0 A Monitor Leakage Current 2 0 0 to 55 0 Monitor pram San PASE RSET STAT PSE SEPE RSET RUNSTOP R5 RUNSTOP puaran fe Alarm Value Upper 1999 to 9999 Limit 1 Alarm Value Lower 1999 to 9999 Limit 1 Alarm Value 2 1999 to 9999 Alarm Value Upper 1999 to 9999 Limit 2 Alarm Value Lower 1999 to 9999 Limit 2 Alarm Value 3 Aes 1999 to 9999 Alarm Value Upper 1999 to 9999 Limit 3 Alarm Value Lower 1999 to 9999 Limit 3 MV Monitor Heat 5 0 to 105 5 standard ing 0 0 to 105 0 eine MV Monitor Cool 0 0 to 105 0 ing 288 Appendix Adjustment Level Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Set value Adjustment Level Display AT Execute Cancel OFF AT Cancel OFF None Al 2 100 AT Execute Al 1 40 AT Execute Communications LMWE OFF ON OFF None Writing Heater Current 1 0 0 to 55 0 A Value Monitor Heater Burnout 0 0 to 50 0 A Detect
393. view Section 1 introduces the features components and main specifications of the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Controllers e Setup Section 2 describes the work required to prepare the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Controllers for operation including installation and wiring e Basic Operations Section 3 describes the basic operation of the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Control lers including key operations to set parameters and descriptions of display elements based on specific control examples Section 5 describes the individual parameters used to setup control and monitor operation e Operations for Applications Section 4 describes scaling the SP ramp function and other special functions that can be used to make the most of the functionality of the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Controllers Section 5 describes the individual parameters used to setup control and monitor operation e User Calibration Section 6 describes how the user can calibrate the ESCN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Con trollers e Appendix The Appendix provides information for easy reference including lists of parameters and settings N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section a
394. wer the temperature the longer the service life Therefore the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Temperature Controller xiii When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the Temperature Controllers and the service life will decrease In such a case use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers When providing forced cooling however be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors Ambient Noise To avoid inductive noise keep the wiring for the Digital Temperature Controller s terminal block wiring away from power cables carrying high voltages or large currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Temperature Controller wiring Using shielded cables and using separate con duits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance compo nent When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the Temperature Controller Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Temperature Controller and devices tha
395. will change to STOP after the soak time has expired If the program pattern is set to LoNkt control will continue in RUN status after the soak time has expired o Songen Dom GFF Simple program function turned OFF SEAP Go to STOP mode at end of program EENE Continue in RUN mode at end of program E Related Parameters Program start Soak time remain Page 171 RUN STOP Page 172 operation level Soak time Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 205 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 The cooling control output and heat PO ing control output must be assigned Li Control Period Heating to relay or voltage outputs for driving gt SSR The control must be set to 2 PID control For the Control Period Cooling parameter the control must be set to heating cooling control Control Period Cooling e These parameters set the output periods Set the control periods taking the control characteristics and the electrical durability of the relay into consideration Pa e For standard control use the Control Period Heating parameter The Control Period Cooling parameter cannot be used e When the heating control output is a current output the Control Period Heating parameter cannot be used e For heating cooling control the control period can be set independently for heating and cooling The Control Period Heating parameter is u
396. xecute Cancel control must be 2 PID control Displayed symbol Parameter name Conditions for use 5 1 3 The Order of Parameters in This Section 5 1 4 Alarms 158 Parameters are described level by level The first page of each level describes the parameters in the level and the pro cedure to switch between parameters It will be specified in this section when alarms are set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters or for the Auxiliary Output 1 or 3 Assignment parameters For example when alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assign ment parameter it will be specified that alarm 1 is assigned Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 3 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned Protect Level Section 5 2 5 2 Protect Level Four levels of protection are provided on the E5LIN operation adjustment pro tect initial setting communications protect setting change protect and PF key protect E5AN EN only These protect levels prevent unwanted operation of the keys on the front panel in varying degrees Operation Adjustment Level Level Press the O Key less than 1 s Press the O cel keys display will flash Press the O ce Keys for at least 1 s Pr
397. y Output 1 Assign ment and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level I O Configuration and Main Functions Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Note Controllers E5CN UUMUILI _1 500 12345 6 7 1 Control Output 1 R Relay output Q Voltage output for driving SSR C Current output Y Long life relay output hybrid 1 2 Auxiliary Outputs 2 Blank None 2 Two outputs 3 Option M Option Unit can be mounted 4 Input Type T Universal thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer L Analog current voltage input 5 Power Supply Voltage Blank 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC VDC 6 Case Color Blank Black W Silver 7 Terminal Cover 500 With terminal cover ESCN LILILIU 123 4 1 Output Type R Relay output Q Voltage output for driving SSR C Current output 2 Number of Alarms Blank No alarm 1 One alarm 2 Two alarms 3 Input Type T Universal thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer L Analog Input 4 Plug in type U Plug in type Section 1 2 Option Units E53 CN_ILIL 1234 1 Applicable Controller CN E5CN or E5CN H 2 Function 1 Blank None Q Control output 2 voltage for driv ing SSR P Power supply for sensor 3 Function 2 Blank None H Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT 1 HH Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT2 B Two event input
398. y after the power is turned ON To move to other levels press the O Key or the O and cel Keys 163 Operation Level Section 5 3 Operation Level Process Value 0 sab MO Process Value Set Point 1 larm Value Upper See note Limit 1 EA H 2 M Auto Manual Switch 166 A Alarm Value Lower ate n Limit 1 ui Alarm Value 2 173 174 cp Alarm Value Lower 174 173 175 175 Program Start 175 Soak Time Remain 176 RUN STOP Note For details on the displays of Controllers with a No 3 display E5AN EN refer to Process Value Set Point on page 165 164 Operation Level Section 5 3 The Additional PV Display parameter Process Value must be set to ON The process value is displayed on the No 1 display and nothing is displayed on the No 2 and No 3 E5AN EN only displays Function m A ee Process value Temperature According to indication range for each sensor Monitor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Refer to page 303 During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor
399. ying power to the Digital Temperature Controller If power is turned ON for the Digital Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 PID Constants When control characteristics are already known PID constants can be set directly to adjust control PID constants are set in the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and Derivative Time D parameters in the adjustment level Note Operating Procedure This procedure executes self tuning ST Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 1 Input Type 2 Select the ST parameter by pressing the Ice Key 3 Press the A Key to select ai ON is the default 4 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second The temperature display flashes during self tuning ST execution Self tuning by step response tuning SRT is started when the following condi tions are met after program execution is started and the set point is changed At start of operation When set point is changed The set point at the start of operation 1 The new set point differs from the set Startup Conditions differs from the set point when the pre vious SRT was executed See note 1 The diffe

E5CN/E5AN/E5EN/E5GN Digital Temperature Controllers

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents